Home

Unified Synoptic System (USS) User Manual

Contents

1. 3 Project Display L Zoom value 100 consistency Zoom step size 10 3 Data Source Import Grid style Dots Y 3 Database Grid spacing width 10 3 MDB General Grid spacing height 10 MDB CDU Grid snap on resize During E 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE Grid snap on move During E Grid draw thickness 1 Grid draw color Display width Display target system MCS Display height 560 Display back ground color Default Settings for New Created Display s The display category contains the following properties which are used as default for new displays a Zoom value Default zoom value in percent b Zoom step size Default step size in percent for zooming in and out c Grid Style Default grid style choose between Non Dots Dashed Lines d Grid spacing width Default grid spacing width in pixels e Grid spacing height Default grid spacing height in pixels f Grid snap on resize policy Default behaviour of snapping when resizing an element in a display g Grid snap on move policy Default behaviour of snapping when moving an element in a display h Grid draw thickness Default grid thickness in pixels 1 Grid draw colour Default grid colour U Display width Default display width when creating anew display K Display target system Default display target system when creating anew display LU Display height Default display height when creating anew display m Display back ground c
2. Expression mdbPathl APMIFLTSYSICOL iC TCTIPRIM CUR A mdbPath APMIFLTSYS COLTICTC1 FAILURE_STS PI 4 lt Select Symbol y Select Construct Select Function Q Evaluation Expression Valid Unit Type Float v Name Expression8 Status Propagation Data source dialog details for a computation Note that changing the type from e g external to computation and back to external again will clear all properties of the defined data source Fields e Unit Used to describe the output of your expression Example degC e Type The type your expression returns Example Integer e Name The name that describes your expression e Status Propagation If checked your expression will propagate statuses received from its own data sources 4 7 2 Supported Data Source Types The table below summarizes which data sources are supported for which elements and element prop erties 150 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 7 DATA SOURCES Table 4 7 Supported Data Source Types and Ranges per Property and Element Property type Data types supported Range allowed values Label Data Field Shapes Input Field Pipe Integer Float Dynamic Property Non negative Fill Color Draw Color Dynamic Property Corner Color Integer Meters Float Value Data Source Data Field Braes Any range Any Integer LineGraph Float Value Data Source StripGraph State Code Any range Any Intege
3. EZL File Edit View Tools Element Window Help 80 slo jajja jeje oa BEN e m s e ue a mjojo Mj aj e e DINE Junitorm seating tf io y Property Editor e x a ax dispayi x ee display 1 9 Appearance Background Color Background Symbol Library z Background Symbol Name L 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button LJ 9 Context Help URL Li p Ld Synoptic Hierarchy 2 x na 9 7 Open Displays E No title assigned on display 1 9 Eq home cgsadmin uss project E lib 4 Il ii Symbol library 8x i 2 7 System Configuration Browser 8 x fh Consistency Results x T 1 3 2 Starting the executor The executor is started via a shell script batch file on Windows Open a shell and enter uss executor sh The executor will open in a new window see Figure 1 2 S uss executor sh TIP In MCS the editor and executor can be started from the task selector menu CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND GETTING STARTED 1 3 GETTING STARTED Figure 1 2 Executor window after start 6 USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 File Navigate View Options Window Help Jue gt ale O O m neak PA Editor and executor offer command line options that are primarily useful for integration in special enviro
4. 4 a Library editor x p System configuration browser X E Consistency checker 8 x The windows can be arranged within the Editor by dragging them to the desired position The views in the Editor are The display area The area for creating the display by adding and arranging elements System configuration browser The System configuration browser is a tool view for the Editor to ease creation of data sources commands and navigation It is based on the SCOE XML file in a tree structure The System configuration browser can show the SCOE information in OPS or Path view OPS or path name is used for sorting SCOE xml nodes It provides Drag and Drop functionality for TM and TC information and filtering and hierarchical browsing of the selected MDB configuration Synoptic hierarchy The Synoptic Hierarchy is a tool view for the Editor to ease navigation of cur rently open displays and the USS project displays defined by the project root folder It provides possibility to create navigation target to project displays and easy opening hereof Furthermore it provides rename delete and explorer functionality Symbol library The library of symbols that can created edited and dragged onto the display Property editor View and edit the properties of the selected element s Display View Settings Preferences for current display Consistency results Report of the last run consistency check The toolb
5. 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS home uss uss project CDU 316990119 APM COMMON TEST SI B Buttoni Z Test MDB communication Button properties are shown in the Property Editor Click on the button Button1 for the property Released Label Text to open text edit dialog Click button OK 2 est MDB Dialog for multi line text edit shows new text Save display by choosing from menu File Save Submit the changes to the MDB by selecting from menu File MDB Save in MDB Delete the display file in the MDB by selecting from menu File MDB Delete in MDB Click button Yes to delete the tutorial display file 3 19 2 Lesson in using the editor MDB interfacing for Symbol Libraries 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Select the view Symbol Library if not open use menu View Symbol Library 3 In the Symbol Library use the button Edit to create a new user library 4 Select New Library Qi Symbol Library x 3D Graphics 3D1 Camera Control Mo K B 3D10 Restore View 3D11 Roll Right T ispa e x Y 3D1 Camera Rotate e 3D11 Roll Left All 3D11 Roll Right Altern t MU ad 1 t S il Delet Create New Library ime Librai Create new lib Librai 3D1 Camera Transl Ureatel dd ted Element mbol
6. Valve Three Way Mot U10 Fan R U11 Video Monitor U13 Thermal Plate U14 box green The USS library in the Symbol Library 4 5 1 Pre Defined Dynamic Symbols The USS library in the Symbol Library contains among others a number of dynamic symbols The USS library is illustrated above State names for predefined dynamic symbols in the USS library can be inspected by selecting the symbol in the library and then opening the Property editor This is illustrated below 128 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 5 USING THE SYMBOL LIBRARY DynamicLed Base 9 Comment q Selected State 9 States Symbol Dynamic Image a symbols dynamic images Inspecting properties of a symbol in the library 4 5 2 Creating New Libraries and Symbols New user libraries can hold symbols with different contents Image or USS sub display Images can be raster images gif jpg or png or vector graphics svg Images can be created outside the Editor in an image manipulation program stored to file and added to a library in the USS Editor Images can also be created inside the USS Editor but only based on already existing symbols and elements USS sub displays are different from images as they are composed of USS elements whose properties are retained from their creation USS sub displays can be seen as synoptic templates USS sub displays can be used by reference or by copy If used by reference the co
7. Preferences nix Display SID 0 3 Consistency l File path 278561660_0_info xml Browse 3 Data Source 3 Import CU internal version 278561660 Y Database Default Settings for SCOE File 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU Y MDB SCOE The new SCOE file is now choose Click button OK to change the editor preferences uss properties file The editor will reload the System Configuration Browser based on the SCOE file Loading new SCOE configuration Please wait Cancel Reloading of new SCOE file takes some seconds confirmation box occurs to rerun consistency checker on open displays all displays project folder or not to run checker The SCOE file settings has been changed Select the displays to run the consistency checker on Open Displays All Displays Choose not to run SCOE file is reloaded in the System Configuration Browser g System Configuration Browser 2 x a 0x OPS View Onboard Telemetry KL mE o C BLE o C COMMS o 3 PAYLOAD o PL gt L siva SOL o CI SOLAR o 7 SYSTEM o E TCS 3 18 Check Consistency The USS Editor can check the consistency of created displays against the configured SCOE file and there by save time for display developers 3 18 1 Lesson in checking display consistency 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot
8. o o 180 5 4 3 Showing Display Properties 20 181 IEL Ire QUISMES IIT 181 5 4 3 2 Show Display Properties de doro om mp oe Ae wee a Gres 181 5 4 4 Copying Command to Clipboard o leen 182 SAAL Prerequisites s reses x49 Ge eG EES AED 182 5 4 4 2 Copying Command to Clipboard saaa ooo 182 5 45 Copying Parameter Name to Clipboard o oaoa o 182 SAA III ee Oe a eG ra h 182 5 4 5 2 Copying Parameter Name to Clipboard 182 5 4 6 Issuing Telecommand via Command Button aoaaa ooo 182 DUEO L PrercgtisileS s 2 o etaeun ad a 9 S uh d 182 5 4 6 2 Issuing Telecommand via Command Button 182 5 6 2 1 l Step Commanding ro t 183 5462 2 2 Step Commanding 44 06 66 eae d 6 eR as 184 SIE c rrr 185 5 4 7 Issuing Telecommand via Command List l l 185 Od IEIerequ lsHe5 o sers ri Ros anar hd Oo Gade eE AS 185 5 4 7 2 Issuing Telecommand via Command List 185 5 4 8 Finding Displays with Parameter References cles 186 Dol PrercgulsileS e gu 2 5 d dp 363 eu oi GAGES E ue ari oe He 186 5 5 5 6 Of 5 8 CONTENTS 5 4 8 2 Finding Display with Parameter References 186 5 4 8 2 1 Find Parameter with No Display Open 186 5 4 8 2 2 Find Parameter from Open Display 187 54 9 Finding Iextin Display ooo io ORO So mox eee 095 a 187 SA PCIe QUIENES en ras PRR AO eo
9. home uss uss project Displayluss x f display 2 x Display 1 Display 2 Cancel Arch Retrieval VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE Downlink File S Second display is selected 9 Save display by selecting from menu File Save Type in file name Display2 uss EXE lib D UnnamedO uss File Name IDisplay1 uss Files of Type USS displays C uss M Save Cancel Save dialog is shown 10 Click OK to save dialog to save display the second display 69 3 12 NAVIGATION DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL LI B USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help gi S ool Ec iR o OG 8 6 jejo a lalalalal a i home uss uss project Displayluss x e nx fhome uss uss project Display2uss x Sal ir Display 1 Display 2 Cancel Arch Retri eval l VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE Downlink_File l Second display saved 11 Open tool view Synoptic Hierarchy Synoptic Hierarchy amp Synoptic Hierarchy x nx 9 7 Open Displays 9 Es No title assigned on home uss uss project Display2 uss Label6 Fe No title assigned on
10. Default Settings for Display Importing The Import category contains the following properties a Display import results Whether or not the editor should show a summary of results when import opening external format displays 7 Click on the Database category CY Project Database Display Database user ops cgsadmin consistency Database sid oracle 3 Data Source Database port 1521 3 Import E Database password 3 MDB General Database hostname mobs eso io com Y MDB CDU MDB DataBase Connection Properties 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE The Database category contains the following properties a Database user The user to connect with b Database SID The system id SID of the MDB normally oracle c Database port The TCP IP port to connect to on the dB server d Database password The dB password for the dB user specified e Database host name The host db Server to use 8 Click on the MDB General category y Project MDB General Display Use CDU v 3 Consistency E System version 12 3 Data Source System mission MASTER 3 Import 3 Database System element config APM Y MDB General MDB General Properties E g Connection System Spec C MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU CS MDB SCOE The MDB General category contains the following properties a Use CDU Whether or not to use CDU contra CCU b System Version System v
11. Symbols The undocked window is docked back into the executor 5 3 15 2 2 Docking All Windows You can dock all undocked windows back into the executor To dock all windows e Choose Window gt Dock All in the executor All undocked windows are docked back into the executor 5 4 Display Interaction 5 4 1 Showing Tooltip for Element 5 4 1 1 Showing Tooltip for Element You can see tooltips associated with the element You can turn tooltips globally on or off In synoptic displays USS shows the opsname for end items as defined in the MDB Tooltips are available over data fields and in parameter properties dialogs To show tooltip for element e Move mouse cursor over element e Tooltip appears at mouse position To enable disable tooltips e Choose Options gt Preferences e On the tree structure on the left side select Tooltips e Uncheck checkbox before enable tooltips to disable tooltips Check checkbox to enable tooltips again Preferences nix 3 Project Tooltips 3 Commanding 7 Enable Tooltips 3 Tab Appearance D 3 Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Mode Cancel e Click OK It is not possible to configure the amount of time over which the tooltip is displayed 179 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 4 2 Showing Element Properties 5 4 2 1 Show Element Properties With show element properties you can get detailed informati
12. 18 Click the Change button followed by the Close button Context Name Unit Data Type Add BLB_Analog_Input_Section_Fail Data Source Type amp External Data Source Computation Details for External Data Source Opsname v BLB Analog Input Section Fai Value Output Engineering value x Unit recense zl The External Data Source is now updated with the SCOE information 19 Click the OK button to activate the data source editing General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Data Set BLB Analog Input Section Fail L User Defined Curve Style Colour R 0 G 0 B 255 0000FF a Width Axis Properties Curve Style Axis Label Analog Input mode Darase T Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range Axis Range Upper Lower The External Data Source is updated in the Graph dialog 20 Click the OK button to activate the graph editing 59 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Ba BLB_Analog_Input_Sec tion_Fail The graph in the display is now updated to match the configuration 21 To Preview the graph Select from menu Tools Previewer BLB Analog Input Section Fail OK The line graph is previewed 3 10 2 Lesson in creating Strip Graph displays 1 2 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout Make a Line Graph b
13. l RAW Command Load l MTL sl P L SPLC DMS VTC MTL Executor Command 1 N 6 3 COL TRE CHAPTER 6 APPLICATION SCENARIOS Automated onboard command checks in LAPAP MKII During and after ground display development the display consistency checker verifies the onboard commands Onboard only the input fields attached to command parameters can be used to update the command The input fields are connected to constraints An automated check mechanism will verify input values typed into the input field Therefore an onboard command is always verified before execution The only exception from this rule are parameters representing end item references These can not be checked onboard because there is no end item information available The check is performed by the DMS The DMS rejects invalid commands Current commanding limitations in LAPAP MKII e Only structured commands replacement of CPL can be used e No HLCL commanding is supported e The system command checker is not supported e Only DMS commands supported no VIC commands e Only direct commanding supported 6 3 COL TRE The application in COL TRE is the execution of command instances defined in the Flat File I F which are referenced via NASA Command PUIs For further details refer to COL TRE documentation 204 Chapter 7 Importing Foreign Display Formats USS provides support for importing several non USS display formats This chapter describes h
14. llle 3 3 2 1 Lesson in docking mechanism of editor panels 3939 Toolviewsottheeditor 3 99x 098 8S 9 6 H OHSS EOS RE Re a PERS 3 3 3 1 Lesson in tool views 6 s 6 464544 44466544 4 44 6 945 pow Job rmt lacy 525524545 6 bees Heke EEE eee a eee a eee So 3 3 4 1 Lesson in printing of displays llle 34 Nick Moral ro wx 589 4 ee SI oe ee ds EOS 259 IMEEM e gprs do rara eae ee See oe we oe ee sdz FOUOrIUIONGl saray iii diaa disnea Se ee eS 3 4 2 1 Creating new ground ops Satmon like display 3 4 2 1 1 Setting project root folder and MDB configuration 3 4 2 1 2 Opening and saving displays from and to MDB 9421 9 Editing displays x 42444446 4 8 oo bi oe deum be 3 2 1 4 Previewing a display 0 000 3 4 2 2 Converting GWDU ground displays as batch operation 3 4 2 3 Checking GWDU display for consistency po Executor Old ss ss ced pepesa piia g 9 Bee ee ee ee ee 3 4 3 1 Connecting and opening displays o ooo 3 4 3 2 Show direct commanding from FWDU display 3 4 3 3 Show GWDU displays esate aaa qe Pp SS 3 4 3 4 Show commanding via MCS Tools o 3 4 3 5 Show imported Satmon display samples 3 4 3 6 Show PCS display samples 0 0 2 0 0004 235 Makma Display s ees s sar e qom rd oro So INMOUCHON seara AA 902 Making display 64 464 442 e epics oes Ye HET ERAS GEES RR HH aD ES 35 21 Lesson in m
15. 1 Select display to check 2 In the status bar two fields show continuously updated icons 168 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL CONFIGURATION USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 File Navigate View Options Window Help Te e e e e le eein 20 00 00 000 6 COL Synoptics H 6 COL Synoptics Home Page COL Home Page MCD External Payload e Update The first item is a small clock icon with a needle moving once a second Every time a parameter in the display is updated the timer is reset and starts over again The clock indicates the time since the last update for the active display The color of the icon changes depending on when the last update of the selected display has been Green means it has been updated within the last 30 seconds Upd O Perf fs Not Connected lira pe time cin nn ea CHUNG S EO ae time since last for Display E GR A RA Res ders AS hi i Pu gt Al o T Es B R una Oper If the display hasn t been updated for more than one minute the icon turns red Sh gt e The second and last item is the performance indicator It indicates the performance of the view system If the update latency is less than 500 milliseconds the icon is green If the latency is bigger than 500 milliseconds the color changes to yellow Red means that the update latency is bigger than 5000 milliseconds which means that some data may be droppe
16. 19 05 Add New Log Entry v n Symbol Narne E HRM ACTIVATION our a x Editor after adding main step title and first saving 4 Continue by adding the note box providing clarifying information To do this first create the NOTE title center the label text horizontally and underline it completely using the method already applied for the main step title above For the note title use font Sans Typewriter Regular size 16 Then add note texts and numbers using font Sans Typewriter Regular size 14 as a single multi line label It is recommended to edit the text using an external plain text editor Note also that the text can not be entered by means of the properties editor as multi line labels are only supported when using in place editing in the display area If required enlarge the display size to accommodate the contents After that vertically center note title and notes and group them Next surround the result with a rectangle and center align the note title and text group with that rectangle both horizontally and vertically Finally group the note title and text group with the surrounding aligned rectangle 110 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL us USSE or 2 8 0 Hie Edit View Tools Element Window Help a o ea a pla lt le DOSSO 3 oro mens 3 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY selas Dialal 1e el TE aaa ispisa pd toria ss x pd_tutorial uss Bumm 9 Appearanc
17. a Onboard Telemetry b Ground Telemetry c Onboard Commands d Ground Commands e Onboard Events f Ground Events The System Configuration Browser can be used to SCOE content to the displays without hard configuration task 7 Close the System Configuration Browser by clicking the close icon in the undocked view 8 Open the Symbol Library from menu Views Symbol Library and undock it a Symbol Library x 20x Communications C10 Attenuator Signal C Minicam C13 Camera Minicam S C14 Camera Still C15 Fiber Optic C15 Filter Band Pass F C17 Filter Band Pass w C18 Filter Band Pass w C19 Filter Band Stop AA XXX T 21 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL The Symbol Library is undocked and it is showing the open symbol library selected The Symbol Library can be used to select libraries and symbols as well as it provides access to adding and editing symbol libraries and their symbols 9 Close the Symbol Library by clicking the close icon in the undocked view 10 Open the View Settings from menu Views View Settings and undock it yw View Settings x nx COL HOME uss 9 Grid Draw Color Draw Style Draw Thickness Snap to Grid on Move Snap to Grid on Resize Spacing Horizontal Spacing Vertical 9 Zoom Zoom Factor in Percent Zoom Step Size in Percent R 192 6 192 B 192 COCOC
18. a ax ldisplay 1 x T displays 1 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 B 238 Background Symbol Library v Background Symbol Name Le 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button Lj 9 Context Help URL Opsname f e Il Make a new TankMeter Pipe Valve and Data field arrange approximately as picture below B Elements for lesson TankMeter Pipe Valve and Data field Double click with the mouse on the pipe to select the left most pipe segment to edit it Selected pipe segment Use the mouse to move the left top point to the TankMeter Selected pipe segment moved to approximately conenct with TankMeter Do the same with the right most pipe segment and connect the pipe to the valve valve maybe need arranging also Selected pipe segment moved to approximately conenct with Valve In property editor set pipe property Diameter to 10 Arrange Data field and Valve to get approximately the layout below Layout of display elements In the property editor open the data source dialog for the TankMeter click button for property Data Source In the data source dialog change the data source to computation and enter expression AFS2 Cab Air Massflow VTC AFS2 Cab Air Massflow VTC Path NVAPMNFLISYSNECLSSNAFS2NCAB AIR MASSFLOW 90 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 16 CHANGE
19. parameterRawValue parameter String Object Example parameterRawValue CTCU1 Cabin Templ DMC 2 0 ParameterValue Returns the engineering value of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterValue parameter String Object Example parameterValue CTCU1 Cabin Templ DMC gt 20 0 ParameterWarningViolationThreshold Returns the limit warning violation threshold of a parame ter specified by a string constant Definition parameterWarningViolationThreshold parameter String Integer Example Caram tem s penis mt EH sao C TO USC aan hemp DIME E TransformStateCode Transforms a string into an OpNom conform string Words will be properly capitalized and underscores will be replaced with blanks Definition T odiis c ele Slot NOE E SICURA TI KO Example transformStateCode PUME VON gt Pump On 156 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 7 DATA SOURCES 4 7 4 4 Selected Computations from PREP Library The following computations from the PREP library are available alEqualToInt Returns a value of true if the value from the PUI is equal to the constant int value Pseudo code ine alEgua bront Comp O amt valven Int youl yeu Stare If valve_state valve result f else result U recura resule ANDComp Takes the input arguments and Logically ANDs them together Pseudo code Sep NDS ru uS c a e IS CZ ale e ole ee liane aN result arg and argl and arg2 and and arg N 2 and
20. 192 VA CHEM ui arpas ao sara 192 5 7 4 2 Saving a Copy of Current Display ooo o 192 555 Contisurine Status Display i sees sarbesti anis 625544 oes s 193 R H Prerequisites zorsa wok 9b 24 teh Pe het ese te tees edu 193 5 75 2 Configuring Status Display 2 0 0 0 000048 193 SVEDIMEM PDC 193 5 7 6 Configuring Data Quality Indicators leen 193 DA o vu we 99954994 993 tea 4 9 93 9 ba eae 199 5 7 62 Configuring Data Quality Indicators ooo 193 DO DESCISO 6 06 bean de 9 939 979 94 a 194 ConusurnnelheEXeodlOP 24444 44 4 69 R Re den REOR db deo UR A 194 SUME Aa TIT 194 ill TO e parres daa AAA 194 ool Setting Project Folde k 2 xx c9 xoxo9 See Ee e xo eS 194 5 81 12 Setting Home Display leen 195 55 105 COMMANGINe eur v actes 9 yg Bee Poe eee Oe S E UR des 195 5 8 1 2 1 Enabling Commanding 0000 195 5 8 12 2 Enabling Direct Commanding 0 195 5 8 1 2 3 Choosing Command Target o 195 5 8 1 2 4 Confirming TeleCommands 195 Sod Jab Appearance ero iria 59 9 94 0 9 83 eee de 9933 195 5 9 3 1 Setting Tab Placement 4 2k oh bn oe 9 ow 196 5 01 52 setting lab LOMO se sss ox poe bowie es Ron ete ur ox Gad 196 eT o o DC T 196 5 8 1 4 1 Enabling tooltips 2244 9 999 439 Gas 196 Doug as A ob dt ad fce t OES bd teehee pei d 196 Oo 5l S avibs5HapsholS xw ox Gea R
21. 3 20 1 Lesson in creating procedural displays CF USS Display Editor 2 8 0 Hie Edit View Tools Element Window Help B 60 A Pia 3 Le P Property Editor Ej Synoptic Hierarchy amp x ca Open Displays E No title assigned on display 9 C co cuments and Settings Frank Plassmeiefum project ag Symbol Litrary 8x En System Corfigurstion Browser Bx th Consistency Results P 8x displays cales jale mx x tee aaaaaaaaMMMllM gt Editor started with default empty display created two tool views open 2 Start by setting the display title If the Property Editor tab on the left of the window is not already selected select it In the pane corresponding to that tab left click in the field named Title and enter the display title 108 TUTORIAL CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY gt USS Display Editor 2 8 0 g File Edit View Tools Element Window Help Bie 65 GD a ga Bl m e als IMiglelel a amp lalalis y Property Editor amp X Synoptic Hierarchy s oax splay 6 x display 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 8 239 FEEEEEE Background Symbol Library Name v Background Symbol Name LY 9 Behaviour ETU ecute Button 9 Context Help URL 2 3mz 203 If arget system 9 Dimensions Height Wd i e Information Title HRM Activatior Log Insert New Change Entry Add New L
22. 3 Anomaly Flag Stat gt Gj CPU 3 Command History Avail Stat D Command History Table 3 Command Rejection Stat o EEPROM O E FCC 3 Gen_Com_AFS_RS485_Int_Stat 3 Gen_Com_int_SM_RS485_Main_Stat 3 Gen_Com_int_SM_RS485_Red_Stat 3 Gen_Com_Int_vU_RS485_Main_Stat R Gen_Com_Int_WU_RS485_Red_Stat 3 Gen_Com_LAN_SMSC_LTU_Stat R Gen_Com_SMSC_COL_HRD_Stat Search display 2 x Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label GPM _Gen_Com_AFS RS48 5_Int_s ta BPM Gen Con In t SH Rsa8 5 Main S om BPH Gen Con In t Bi RAS 5 Red S ta NN BPH Gen Con Int V RS485 Jai n Sta Four labels are selected 9 Align the labels to their common left by selecting form menu Element Align Vertical Left 10 Deselect the labels by left clicking with mouse on the display back ground 11 Select the four fields by hold keyboard key CTRL and left click with mouse on labels 49 3 9 CREATE ASCII DISPLAYS I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help x ends mH Sl uniron sanna x fjw 6191916 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL te i amp xm m leli qa Jejeje a 8 6 glg a o a o D 3 Property Editor 7 System Configu gt OPS View Onboard Telemetry GI EPM o AMA 5 Air Cooling Diff Press Analog Input Section Fail D Anomalby Flag St
23. LeanProcEntry elements defining the displays contents In displays of the PageType custom only FixedAlpha and OutputAlpha elements are used A display of type lineplot contains only PlotDef elements and displays of the type leanproc contains LeanProcEntry elements only The following table list the attributes of the Satmon PageDef root element and their interpretation 211 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS Table 7 3 Satmon PageDef root element attributes PageDef attribute Value Interpretation custom alpha numeric display containing only FixedAlpha and OutputAlpha elements PageType String lineplot plot display with one or more PlotDef elements Jeanproc procedure display containing only LeanProcEntry elements The display title The width of the display in number of characters Character size is assumed as 10 pixels wide and 18 pixels high This is optional for Width Integer lineplot and leanproc displays Default lineplot display width derived from screenshots is 800 Size for leanproc displays is defined by its contents The height of the display in number of characters Character size is assumed as 10 pixels wide and 18 pixels high This is optional for lineplot and leanproc displays The lineplot display Height Integer height is derived from number of PlotDef elements and the plots height Default plot height is for a display containing multi
24. Page Setup Appearance Print Service Name Stern da Status Accepting jobs Type Info _ Print To File Print Range Copies Al Number of copies 1E O Pages L 3 Click Print Executor prints image of display It is not possible to print parts of the display Only the whole display can be printed 5 7 3 Creating Display Snapshot 5 7 3 1 Prerequisites e Display must be selected 5 7 3 2 Creating Display Snapshot You can save snapshots of a running display as graphics file for later use This feature is useful for presentations documentations and reports which automatically are complemented with display screen shots To create display snapshot 1 Choose File gt Save Snapshot Executor creates and automatically saves image into configured directory usually under home user uss x y Z The file name consist of the display name plus an appended time stamp Snapshot is saved as PNG 5 7 4 Saving a Copy of Current Display 5 7 4 1 Prerequisites e Display must be selected 5 7 4 2 Saving a Copy of Current Display You can save the current display to a file for further processing for example editing To save a copy of current display 1 Choose File Save A Copy 2 In the file chooser dialog select folder in which you want to save your copy 192 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 7 MISCELLANEOUS 3 Enter file name under which you wish to save the copy Save A Copy
25. Range Axis Title ILineGraph Step Curve Show Value Marker _ Q Horizontal Orientation _ a Vertical Expiration Time Method _ O Samples Period ms 3600000 OK Cancel The Graph Dialog shows the general properties tab for the Line Graph under My Colors the colour black lali Pick a Colour My Colours Swatches Background Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF m Plot Background Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF l E Black EN Blue 4 HA Blue Dodger Blue Light___ ISS Blue Royal Mi Brown HA Brown Light Brown Sandy Gray 83 UNIX A Green Gray 83 PC ME Green Dark Green Light HoneyDew 3 Misty Rose 3 ENS Olive Drab I Orange Dark MN Orchid Dark RS Purple Ined 2 Pink Hot Yellow Yellow Pale MI Midnight Blue Blue Light EN ned Dark Palegreen 2 EI C0137 E C0138 E C0139 E C0140 Preview MA R 165 6 42 B 42 452424 Set as colour Brown w Rename Cancel Reset The black colour under My Colours 13 Click OK to the colour dialog 1 General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Title Test Line Graph Background Color MN R 0 G 0 B 0 000000 la Plot Background Color R255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF R Step Curve Show Value Marker I _ Q Horizontal Orientation _ e Vertical Expiration e Time Method _ t Samples Period ms 3600000 OK Cancel B
26. Usage weiss oe citas Sima OE NS ee N ERE D Generates locale skeleton files for the displays in source dir Localize Bundles are written in the display directory les SOHO DO SU WS Seu E y OPTION may be one or more of the following Cia aC O Mia set country for resource bundles f forceOverwrite force overwrite of existing reports zu ee print this text and exit P anouge Ser Language for resource bundles FeCursiy e recursively descend in sub directories The generated skeletons will have the same name as the displays with the language and country abbreviation added to the name as in following example For Display 223 8 5 FORMAT OF ENTRY KEYBIAPTER 8 LOCALIZING DISPLAYS FOR DIFFERENT LANGUAGES COL HOME uss the British English language file will be named COL HOME en_GB The generated files will lie in the same directory as the display The values in the generated files will correspond to the values set in the original display files sur rounded by special marker chars marking the values as untranslated 8 4 Supported attributes Table 8 1 Supported attributes Display ComboBox keyNames tooltip IHE tooltip defaultRangeAxisLabel tooltip like Graph and additionally labels for all multiple DomainAxis and RangeAxis Translatable properties of Graph for the graph 8 Format of Entry Keys The keys of the localization file uniquely determine the attribute that needs to be translated Keys for Display g
27. lt Jafajajaja o R 3 mx tigi Symbol Library x ce x Misplay i x CA Electrical gt gt E23 Diode Rectifier Si gt E22 Diode Rectifier tes Diode Zener E255 Filter Unit Elect a E265 Fuse A E27 Generator Frequency E285 Ground Chassis E298 Ground Earth E30 Heater 4 E265 Fuse B The symbol element is resized 7 Open the tool view Property Editor to show the properties for the element gt USS Display Editor 2 15 0pre ox File Edit View Tools Element Window Help dele Elo a gt a gt aja a a x Sjujojsa a e 2 muje e jojo lt Ajajajaja o lapan sra i y 100 9 ooo s s vujaja Symbol Library f 59 Property Editor x a ax gt displayt1 amp x ax Symbol Symbol Be 9 Appearance a Auto Scale Image Keep Asp
28. s 8 Use the keyboard key combination CTRL A to select all a n EX gcancel Arch Retrieval B n n BR Fon URL oAD FILEB 8 g D au gm Downlink File n a o All created display elements from the drag and drop operations are selected 9 Choose from menu Element Align Vertical Left B H B gCancel Arch Retrieval a D Bar_FOR_UPLOAD_FILEB B 8 u u rm g Downlink File B o n Elements are aligned to the left most position 10 Left click to select the Cancel Arch Retrieval Telecommand top most B la 4B Cancel Arch Retrieval B s o VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE Downlink File j Telecommand selected 11 Open the Property Editor 64 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 11 CREATE COMMANDING DISPLAY 9 Property Editor a x I System Configuratil a 0x lt Button gt StringT eleCommand3 Cancel Arch Retrieval 9 Appearance Button Type Simple Text Button v Shape Fill Color RIR E E Shape Fill Style x 9 Commanding Button is Guarded Command nulld ase Command COLTRE OPS Command COLTRE PUN Command FWDU Opsname stat YDPU_ISPR_A3_Line1 _ Command FWDU Pathname Command FWDU SID Command GWDU HLCL Command MCS Opsname execute flap FLAP VDPU I Command MCS Pathname 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 25 Width 135 x 253 Y 81 9 Information Comment Name StringT eleCommands3_Canc Released Label Text Default Cancel_Arch_Retrieval Selected
29. v 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname 3 Make a new Elliptic Meter by selecting from menu Element Add Elliptic Tick Meter The elliptic formed meter is created in display 84 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 15 USE ADVANCED ELEMENTS 4 Undock property editor and move it so the display can be fully seen without overlapping from property editor 5 Enlarge meter by dragging its corner control points and move it to the middle of the display by left clicking hold on the Elliptic Tick Meter and dragging it On 10 10 20 20 Elliptic Tick Meter is resized and located approximately in the middle of display 6 In the property Editor set the property Border Used to checked and set border color to R 0 G 0 and B 139 a blue colour _w Property Editor e x mx lt EllipticTickMeter gt EllipticTickMeterl DIST 9 Appearance Border Color NE RO G 0 B 139 00008B Border Used Draw as Circle Ind Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Bar Q 1 le Meter Tick Label Style Left or Top 7 Shape Fill Calor Nl RO G 0 B 0 000000 Shape Fill Style Start Angle 120 Sweep Angle 300 Tick Color EE F o G 0 B O 000000 Tick Indicator Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF Tick Indicator Thickness 6 9 Behaviour Field Styte Meter Color Show Status Meter Ma
30. Add Label Jabel 104 Label created in empty display 3 Set color of label font in property editor to RGB color Red 237 Green 237 and Blue 41 4 Double click on the label to edit the label text M abel 108 Label is in direct label text edit mode 5 Set label width to 300 pixels in property editor 6 Enter text ASCII Seperator i e ASCII Seperator followed by 30 underscores a BSCILSeperator J o o B Label is used as seperator 7 Set display background to black click on display background and edit the background color 8 Set display width to 320 pixels and height to 100 pixels Label is used as seperator TIP ASCII displays contains no graphical elements but labels can be used in some cases to mimic seperators etc 3 10 Making a Graph Display The USS Editor can be used to create displays containing Graph of various kinds in the USS display format Graphs can be used to show larger data sets in a more intuitive way 3 10 1 Lesson in creating Graph displays 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 53 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 2 Make a Line Graph by selecting from menu Element Add Line Graph LineGraph 2103 i u 5 L e B amp 0 0 Domain Axis 7 u a A empty Line Graph is made in the upper left of the new display 3 Use the mouse and left click and drag on the right
31. Clipping Context Label Far 9 Dimensions Depth Height Width x Y The colours of all the label fonts are changed to a dark green 6 Open the System Configuration Browser and find in the OPS View for Onboard Telemetry the parameter AEPMAGen_Com_AFS_RS485_Int_Stat m j 7 System Configuration Browser 2 x f OPS View Onboard Telemetry ad 4 o BLB gt C comms o L DMS e ECLSS gt EDR o EI EPDS LZ EPM o 7 AAA 5 Air Cooling Diff Press D Analog Input Section Fail D Anomaly Flag Stat e 3 CPU 3 Command History Avail Stat IN Command History Table D Command Rejection Stat o EEPROM e EJ FCC C Gen Com AFS RS485 Int Stat D Gen_Com_Int_5M_R5485_Main_Stat 3 Gen_Com_int_SM_RS485_Red_Stat The end item is selected 7 Drag and Drop all the end items to the display Gen_Com_AFS_RS485_Int_Stat Gen_Com_Int_SM_RS485_Main_Stat Gen Com Int 5M R5485 Red Stat Gen_Com_Int_VU_RS485_Main_Stat 48 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL M USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help EIS 9 malas 3 9 CREATE ASCII DISPLAYS EJES ajaja E Al a 00 a E a OPS View Onboard Telemetry EPM
32. E Ze Zee 2 9 9 SS Zo 238 EOD Is Ze DEOS Zu B ANE ASIS 205 ies Zee 239 2109 JS 5 Zo pus ASS 2219105 SiS ADS ASIS 20 SS ASS 230 AUR IES Zoe ASS Z0 SS AES S 202 15959 ZOD 295 2 089 SS ZA SS 15958 RoyalBlue4 bluel blue2 blue3 blue4 DodgerBluel DodgerBlue2 DodgerBlue3 DodgerBlue4 SteelBluel SteelBlue2 SteelBlue3 SteelBlued DeepSkyBluel DeepSkyBlue2 DeepSkyBlue3 DeepSkyBlue4 SkyBlue1 SkyBlue2 SkyBlue3 SkyBlue4 LightSkyBluel Tiens odes LightSkyBlue3 LightSkyBlue4 SlateGrayl SlateGray2 SlateGray3 SlateGray4 LightSteelBlue1 LightSteelBlue2 LightSteelBlue3 LightSteelBlue4 LightBluel LightBlue2 LightBlue3 LightBlue4 H fae ani R SETE Eyan2 SS LightCyan4 PaleTurquoisel PaleTurquoise2 PaleTurquoise3 PaleTurquoise4 CadetBlue1 CadetBlue2 CadetBlue3 CadetBlue4 turquoisel turquoise2 turquoise3 turquoise4 cyanl cyan2 cyan3 cyan4 DarkSlateGrayl DarkSlateGray2 DarkSlateGray3 DarkSlateGray4 aquamarinel aquamarine2 aquamarine3 245 9 4 RGB COLORS 9 4 RGB COLORS 69 ES ESO to OG 84 78 67 46 154 144 iA 84 ao O O QO e O d Pire WOZ 69 1561 Teg S4 dl gus 20 188 EZ NE ow 238 ZO 15519 vu ito 205 ipo a Zee ZI Mts LD 5s ZO oe 12195 Zoe 205 Ie ZOD LS Zi res ZO LO Zu ESO 25 eo ITE 5 SD Zee 203 139 2 91 ASIS 208 15349 5D 2 Z05 ISS NS Ze ZO 2559 PAS ASS ZOS 159 Vio 2 ZI
33. L K E2 Battery Generic E20 Diode Light Emitti E15 Converter Unit DC DC E175 Current Integrato E22 Diode Rectifier E23 Diode Rectifier Si NS E265 Fuse A HH E255 Filter Unit Elect m l 3 13 ADD SYMBOLS 2 Open the Symbol Library from menu View Symbol Library 3D1 Camera Translate O 3D11 Roll Left Alterna y 3D12 Save View 3D15 Translation Backward 3D16 View Direction Fr 3D2 Camera Options Y 3D5 Earth Size 10xSmaller tll 3D6 Motion Arrow Left 3 In the Symbol Library select from the drop down box ComboBox the symbol library Electrical E11 Connectors Dematable E E115 Connector Dematab E14 Converter Unit AC DC de E21 Diode Light Sensing E245 Diode Zener E265 Fuse B I In the library Electrical select the symbol E265_Fuse by left clicking with the mouse on the symbol 73 3 13 ADD SYMBOLS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL ma Symbol library e x 2 A Electrical 1i El Amplifier E10 Connector Permanen E11 Connectors Dematable gt E118 Connector Dematab E115 Connector Dematab E115 Connector Dematab 35 L e N N E135 Converter Static E125 Converter Current El4 Converter Unit AC DC G y j LE V N E155 Converter Unit DC DC E165 Current Converter E15 Converter Unit DC DC CT23 9 E1 95 Current Stabilizer O L E178 Current Integr
34. O 3D11 Roll Left Altern 3 el 3D12 Save View Open MDB Library Sync Dialog to MDB Popup menu for Symbol Libraries 2 Enter the name of the new Library Dialog to specify new library 105 3 20 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 10 Enter new library name TEST LIB and press button Ok In the directory chooser select a filesystem location compliant with the MDB structure This lesson uses USS PROJECT ROOT lib CDU 316990235 APM COMMON TEST SUPP GRD DATA USS EDITOR VV Choose directory and press button Open Symbol Library x e nx 3 TEST LIB v Edit New library created and selected in Symbol Library view Create a new Label in the empty display and set text to TEST_SYMBOL Click on button Edit in Symbol Library View and click in popup menu Add Selected Elements as Symbol 2 Name i Image SVG Type e SubDisplay USS Cancel Dialog for specifying symbol shown Enter new symbol name TEST SYMBOL select SVG as type and press button Ok Save library in MDB by click button Edit in symbol library view and popup menu Save in MDB Connecting to MDB Please watt Cancel Dialog for showing progress of MDB connection ud _ Files submitted to MDB Ok Dialog showing result of save The Symbol Library View button Edit can be used to Lock for Edit Save Synchronize etc MDB Sy
35. Select focus the Property Editor again and select the property Data Source 96 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 18 CHECK CONSISTENCY 9 Property Editor x g System Configuration Browser i f Consist a Lox display 1 x lt TankMeter gt TankMeterl ABE Appearance Shape Fill Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF Shape Fill Style Solid TankMeter Indicator Color EXJR 255 G 200 B 0 FFC800 9 Behaviour Meter Color Show Status 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 100 label for check Width 210 X 150 Y 140 9 General Data Source MeterDS1 E 9 Information Comment Name TankMeter1 Selected Elements 1 element Tooltip 9 Limits Domain Meter Maximum 100 Meter Minimum 0 Property Data Source highlighted 8 Click button to change open the data source dialog Context Add Remove Data Source Type a External Data Source O Computation Details for External Data Source opsrame 5 Value Output Engineering value M Unt Data source dialog opens showing the data source attached to the Tank Meter 9 Click under Details for External Data Source on button to open the System Configuration Browser OPS View Onboard Telemetry ls V o 3 BLB gt 3 comms o 3 DMS o Gj ECLSS o L EDR Gj EPDS o 7 EPM o EJ ETF gt EI EUTEF o EI FSL o CI PAYLOAD o PL gt LC sva o SOL gt CI
36. c hick Meter o soe xd Xp 2 oe bee dod Ep OS qose e 99 sos 145 40 105 ThetmntoDIete ee uses ur x xoc goto A RO dede m d RR dp BHR OR 146 20 102 Tank Meter 3 59 do 972 4 3 wo woe v PX dd e uy Soe oo S vp d 146 4 6 11 Pipe Valve and CheckValve eee 147 2S0 AMNE CO Tr 147 AOA Dips aan au edna eaaaeteeaeaehaee nei een eeendeee as 147 A CD hao Se OG Saw rrr 148 25 19 Input C ombpoBOX aw chev ms 4E Exam dE RARA 148 Z5 ST T Tee so hin Kee eS BAG opm e SHE RON NUR SEE ERG Es ope t d 148 AOL e as 505 99 4 8 9m FIRE REOS S EU NOE NP E GS EAE ee ease 148 4 6 15 1 Symbol State Mapping eee 149 Dale cOUlCeSs Saka oo 2 aw PaO aa ee eye he ke oe Bee ues Gee eee ane 149 Ad DataSource RTT geese eh te oa eae ee hee eee UP OR RO VOR BR 149 472 Supported Data Source Types ss sbs sperod aa 9545444 x S pd ies 150 445 Dynamic Properties 4 Role X4 37 B0 ex eae o S RO 244s Ee Sas 151 AE EXPtCSSIONS 26 gt 44 5 x hond EORR ow eo XG35 54 x SSSR FX x X Eee Eo 151 Aral 6 s 5 e 64 84 3990x935 9 9 42489 99 9 4 9 4 99 9 54 9 2 2 90 39 3 152 4742 Uso Libraty EXTENSIONS ss a 3p oo Rund oe EROS qose e 39 sos 153 27 WONCHONS PE ee EEE aera ties Baa a st 153 4 74 4 Selected Computations from PREP Library 157 Zo EXAMplES Xo som e wk HUS er a dw dre dp deut XE Mb eR 157 Mission Database lt s e corroe 159 48 1 Opening Displays fromtheMDB o ooo e 159 402 Sav
37. e Background Color The color of the background inside the command list e Font The font to use for text e Font Color The colour to use for text e Selection Color The colour to use for selected text e Show as Combo Box if checked the command list is drawn as a combo box instead of a open list e Command Add Remove Press mini button Add to add a new command and mini button Remove to remove selected command e Command Chosen Selected command use drop down combo box to select another e Command Label Command label type in field to change e Command Move Up Down Press mini buttons Up and Down to move the command up or down respectively in list e Command Shown selected command press mini button to open command editor and X to remove command 4 6 6 Navigation Button The target display for a navigation button can be set by right clicking a USS display in the Synoptic Hierarchy and selecting Add Navigation to display Button Type property see Command Button Navigation Button properties 9 Commanding Action Display ope n v Open New Window vi Target Navigation Button Properties in Property Editor The Navigation Button has some unique properties but share many properties with command but ton above e Action Whether the navigation target specified should be opened or closed e Open New Window If checked the open action will not replace the current display but open a new display i
38. grouping separators L 4 5 The result will enclose negative numbers d 7 in parentheses 133 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 2 For d conversion only 3 For o x and X conversions only 4 For d o x and X conversions applied to BigInteger or d applied to byte Byte short Short int and Integer long and Long 5 For e E f g and G conversions only Width The width is the minimum number of characters to be written to the output Precision For the floating point conversions e E and f the precision is the number of digits after the dec imal separator If the conversion is g or G then the precision is the total number of digits in the resulting magnitude after rounding If the conversion is a or A then the precision must not be speci fied For integral types the precision is not applicable Examples Table 4 5 Examples Example output 08d 5 2f 12 67 4 6 4 Command Button A command button can easily be created by dragging TeleCommand from the System Configuration Browser to the display area TeleCommands in USS can be any of the following types e HLCL e SWOP e FLAP PCS USS TC Command Button properties 9 Appearance Button Type Simple Text Button EA Shape Fill Color R 212 G 212 B 212 DAD Shape Fill Style Solid Ly 9 Commanding Comm
39. operational configuration 0 consistency date 11255313 CCU 278561597 consistency date 1134023659000 08 Dec 2005 06 34 1 o CCU 278561660 operational configuration 0 consistency date 11546008 APM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS AIV V6 0 1 29 Sep 2005 08 32 57 APM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS AIV V7 1 0 14 Dec 2005 17 33 59 CGS Mission AEOLUS COMMON CCU EADS SI TEST V1 0 0 07 Jul 2 METOP Mission EM CCU LBU_FM1_OPS 2 0 1 15 Jul 2004 12 01 00 File Name Files of Type XML SCOE Info _info xmb Choose file Cancel The dialog opens in the default SCOE file directory 6 Select a new SCOE file 7 Click button Choose File Choose file al o D oaks alge EURECA Mission DUMMY MISSION 8 CCU Q TEST DISTR V4 0 0 16 D o CCU 268436077 operational configuration 0 consistency date 11255313 CCU 278561597 consistency date 1134023659000 08 Dec 2005 06 34 APM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS AIV V6 0 1 29 Sep 2005 08 32 57 APM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS AIV V7 1 0 14 Dec 2005 17 33 59 CGS Mission AEOLUS COMMON CCU EADS SI TEST V1 0 0 07 Jul 2 METOP Mission EM CCU LBU_FM1_OPS 2 0 1 15 Jul 2004 12 01 00 gt gt al File Name 278561660 0 info xml Files of Type XML SCOE Info _info xmb v Choose file Cancel New SCOE file selected 94 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 10 JUL 3 18 CHECK CONSISTENCY
40. 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help ola a ae ae lg Symbol Library 2 x aae E i Idisplay 1 amp x bert ym free Lre Test Sub Display Symbol Test Symbol Label and rectangle are deleted 21 Select the created symbol Test Sub Display Symbol in the symbol Library 82 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 14 CREATE NEW SYMBOLS I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help S o DONDE 8 v s 9 u a 9 19 m e sje am o Male es E ela man mo ts Symbol Library x n idiplayfi amp r i A halos Pro Lan Test Sub Display Symbol Test Symbol Symbol selected 22 Left click hold on selected symbol and drag it to the middle of the open display to add it I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help ajo al a x svala aiaiai 8 s 010 ul s a a ai e gt HSDIDIOD hms sam dsl wE w e Jele e s w r E mmm ts Symbol Library x display 1 x aunan Test Sub Display Symbol Test Symbol est Symbol from Label The symbol containing a sub display is added inside the sub display are the label and rectangle elements 63 3 15
41. 1 3 Drag and Drop Windows Rearrange the docking windows by dragging and dropping To move a window press and hold down the left mouse button on its tab and drag the window A docking frame will show where the window will dock when releasing the mouse lig Property editor Synoptic hierarchy x nx 9 C Opened Displays OE qis O Es No title assigned on display 1 e nd Cs uss uss m ain sh arexdisplaysWuss 9 GE arm 9 L5 FLTSYS o 3 ors o L INT o CI PAYLOAD EZ MCS_Status uss iL A docking frame Display view settings amp x Library editor x T System conf The drag operation can be aborted using the right mouse key or Esc A complete tab window can also be dragged using the area to the right of the tabs A view can be dragged into another tab window The tabs of the views within a tab window can be rearranged by dragging the tabs to their new position 117 42 THE EDITOR WORKSPACE CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 2 1 4 Minimize and Maximize Views and tab windows can be minimized to the window bar at the bottom edge of the Editor by clicking the minimize button The previous location of a minimized or maximized window is remembered so that it can be restored to that location The minimized window can also be shown by clicking on it The window can be hidden by clicking on the tab again The windows can be restored by clicking the restore buttons A tab window ca
42. 2 4 ILA amp amp B lt 10 NOT A XOR B equals C A52 Bes string1 string2 A or B Aor B lt gt C string1 string2 false string1 a stringla abc aaa true zyx lt bcd false 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 32 12 3 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 1 2 4 2 in 1 2 3 true 4 in 1 2 3 false A 2 A 2 22 10 0 1 Conditional operator if then if A gt 2 then Ok Digo i if then else if A 22 THEN B 3 else B 4 152 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 7 DATA SOURCES 4 7 4 2 USS Library Extensions mdbPath Returns the engineering value for the data source with the given Pathname Note that the pathname argument has to be specified in quotes See sample expressions Variant mdbPath String pathname engineeringValue getDataFor pathname getValue return engineeringValue transformStateCode Transforms a Columbus MDB state code into an IDAGS conformant state code IDAGS conformant state codes consist of one or multiple literals separated by space All literals begin with a capital letter String transformStateCode String stateCode 4 7 4 3 Functions Itis possible to execute various functions in an expression Functions can be selected from the dropdown menu Select Function BufferGetBit Returns the Double value 1 if the bit in the byte buffer at the specified position is set Otherwise the Double value 0 will be retu
43. 21 Connecting to System to be Monitored and Controlled 166 DAL N 1 2 lt e 1 5 rr 228 ok S 9 ko AAA AA 166 5 2 1 2 Connecting to System to be Monitored and Controlled 166 Suns 6BUIS 424554 Ro X oh ooo see EUER ee RIP GS SS 167 5 22 Disconnecting System to be Monitored and Controlled 167 DOS Perego OS uox 0x won cw RUE 23 8 Ghee eed GARG oe AS 167 5 2 22 Disconnecting System to be Monitored and Controlled 167 D220 ede IC 167 5 2 3 Switching Target for Commands een 167 5 2 3 1 Switching Target for Commands 0 000048 167 5 2 4 Checking Acquisition State 2 0 een 168 Ore HICteGuisnes ya raras 168 5 2 4 2 Checking Overall Acquisition State o ooo 168 5 2 5 Checking Monitoring State o ee 169 02 54 Display Status Indicatof oops deem bee we eee E bees 169 5 2 5 2 Overall Monitoring Status Indicator 0048 170 5 2 5 2 1 Monitoring status history o o 171 Do Widow Handling lt gt 99 Renee oe 39454 1 2 9354 9 39 99 Ra pss 172 5 3 1 Saving Window Layout se ases les 172 cM ERIS qu cc po au ng RARER ee AAA 172 5 3 1 2 Saving Window Layout 00 00 0000 0000008 172 Do c PCT 173 0 92 Loading Window Layout ese essere m Row ue wo A deos 173 Doe IIBPEQUUSHPS ota pas Sma 05 oe ee ee AAA 173 5 3 2 2 Loading Window Layout oo e 173 Ao o IET
44. 29 990399 3 0 8 4 19 38 39 3 9 9318 E RC e BR td ad 118 422 Editor Monus cux rupem ROSE OR NOR P E AAA 118 42 2 1 Editor Edit Menu Item een 118 1222 Editor View Menu Item usus wo 4 5 4 e om R9 Rennes e Ro EU 119 42 23 Editor Tools Menu Item eee 119 42 24 Editor Element Menu enm leeren 119 42 25 Editor Window Menu Item een 120 422 0 Editor Help Menu Item soo a Race x ES sEG EX IEEE Dw N 120 495 Workip with Displays ses x 4 0e om mul 646 Ue EEREY REDRESS Y OHH os os ded 120 AS Were Displays x e dure qe qo 808 9 dup orb ronde de d E acci d f d em ien 121 2192 Previewing Displays serrata masid rro REX ee p UR op OS 121 d o a dcs umb E AERA d EEG NSW EF EA SSET ES RIS SS 122 ce d 25 4 tee 9 9 129 3 9 8798 2993 9 4 408 TEA 122 43 2 3 Slider With Manual Specification cles 122 4 3 2 4 Slider With Values From Pile 125 CONTENTS 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 3 2 5 Manipulating previewed elements s 123 2 20 Preview if BEXecutOE 3 40 64 odo Eom 09 4 E EES Oe S454 3 EGS Oe mes 149 4 3 3 Target System and DQI Style 2 mom Uy m CR ROAD oe ae Rh we 123 Working with Elements s x 4 9 3 4 9 So dy S44 Kew exor 9 S xc 9 d 124 441 Adding and Deleting Elements eee 124 44 2 Editing Element Properties o 125 o al IEEE 125 444 Bs ODSRAIDONS uo xk msed xe exp Pg Pam pu iaa 126 445 ZoOnubb laa CUL uus anm x bom e Rem EO B
45. 3 5 Show imported Satmon display samples e Open USS_HOME examples import uss satmon 4005 uss Choose File Open Compare with screenshot of original display DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED pa als la la a e ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED O dl la ed la l dl la la Open USS_HOME examples uss satmon 5001 uss 28 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL ae ls l iem la Mem em la B EA B EA BA Bd a E EA Ed BA Bd EA E EA b al dl l l ll la la l dls las a DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED ENABLED ENABLED CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL e Compare with screenshot of original display 5001 TCS Water Loop Overview AVAIL ENABLED ON 87 96 299 77 215 00 C 0 56 0 56 1 9 8 1 9 8 8 00 8 00 179 8 179 8 INACTIV ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE NOMINAL ON OFF 73 5 73 5 XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXX XXXX NO
46. 3 Gen_Com_int_SM_RS485_Main_Stat 3 Gen_Com_int_SM_RS485_Red_Stat Y Gen Com Int VU RS485 Main Stat 3 Gen Com Int VU RS485 Red Stat 3 Gen Com LAN SMSC LTU Stat D Gen Com SMSC COL HRD Stat Four fields are aligned 13 Use the magnifying glass with a in it to zoom the display to have a better look at the result display 2 x Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label 50 8 e ejg aj al jel EPM_Gen_Com_AFS_RS48 s Int sta T EPM Gen Com Int SM RS485 Mai n Bgm KPN Gen Con Int SM RS485 Red PO EPM Gen Com Int VU RS485 Mai n DENEN CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 9 CREATE ASCII DISPLAYS EPM_Gen_Com_AFS_RS485_Int_Stat HS EPM_Gen_Com_Int_SM_RS485_Main_ EPM_Gen_Com_Int_SM_RS485_Red_s Display zoomed 14 Select the four labels added from the System Configuration Browser and Open the Property Editor In the Property Editor change the font colour to same as the previous labels I gt USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help EJE St off d MET E uniform scaling y 100 elololol t F gt 0 gt 8 u e 8 o Dl01a gt e s a gt slo ala gt aiaia 12 e a Te 3 Property Editor x Porra ax displayt2 2 x ey Label69_EPM_Gen_Com_Int_VU_RS485_M IE n Stat RPM Gen Con AF ns485 1 nt Stat PES s n 9 Appearance Font Lucida
47. 3 TM iD Type 3 NODE ID Default Value EY PATH ID D 3 CHECKSUM INDIC 3 ONBOARD NODE Engineering Unit Name Min Value Max Value Command Preview issue sw command SW CMD DMS TLM Start Cyclic Tlm Packet Cmd SW TM ID NODE ID PA TH ID null RATE null CHECKSUM_INDIC null ONBOARD NODE Telecommand editor Edit input field NOTE In case you need to update the constraints of a parameter take care to set values that do not contradict to the original command definition The following table lists the different possible constraints of input fields Table 4 6 List of input field constraints Data Type Valid Constraint Absolute Time no constraint defined no constraint defined List of integer values in the range of 0 31 rue or false Double Float Range definition of min and max value Range definition of min and max value 137 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Table 4 6 continued Data Type Valid Constraint value is a valid hexadecimal value max Hexadecimal a number of digits Range definition of min and max value Long Integer Range definition of min and max value Object Identifier Either a set of valid end item types or a set of valid end item opsnames Short Integer Range definition of min and max value Set of valid values Set of valid values or a regular expression to comp
48. 4 us Library P 8x 4 d i veer Pax My Consistency Results 8x The first sub step is completed 6 Now repeat the activities for adding a subs step title and two verification instructions analogously HRM_Pwr_Stat_A and HRM_Pwr_Stat_B can be found under DMS HRM for the beginning of the next sub step After that add the command instruction Switch the System Browser to the OPS view and the Onboard Commands category then browse to COMMS HRM Activation_AP and drag this item onto the display area Change the text of the created command button to HRM Activation then add two labels for cmd and Execute and set their font to Lucida Sans Typewriter Sans Bold size 14 Finally align the newly created components 112 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY TRS Display Editor 2 8 0 ajajaja alo Hie Edit View Tools Element Window Help 0 0 WHbi s besna g Property Editor amp X 5 Synoptic Herarchy gt e pd tutorial uss Bumm 9 Appearance Background Color Background Symbol Library Name Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button R 238 G 238 8 239 FEEEEEE lvi E EB E S coc e 0x isoa pdfutorialuss X eee enables the HRM MMU link Master MMU Fiber Optic Junper installation must be completed before starting this step After HRM activation correct configuration of HCOR APS H
49. 480 Width 640 9 Information Description Test making a display Title My Display 7 Log Insert New Change Entry Add New Log Entry Select Change Entry 1 eli id Change Autnot 15 lect CI na late 10 sel gt The Property Editor shows the edited properties for the display 8 Add a Tank meter a Telecommand button and a Rectangle from the editor menu Element Add Display contains a Label Tank meter Telecommand button and a Rectangle 9 Click the added Tank meter to select it edit it properties in the Property Editor to match 31 3 5 MAKING A DISPLAY Property Editor y Property Editor x TankMeter TankMeter1 Be 9 Appearance Fluid Color CUSTOM FLUID w Shape Fill Color NN R 65 G 105 B 225 Shape Fill Style Solid v 9 Behaviour Meter Color Show Status 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 100 Width 100 X 130 Y 140 General Data Source MeterDS1 9 Information Comment CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Result after editingTank Meter changes with it properties In the Property Editor the property Data Source contains a button which gives access to the data source editing dialog 10 Click the added Telecommand to select it edit it properties in the Property Editor to match TIP Property Editor 9 Property Editor e x lt CommandButton gt TeleCommand1
50. Autosize Label Text Horizontal Alignment Label Text Verti lt Label gt Labell Be 9 Appearance Font Serif plain 0 10 Font Color MM F 165 0 42 B 42 A52A2A Label Text Autosize Label Text Horizontal Alignment v Label Text Yertical Alignment v 9 Behaviour Auto Text Clipping Context Label For F 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height ills Width EAD X 10 Y 10 9 Information Comment Label Text Test Symbol from Label Name Labell Selected Element eleme Tooltip cal Alignment and Label Text Giving the following label result 6 Resize the label by dragging its control points in the corners make it larger s Test Symbol from Label The label is enlarged text is followed because we set the property Label Text Autosize to checked 7 Open the Symbol Library from menu View Symbol Library 79 3 14 10 11 12 13 CREATE NEW SYMBOLS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL ig Symbol Library x gt Property Editor 65 85 4 3D Graphics t 3 3D1 Camera Control Mod 3p1 Camera Rotate 3D1 Camera Translate e NI 3D10 Restore View 3D11 Roll Left 3D11 Roll Left Alterna 3D11 Roll Right 3D11 Roll Right Altern 3D12 Save View 3D13 Step Size 3D14 Target 3D15 Translation Backward C9 3D15 Translation Forward 3D16 View Direction Fr 3D16 View Direction Fr O A us 3D16 View Direction To 3D17 Zoom 3D2 Camera Options Symbol Library shown Cl
51. D ty Diplay a D B D The New display has a label with your added text 4 If Property Editor is not open open it by choosing Views Property Editor Property Editor Open 5 In the Property Editor check the Label Text Auto size My Diplay The Label changes text size to match the size of the label 6 Click on the in the display area outside the label area Display is selected and Property Editor shows the properties of the display 30 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 5 MAKING A DISPLAY 7 Undock the Property Editor and edit the following properties by clicking in the field for the prop erties int Property Editor and editing a Background color Click button and add from color dialog a light blueish color Nd Pick a Colour My Colours Swatches HSB RGB MMM Blue Dodger_ Bluelight WWW BlueRoyal_ IS Brown E Pink Hot Pium Purpie JME Red Preview ENER 165 G 42 B 42 4452A2A Set as colour Brown v Rename Cancel Reset b Check the property Show Execute Button c Fill in the properties in the category Information 9 Property Editor x display 1 E 9 Appearance Background Color ETR 173 G 216 B 230 ADD Background Symbol Library Name v Background Symbol Name v 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname enx DE System Tree Interna Target System MCS Ly 9 Dimensions Height
52. Dimensions of display width and height e Information Description and title information f Log Logging information for simple revision control 3 Close the Property Editor by clicking the close icon in the undocked view 20 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI 4 Open the Synoptic Hierarchy from menu Views Synoptic Hierarchy and undock it i Synoptic Hierarchy x feox 9 7 Open Displays 9 Es No title assigned on displays Labell Label2 o L5 home uss uss project The Synoptic Hierarchy is undocked and it is showing the open display selected as well as the displays not opened saved in the USS project folder The Synoptic Hierarchy can be used to select displays and elements within as well as it easily gives access to the project displays 5 Close the Synoptic Hierarchy by clicking the close icon in the undocked view 6 Open the System Configuration Browser from menu Views System Configuration Browser and undock it i System Configuration Browser x vd ox OPS View Onboard Telemetry v ls o 5 BLE gt C COMMS o C DMS o L ECLSS o L EDR J EPDS o 7 EPM o 3 ETF o L EUTEF E FSL o 3 PAYLOAD o PL SOL gt L SOLAR o 3 SYSTEM gt EI TCS The System Configuration Browser is undocked and it is showing the content of the SCOE file different OPS and Path views exist as well as categories
53. EDITOR CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Default Context Defines which context is the default one from the list above used mainly in data source dialog e Data Source Definition of the Context List which is the set of TM identifiers e g Opsname Pathname SID PUI The Context list is used in data source dialogs and the Label Context property Context default is the context that is shown in Context selection combo boxes as the default entry e SCOE SCOE file path e Autoload IMDB properties used to launch editor Optional The preferences are stored in the uss config file which should not be modified outside the Editor For information on how to configure the Editor in the MCS environment see USS Editor Parameter 4 11 3 View Settings The View Settings property pane can be accessed from the View menu The View Settings present and allow modification of the grid and zoom settings for the current display In order to change grid and zoom default settings for new displays use the Preferences er ay Symbol Library KS Synoptic Hierarchy P View Settings x S display t HES Ee 9 Grid Draw Color E R 182 6 192 B 192 ECOCOCO Draw Style Dots EJ Draw Thickness 1 Snap to Grid on Move During v Snap to Grid on Resize During v Spacing Horizontal 10 Spacing Vertical 22 9 Zoom Zoom Factor in Percent 100 Zoom Step Size in Percent 10 View setting 164 Chapter 5 Exec
54. EE 9 Appearance Button Type Simple Text Button z Shape Fill Color L RAI eA K Bee Shape Fill Style Solid v Commanding Command wc 9 Dimensions Depth Height Width X Y Information Comment Name TeleCommand1 Released Label Text Default CommandButtonl elected Element Tooltip 9 Misc Button Shape Corner Fill Color MM Ro G 0 B 0 000000 Corner Fill Style Solid Cid LJ Corners Enabled a Result after editing Telecommand has changed IS In the Property Editor the property Command contains a button which gives access to the command editing dialog 11 Click the added Rectangle to select it edit it properties in the Property Editor to match 32 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 5 MAKING A DISPLAY 9 Property Editor x lt Rectangle gt Rectangle4 9 Appearance Draw Color NE OCGOEO s000000 Draw Style Draw Width 1 Shape Fill Color R 255 G 255 B 255 HF Shape Fill Ste Solid 9 Dimensions Depth 1 Height 180 Width 340 X 100 T 110 Information Comment Name Rectangle4 1 element Tooltip Display is edited 12 Now you should preview you created display to get a better feel for it appearance and test its behaviour Select from menu Tools Previewer Display is opened in the previewer frame USS Editor Preview Untitled File Preview RNG n ECE D a 00 90009 fs SS Se fe tt Wet al tet Bey a PLE pr
55. ES ea y 15220 ig 22 12 das WZ 1 258 10257 SO 1455 0 SS 1 925 SS 1995 Isis Se 140 140 143 143 WES dins 148 148 O wao Se Is as EI SS SS devi ie Ik Nes LET 1 59 84 ou 87 SIS OR oe D 94 94 n e 29 ES KOZ MO LOS 180055 OS O LLG KO 1L 15 JL 32 IES IES SUNT TIT JE228 TAO 12 2 Wea AS eae AY 1251 BS LSO SS 195 Ho 1655 bss 159 140 140 ARS 143 145 145 148 148 ToO 50 Koe PSS WE 15515 SiS SS JL Slt JL OL 163 ToS 166 grey33 gray34 grey34 gray35 grey35 gray36 grey36 E grey37 gray38 grey38 gray39 grey39 gray40 grey40 gray4l grey41 gray42 grey42 gray43 grey43 gray44 grey44 gray45 grey45 gray46 grey46 gray47 grey47 gray48 grey48 gray49 grey49 gray50 grey50 Grayod grey51 Quan ol grey52 gray53 grey53 gray54 grey54 gray55 grey55 gray56 grey56 gray57 grey57 gray58 grey58 gray59 grey59 gray60 grey60 graye grey61 gray62 grey62 gray63 grey63 gray64 grey64 gray65 250 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 4 RGB COLORS IG EGG EGG grey65 ING Se dE oe ers gray66 Boer poed EOS grey66 MS leal qua d A a le grey67 173 173 173 gray68 173 173 173 grey68 176 176 176 gray69 176 176 176 grey69 A aD Ti A EE gray 0 A AS grey70 ISIE E T Gu dire Ib les Lon e grey71 184 184 184 Ja TA 184 184 184 grey 2 Ire ere SO SIRENS GEA IS SS SiS grey73 39 eos iso gray74 eos T grey74 WE E T epa LOMO o grey75
56. Edit Close Lock database item s for edit Please wait MDB Browser is locking the display Lock database item s for edit Done MDB Browser is done locking the display 15 Click button Close in MDB Browser 16 Close the open display selecting from menu Filel Close Open Synoptic Hierarchy by selecting from menu View Synoptic Hierarchy 2 Synoptic Hierarchy e x BEEN t c Open Displays 9 5 home uss uss project J lib 9 7 CDU 316390119 9 7 APM 9 C COMMON TEST SUPP 9 CA GRD DATA v uss 9 7 EDITOR 9 Cf MANUAL TESTS E MDBTEST uss J AUTOMATIC TESTS o 3 DISPLAYS o C MDBIO o 7 EXECUTOR E Displayl uss ES Display2 uss Synoptic Hierarchy shows the project files 103 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 17 Browse to the saved display in the project folder via the Synoptic Hierarchy path uss project directory gt lt CU_DIRECTORY gt APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS M 18 Right click on project display MDBTEST uss and choose from pop up menu Open display 2 Property Editor Synoptic Hierarchy x nu 9 C Open Displays o Ee No title assigned on home uss uss project CDU 316990119 APM COMMON TEST SU m fhome uss uss project J lib 9 S CDU_316990119 9 Gq APM 9 3 COMMON_TEST_SUPP 9 L7 GRD_DATA 9 GE uss 9 7 EDITOR 9 Gj MANUAL TESTS MDBTET uss nnl AUTOMATIC TESTS o mnl DISPL
57. Editor after adding note block 5 After adding the sub step title 1 1 Verify PDU Power Outlets using the same method as for the main step title but the smaller font Sans Typewriter Regular size 14 add the corresponding veri fication instructions Open the System Configuration Browser switch to the OPS view and the On board Telemetry category then browse to EPDS PDU1 Subsys_Pwr_Bus5_On_Off_stat_DMC ae so ajo a se a a eal 8 a Ja a m E La Property Editor amp X Eo Synoptic Hierarchy m a gt eS ot to o ujajojeje esa ma ax asist Pd tutoriales P x pd tutorial uss EISE 9 Appearance Background Color Background Symbol Library Name Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname 230u e R 238 G 238 8 238 FEEEEEE 4 J 4 urce MO i J J urce MDB Versio Target System Dimensions Height 1 560 Width 880 9 Information Description Titte HRM Activation Log p m OPS View Onboard Telemetry Insert New Change Entry Select Change Entry D Subsys_Pwr_Bus4_Sys_Cntl_Stat_VTC D Subsys_Pwr_Bus4_Voltage_DMC DN Subsys_Pwr_Bus4_Voltage_VTC D Subsys Pwr Bus5 Current DMC D Subsys Pwr Bus5 Current VTC PWS oo l T Bu D Subsys_Pwr_Bus5_On_Off_Stat_VTC fd e MC 1 1 1 c don EM 1 1 Verify PDU Power Outlets 1 iC 1 E 1 activates the nominal HRM co
58. FM T L E The redundant 28 V power supplies from PDU1 and PDU2 238 YEEEEEE Outlet 40 on both PDU s for the HRM are shared with other equipment MMU CMU HSE HUB These outlets are switched ON at COL activation and remain permanently ON independent of the HRM status For activation deactivation two Pwr converters in the HRM are used to supply Pwr to nominal and redundant HRM cores which are cold redundant via the HRM internal common Pwr Bus This procedure uses the FLAP HRM Activation which switches ON both HRM Pwr converters activates the nominal HRM core if the nominal HRM core activation fails the redundant HRM core 35s automatically activated instead starts RT acquisition amp nonitoring of HRM data enables the HRM MMU Tink Master MMU Fiber Optic Jumper installation must be completed before starting this step After HRM activation correct configuration of HCOR APS HRFM must be verified to support downlink of Ku band packets via the HRM 1 1 Verify PDU Power Outlets Verify PDUL Subsys Pwr BusS ON MM Pwr BusS ON MN Verify PDU2 Subsys B Background Symbol Library Name w Background Symbol Name e 9 Behawour Show Execute Butior LA 9 Context Help URL Opsname 3 Target System PS L 4 Dimensions Height 1 560 Width 9 Informabon Description ite HRM Actwabor Log Insert New Change E Add New Log Entry Select Change Entry LY
59. Graph 8 Click on grid line tab 55 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Gridline General Legend Domain Axis Range Axis Vertical Gridline ste pasea UUE Colour 1 R 204 G 204 B 255 CCCCFF m Width 1 0 Horizontal Gridline mensi Ui O Colour R 204 G 204 B 255 CCCCFF m Width 1 0 OK Cancel The Graph Dialog shows the grid line properties tab for the Line Graph 9 Change the horizontal and vertical grid colours to Brown from My Colours and click OK button 10 Click on legend tab Na Pick a Colour My Colours Swatches HSB RGB EN BlueDodger Bluelight WWW BlueRoyal T Brown Gray83PC _ E Green MMMM Green Dark Mii Green 4 E Pink Hot X Plum Purple IM Read Preview ENER 165 G 42 B 42 452424 Set as colour Bown v Rename Cancel Reset Grid colour are updated General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Show Legend Label Color MN R 0 G 0 B 0 000000 R No of Sections 1 Field Columns 6 Field Decimals 2 OK Cancel The Graph Dialog shows the legend properties tab for the Line Graph 11 Click on general tab 56 CHAPTER 3 12 In the general tab click the button to open the Background colour selection dialog and select TUTORIAL 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY General Legend Gridline Domain Axis
60. Here the SCOE file can be selected if you change it the System Configuration Browser will reload with the new information This concludes the lesson in the USS Editors preferences Normally these settings are preset deliv ered from the system administrator 44 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 8 CHANGING DQI STYLES 3 8 Changing DQI Styles The USS Editor and Executor use Data Quality Indicator definition to give information about the state of the data being processed 33 For thourough explanation of DQI in USS see Data Quality Indication 3 8 1 Lesson in viewing and changing DOI files The lesson assumes the XML editor KXML editor is installed 1 Opening the KXML editor and browser to the gt USS_INSTALL lt etc directory Here open the file mcs_dqistyle xml mcs_dqistyle xml Kate IES File Edit Document View Bookmarks Tools Settings Help 206993 0 P Oe E lt xml version 1 0 encoding UIF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE StyleSet lt lENTITY arrow up amp 8593 gt lt lENTITY arrow down amp 8595 gt lt ENTITY arrow updown amp 8597 gt gt lt StyleSet gt GRAPH LIMIT COLOR DEFINITIONS lt GraphLimitColors gt lt LowCautionL init colors yellow Hi ghCautionLimit color yellow gt lt LowWarningL init color red gt lt HighWarningL imit color red gt lt Low0ffScaleVarningLimit color red gt lt HighOffScaleWarningLimit color red gt lt GraphLinitColors gt
61. IndianRed 139 69 19 saddle brown L139 69 19 SaddleBrown BOOTE ARS sienna 205 133 6S peru AS SS burlywood 245 245 220 beige IRE wheat 244 164 96 sandy brown 244 164 96 SandyBrown POG ao tan 210 105 30 chocolate 178 34 34 firebrick 165 42 42 brown 299 150 122 dark salmon 299 150 122 DarkSalmon 250 128 114 salmon Zoo Sr O E voit sa inion l II HE THE 259 165 U orange 255 140 U dark orange 255 140 U DarkOrange 255 127 0 coral E R I Se E e ISSO al SE AZ Sala RER Core evil 259 ET tomato 259 6E U orange red 259 69 U OrangeRed 2 05 0 0 red ao oO es eS Net pata Peo EI ales ISTR eris Zeon eae FIENT deep pink ZO en Pe DeepPink rS ees pink E EAS IS Jonas ASIS ES ROET R als S NU pale violet red PAS pe is ley PaleVioletRed 176 48 96 maroon LESS ELO ES medium violet red SNS SS MediumVioletRed 208 32 144 violet red 208 32 144 VioletRed 2 5 O 2 5 magenta SIS violet AN 2 plum a 7 Mi EG eT IS 2111 medium orchid le6 65 TI MediumOrchid 153 50 204 dJar R Ore Malal 1595 50 20 ID ciere es 148 O 211 dark violet 148 O 211 DarkViolet LAS ALS blue violet 243 9 4 RGB COLORS 9 4 RGB COLORS SS 160 1527 147 ES 2 95 Ze ZI d ZOD Zoo AOS ee 195 ZO 205 LESS Zo Zee PADS 29 LOD 2 BUS ZO 15509 ANS Zo 205 ES LIO Zoe ZU se Ow 238 ZO 115519 2x5 BS 205 ipo 240 224 1 93 T DS s Zio oe 22195 Zoe 205 e 240 224 193 sal igoa E LOS ed Us 67 oe 43 577 IZ 1
62. Keyboard shortcuts are shown for each command in the menu of the Editor Drag symbols from the Symbol Library Data Fields and Commands Drag TM or TC from the System Configuration Browser Drag elements from the Synoptic Hierarchy Open Displays onto the current display 124 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 4 WORKING WITH ELEMENTS e Drag elements between display folders in the Synoptic Hierarchy Open Displays e Navigation button Right click the Synoptic Hierarchy and select Add Navigation to display Elements are deleted by selecting the elements and e pressing the Delete button or e selecting Edit Delete 4 4 2 Editing Element Properties All properties of the elements are available for inspection and or modification in the Property Editor show below Label Label66 9 Appearance Font Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular 0 10 Font Color MM P 0 G 0 B 0 000000 Label Text Autosize Label Text Horizontal Alignment Left v Label Text Vertical Alignment Center 9 Behaviour Auto Text OFF v Clipping OFF Context Opsname Label For None E 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 15 width 43 IX 10 10 4 4 9 Information Comment Label Text labelb56 Name Label66 Tooltip Y Location coordinate Y from top 0 to bottom Property Editor showing properties for a label The top line in the Property Editor shows the element type and name The three buttons are
63. Konquerer icon in the task bar and click on it to start the file browser Wsogeese 212 Konquereris normally in the quick start icon bar 2 Konquerer normally opens in the home folder of the current user click the release info file to read the release info r file home uss Konqueror Location Edit Wiew Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help x KR Y 1 w uss 2 6 0 release info FO 26 Items 3 Files 20 6 MB Total 23 Directories Konquerer showing the content of the user home folder 3 Konquerers embedded text viewer shows release information Click the back button in konquerer to go back to the home folder 14 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 2 INSTALLATION OF USS PACKAGE gt file home uss uss 2 6 0 release info Konqueror Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help amp amp 59 0 FABG BRA D location TTT ST SS version 2 6 0 build 20060905 1608 Perforce change number Change 27240 Released by mr Delivered to eRoom AIV Release information shown in Konquerer embedded viewer 4 Find the USS package compressed folder ss amp aAA uss 2 5 0 uss project workspace uss 2 5 0 uss 2 6 0 release release info notes doc For Linux USS is delivered as a gzip compressed tar archive 5 Right click the compressed archive and select Extract here form popup menu GA New Window Z Undo Copy CI Z de Cut Ctrl
64. L2 so ACOUIED DANGER HIGH LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION L3 E so AcouRED DANGER MIGH LIMIT VIOLATION DISABLED L4 so ACoUmED DANGER MIGH LIMIT VIOLATION in umns Ls s0 AcourRED DANGER MIGH LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED Le s0 AcouRED DANGER MIGH LIMIT VIOLATION UNKNOWN L7 ESO AcoUmED DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION e s0 facoumen DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION o s0 AcoUmED DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DISABLED io E s0 AcoUmED DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION in umns ia E so AcourRED DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED 12 50 facoumen DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION UNKNOWN so acoumep Tags DEITA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION a 50 acoumep Tags DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION Hs so acoum pissen piss Oo O 16 so oum psauzp is ar se _ acouime gt ST D e so jump pissen UNKNOWN 9 so acoum incas DEITA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION 50 oum iuwms DEITA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION 12 Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 1 Introduction This tutorial is put together of a series of lessons going through some of the basic and advanced editing of the USS editor as well as some advanced topics covering editing external to the USS Editor Lessons in creating command elements 9 and navigation elements 10 are made as a continuous extended lessons but can with slight modification be used separ
65. Label Text will be shown if the label is too small to contain all the label text 4 6 3 Data Field Data field can be created by dragging one or more TM from the System Configuration Browser on to an empty area on the display background The Field data formatting is described in section Field data formatting below The Data Source is described in section Data Sources below LCD elements are Data Fields using an LCD font In the Property Editor Appearance category Font property open the Pick a font dialog and select font LCD or LCD2 Data Fields properties 9 Appearance Field Data Autowrap L Field Data Formatting Field Data Text Horizontal Alignment Right y Field Data Text Vertical Alignment Center v Font Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular D Font Color MM F0 6 0 B 0 000000 Show Data Indicators show Unit Data Field Properties in Property Editor The Data Field has several unique properties e Data Auto Wrap If checked the data field will wrap put multiple lines data which is too wide for the field Data Formatting See below Data Text Horizontal Alignment Left Center or Right alignment of data text in field Data Text Vertical Alignment Bottom Center or Top alignment of data text in field e Font The font to use for text e Font Colour The colour to use for text e Show Data Indicators if checked the data field will indicate quality of incoming data Override DOI if checked the data field
66. Left aligned color yellow CyanFA Left aligned color cyan Left aligned color green Table 7 6 Satmon text styles added with USS version 2 15 Satmon style DkGreyFA OrangeFA PurpleFA NormalOA UninitOA LPChkBerd Left aligned color black with dark grey background The following table lists the attributes and their interpretation for a FixedAlpha static text output element Table 7 7 Fixed Alpha attributes FixedAlpha attribute Interpretation The y position of the element row Integer i in number of characters The x position of the element col Integer E in number of characters The static text to display 213 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS Table 7 7 continued FixedAlpha attribute The style to use for text StyleID String presentation Defines colour and alignment see Table 7 5 Optional attribute containing a link to a display If this is present the text is displayed in Hotlink String italic and the label is generated as NavigationButton for the specified display The following table lists the attributes and their interpretation for a OutputAlpha output element for displaying telemetry Table 7 8 OutputAlpha attributes OutputAlpha attribute Interpretation The y position of the element Integer in number of characters The x position of the element RM in number of characters The static text to display The opsname of the configuration i
67. NOMINAL DISABLED 2 8903179694447223 2 8903179694447223 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 1 6676874671610273 1 6676874671610273 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 4187565372920082 0 4187565372920082 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 8367784333231448 0 836778543333231448 NOMINAL DISABLED 072116908177585 2 079116908177585 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 288666467385826 3 288666467385826 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 4463517918492705 4 4463517918492705 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 533915492433431 5 533915492433431 NOMINAL DISABLED 534206039901047 6 534206039901047 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 13144825473937 7 4314482547773937 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 211492091337036 8 211492091337036 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 962035792312145 8 862035792312145 NOMINAL DISABLED 372819894918912 9 372819894918912 NOMINAL IN LIMITS l a LD C C J d Q1 d 0 A o 4 3 2 5 Manipulating previewed elements Each element being previewed has a pop up menu mouse right click which can be used to manipulate and copy the element to clipboard Pop up menu items for previewed elements not all items are present for all elements e Properties Change properties for element this will open a dialog with properties that can be changed in preview mode e LineGraph Shows the attached data source values in a Line Graph to for showing of variation over time e Copy OPS name to clipboard Copies the OPS name to clipboard meaning it can be pasted else where as text other program etc e Copy Display title to clipboard Copies the display title to clipboard meani
68. ORS daim oray 105 105 105 DimGray Oversea ICES dim grey 105 105 105 DimGrey 112 128 144 slate gray 112 128 144 SlateGray 112 128 144 slate grey 112 128 144 SlateGrey SS isis cie Cuca AS lo LightSlateGray TIERE on alee light slate grey TAS SAS SS LightSlateGrey IESO AO ESAS gray TSO ASE ESO grey 211 211 211 light grey l ZW Zhe LightGrey 211 211 211 oi Sus ZION ce T LightGray HIN ET midnight blue LAOREET Oa E MidnightBlue U E navy U 0 128 navy blue U EI NavyBlue L100 L49 257 cornflower blue 1O00 149 237 CornflowerBlue T2 61 139 dark slate blue 72 61 139 DarkSlateBlue 106 90 205 slate blue 106 90 205 SlateBlue IAS medium slate blue MASA AS MediumSlateBlue ES light slate blue 2 AS LightSlateBlue 0 9r 2 05 medium blue 0 S B MediumBlue 65 105 225 royal blue GET RoyalBlue U SS blue 30 144 255 dodger blue 30 144 255 DodgerBlue D 191 255 deep sky blue 0 191 255 DeepSkyBlue ISS AES sky blue S B eE SkyBlue IS RE light sky blue ESAS Y LightSkyBlue 241 9 4 RGB COLORS 9 4 RGB COLORS 70 70 IEE LG RFS L AS AS a ES 12 L2 64 22A 224 ela Qu wO OZ dE 90 eh 143 aS 46 46 60 60 32 oe eZ IZ 124 wA I EIE S thes 50 20 oA 154 34 34 JO BRZ 189 ESO 240 2 BS Zee 250 Zea QS 2 9 1S0 JE 1596 ESAS ZAS DEC 224 224 Zoe Zs ZAG ZIG DE ZO 20 2 5 Zoo Zo B SS 200 205 LD 100 100 O SES SiS 188 SS 1S dS ES IS LES Zoa Zeon Zu Za uA 2 ZS
69. Peo eae eee eee ee ewe RE RES 173 5 3 3 Loading Display from File System oo eee 173 DU Perga ieS uir e edm roo y EE UE AAA A 173 5 3 3 2 Loading Display from File System llle 174 5 3 4 Reloading Display from File System anaa 0 174 OOF Prerequisites s scp A 174 5 3 4 2 Reloading Display from File System rss 174 5 3 5 Resizing Display WINdOW amp se sessa dseg LEEDS EMG Je 9 EO wes EG eS 174 Devoe FVCRCGUISHES rr 174 5 3 52 Resizing Display Window 20 00000000000 175 CONTENTS 5 4 5 3 6 Resetting Display Window to Default Size 2 ee 175 B00 ARLCIOQUISICES Ro 3 0X og o3 Eo 0640628 EUR OSS 444 EES Oe eS 175 5 3 6 2 Resetting Display Window to Default Size oo 175 5 3 7 Navigating Display Hierarchy o o 175 5 3 71 Navigating Display Hierarchy o ooo 175 5 3 8 Navigating to Home Display o o 176 SAO PrereguisiteS ep veo n up uci AAA 176 5 8 82 Navigating to Home Display aoaaa 176 5 3 9 Showme Hidine the Toolbar omo Remy 9 RR Roh OH eS 177 9 5 9 ETCTOQUISNES s royo X due d xU sete S XOU A CES ORE He ie de dtd 177 5 3 9 2 Showing Hiding the Toolbar o oo 177 ee Closing Display s son sa owe eG eae eee eee ee eee eee ee 177 OO Prerequisites veian ra BT 5310 2 Closing Display seers careant AO AAA 177 Dow Seals LL Ly D
70. STATE DEFINITIONS gt lt AcquisitionStatus states UNKNOWN REQUESTED NOT_MAINTAINED NOT_ACQUIRED NOT_RECEIVED INVALID ACQUIRED DATA INTERRUPTION STATIC MonitoringStatus states DISABLED IN LIMITS NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION NOMINAL LOW LIMIT VIOLATION NOMINAL HIGH LIMIT VIOLATION DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DANGER HIGH LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED UNKNOWN gt lt DeltaMonitoringStatus states DISABLED IN_LIMITS DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED UNKNOWN gt Y S 1 DOIStvl E Line 1 Col 0 INS NORM mcs dgistyle ml The KXML Editor shows the content of the xml formatted DQI file for the MCS target system The XML tree hierarchy is shown on the left and the content of the selected node on the right where the content can be edited 2 Browse in the XML tree hierarchy to the node AcquisitionStatus and select it to show the content 45 3 8 CHANGING DQI STYLES CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL mcs dqistyle xml Kate 268993 0 P ma UGQ HighCautionLimit color yellow gt lt LowWarningL imit color red gt lt HighWarningl imit color red gt lt Low0ffScaleWVarningLimit color red gt lt HighOffScaleWarningLimit color red gt lt GraphLinitColors gt i STATE DEFINITIONS gt aS T REQUESTED NOT_MAINTAINED NOT_ACQUIRED NOT_RECEIVED INVALID ACQUIRED DATA INTERRUPTION STATIC gt lt M
71. Sans Type Font Color NE F6 0 152 B 6 Label Text Autosize o o l Label Text Horizo Left E HPM Gen Con Int 3M R5485 M n Label Text vertical Center 9 Behaviour Auto Text CONTEXT v Clipping OFF O O A Spsname v PM _Gen_C on_Int_SM_RS485_Red_s MN Label For 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 15 Width X RPM Gen Con Int VU RS485 Main Y O S Label colours change 15 Click on display back ground where there are no elements 16 In the Property Editor select the Background colour of the display and change in to Black 51 3 9 CREATE ASCII DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 5 USS Display Editor 2 6 0 ICE File Edit View Tools Element Window Help caos a e a v N aje o e E C K k kl gt Ey al de A 245 E ing A Ir 9 Property Editor x display 2 amp x o Y Sr ra 0x dlisplay 2 9 Appearance Background Calor Background Symb Background Symb Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL MMBROGOBO Display background is now black 3 9 2 Lesson in working with ASCII displays elements defaults and seperators 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Add a field by selecting in the menu Element Add Field Field
72. Save In display copies le B m H File Name copy of COL_HOME disp lay Files of Type USS displays uss ly Cancel 4 Click Save Display is saved in USS XML format 5 7 5 Configuring Status Display 5 7 5 1 Prerequisites e USS must be installed 5 7 5 2 Configuring Status Display The MCS status display is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the executor window It can be turned off as follows TM mcs gt amp R Sp To configure status display 1 Open uss properties file in basedir uss x y z etc with a text editor 2 To not display the status display change the value of uss mcs status indicator property to false Toe acia dle the MCS S ECC incLeator in tne executor status area uss los Sie ios icine ea inet c The MCS status display will not be shown in USS executor area at the bottom of the window in the status bar Upd Perf ds Not Connected 5 7 5 3 See also e Section 1 2 5 7 6 Configuring Data Quality Indicators 5 7 6 1 Prerequisites e USS must be installed 5 7 6 2 Configuring Data Quality Indicators You can configure the visual appearance of data quality indicators DQI To configure data quality indicators 1 Edit uss properties file in basedir uss x y z etc with a text editor and set the corresponding prop erty to the name of a DOI configuration file 193 5 8 CONFIGURING THE EXECUTOR CHAPTER 5 EXE
73. Select either Yes No or Cancel If you chose No a display which is already open and is also contained in the layout will be opened twice So if you don t want any display to be opened more than once click Yes gt Load Layout 2 Shall all displays be closed before loading a new layout iesi No Cancel 3 In the File chooser dialog select the layout you which to load e g default layout Load Layout Look In C layout y Es oc ica e I default layout File Name default layout Files of Type USS Layout files C layout iy Cancel 4 Click Open The current layout is replaced with the selected layout 5 3 2 3 See also e Saving Window Layout 5 3 3 Loading Display from File System 5 3 3 1 Prerequisites e Window layout must exist 173 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 3 3 2 Loading Display from File System USS supports the displaying of at least 20 synoptic displays in parallel A display can be loaded multiple times The file hierarchy is the directory tree of the file system e g examples uss fwdu where the directories are the nodes and the displays are the leafs of the hierarchy structure The displaying of the file name depends if it is a PCS FWDU or GWDU display The file name of a PCS display is defined by the NASA The file name of a FWDU display is its MDB end item name whi
74. SimpleTeleCommandParameter SimpleTeleCommandParameter element NestedTeleCommandParameter NestedTeleCommandParameter by TeleCommand 236 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA Symbol element LibraryName text element SymbolName text element ValueMapping element entry element string text element string text x E G ETTR TEI E IT TRET text 2 element CornerEnabled sa boolean element FillStyle FillStyle element CornerFillStyle FillStyle element DQIFlagEnabled xsd boolean Image TankMeter AMS s dd cs EINIGE CL Meter TeleCommand element Name text 2 element Kincl A AS MOE A OS als ome STOW Command TeleCommandParameter element Owner StructuredTeleCommand _reference element Name text element Constraint attribute class text _anyElementx element InputOutputMapping abt gbutc cod ass A sligniked hash map y element entry 1 element string text element string text L x eee Semen Values uu ect TextStyle element Rontname text y element Fontsize xsd nonNegativelnteger element susBold xscepoolesml eere peces clase sexs cabo lleno ey element IsUnderlined xsd boolean elecmenuesco S Coon EET EH L RE A HR TE A ENTER bai Gri element VerticalAlignment TOP CENTER BOTTOM Thermometer TickMeter TickMeter element TickBase xsd double element Color 1 Colo
75. The import of Satmon displays is a technology demonstrator and has prototype status in the current version of USS Some testing has been done with example displays but the Satmon import is not formally validated or qualified This section describes how Satmon displays are imported and converted to USS format Satmon displays are XML files with the extension xm1 Satmon displays can be directly loaded in the editor and executor or batch converted as described in the beginning of this chapter No additional configuration files are required Example 7 2 Batch converting a set of Satmon displays The following command reads all Satmon displays in the directory examples import satmon con verts them to USS format and writes the result into the output directory tmp USS COM Vetoes TITI cy ocu I Sco Og 7 4 1 Satmon display file format analysis This section contains an analysis of the Satmon XML format with respect to compatibility to the concepts of USS As input for this analysis a set of Satmon FCT display files dated June 2006 and a few screenshots were used No information about run time behaviour of the displays was available As result of this analysis a Satmon importer for USS was implemented 7 4 1 1 Satmon display XML structure A Satmon XML display always starts with the PageDef root element defining the type title and dimen sions of a display The PageDef root element can contain FixedAlpha DutputAlpha PlotDef and
76. This example has two expressions each on a separate line The variable a is assigned the constant value 3 The variable b is then computed by adding one to the value of a The result of the whole computation is the result of the last expression here it is b which has the constant value 4 a 3 b a dl 158 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 8 MISSION DATABASE 4 8 Mission Database The settings for the MDB connection are made in Preferences use the Project root folder setting to define Where MDB displays are stored If displays are kept locally in different locations the USS project folder root has to be set when changing local store point i e USS only maintains one project folder root Symbol Libraries can be handled via the CGS MDB see MDB Version Control of Symbol Libraries USS Editor can work closely or loosely with the CGS MDB e closely launched via the IMDB displays are automatically synchronized dou ble click on USS_DISPLAY end item will launch the USS Editor with display see CGS Usermanual for more information when USS Editor is launched from IMDB Autoload mode some parameters are preset locked to that IMDB setup MDB Settings in general as well as CCU CDU configuration SCOE file is locked to a snapshoot of the MDB used by the IMDB setup e loosely USS Editor is launched locally and edits files locally which can be saved etc via MDB interface 4 8 1 Opening Displays from the MDB The USS Editor
77. X Lh Copy CIA C Rename F2 IE Move to Trash Delete x Delete Shift Delete Y Add to Bookmarks Open With amp Ark Preview in Archiver Copy to public folder Extract here Edit File Type Properties Konquerer popup menu for USS compressed archive 6 Konquerer open default compression decompression tool normally Ark Click OK to decompress in the home folder 527 Extract Ark Extract to file home uss Files to be extracted C Current All L C Pattern Preferences Ark compression tool 7 The decompression of the USS archive generates a USS installation folder 15 3 2 INSTALLATION OF USS PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL file home uss Konqueror Location Edit Wiew Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help 2490 L 2 BG AARS 3 8 bin Desktop Documents Downloads uss 2 5 0 release info notes doc RII uss 25 0 Directory Selected USS installation folder 8 Click to open USS installation folder file home uss uss 2 6 0 Konqueror Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help IO 11 Items 4 Files 167 3 KB Total 7 Directories Konquerer showing the contents of USS installation folder 9 Click the bin folder inside the USS folder file home uss uss 2 6 0 bin Konqueror Location Edit Wiew Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help uss coltre K uss coltre sh uss uss convert uss convert M uss consent consi
78. added to a command stack within MCS Tools The command target specifies to which command stack the command shall be added either the manual stack or the auto stack In the manual stack the command is queued and the user interactively has to enable and then send the command In the auto stack the command is queued and sent automatically as far as the auto mode is activated Configure command stack The target command stack has to be enabled as remote command re ceiver in MCS Tools This is specified in the preferences window of MCS Tools In the menu item Options gt Preferences gt Remote Command Execution gt Remote command receiver the appropri ate command stack can be selected manual stack or auto stack Direct TC commanding When pushing a command button associated to a telecommand in the USS executor the command string is sent to CIS for command preparation The CIS returns the prepared command as CCSDS packet After successful preparation the command is released via CIS The command is transmitted to the onboard system After execution onboard the response packet is sent back to ground The command results are displayed in the command status window of the USS executor The command results can also be displayed in the command history window of MCS Tools TC commanding via command stack When pushing a command button associated to a telecom mand in the USS executor the command is added to the command stack of MCS Tools The com mand
79. appearance properties Linear Tick Meter properties 9 Appearance Border Color Border Used L Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Bar v Meter Tick Label Style Left or Top v Shape Fill Color 7 0 6 0 B 0 000000 Shape Fill Style None v Tick Color MM FO G 0 B 0 000000 Tick Indicator Color 1R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF Tick Indicator Thickness D 9 Behaviour Field Style Disabled v Meter Color Show Status ra Meter Major Tick Frequency Meter Tick Base Meter Tick Unit Orientation o Dimensions 9 Font Field amp Label Font Field amp Label Font Color Tick Label Font Tick Label Font Color 9 General Data Source o Information 9 Limits Domain Meter Maximum Meter Minimum Linear Tick Meter Properties in Property Editor Z 50 Horizontal Ly Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular D MM AFO 6 0 B 0 000000 Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular 0 MeterDS1 50 50 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES The Linear Tick Meter has several unique properties e Border Color Colour of border e Border Used If checked border is drawn e Label Text Text of label shown e Meter Tick Indicator Type of indicator drawn e Meter Tick Label Style Placement of Label with respect to indicator e Shape Fill Color Defines the fill colour of the meter i e the colour of the meter e Shape Fill Style Defines the fill style background i e solid fi
80. arg N 1 and argN recura resulte GreaterThanConstComp Determine if value of input PUI is greater than the supplied constant value Pseudo code boolean GreaterThanConstComp float PUI const float CONSTANT CEU CONO Au onis EU e else Tebura E MultiCompareComp Does multiple comparisons If all comparisons are true return true Other wise return false Every PUI should be associated with a CONST Pseudo code DOSIS antes ASE moe Conon eL nm AO OS O Ni Sule EU cn CONS ine 702 Eqs RN e ede ce Ep el EIR E S IAE OMS Sons R elle if PUI1 CONST1 AND PUI2 CONST2 AND AND PUIn CONSIn return i else return 0 OrComp Takes the input arguments and calculates their sum MORE SM AAN a result argo or argl or SET Olay soso Or arg N 2 Or arg N 1 ona arcom Tb und ocu 4 7 4 5 Examples In this chapter we introduce some typical USS expression examples 157 4 7 DATA SOURCES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Example 4 1 Using the engineering value in expressions The following examples show how engineering values are accessed in an expression In this example a data source is referenced via its Opsname R WCRCULI Celine Pengo DMC S210 E A L a TEE cla The same expression using the path name instead of the Opsname Note that the path name must be surrounded with quotes SE close OMC CN ECEE 20 MN Wentem aisla ole Example 4 2 Group of bytes This example shows how to retrieve the flap execution
81. arguments in their computation Input ComboBox properties The Input ComboBox has the same properties as the input field as well as some extra and can refer to a command in same display acting as input to that command e Inputs The selectable inputs available in the ComboBox possible actions are Add Delete and Edit of seleted input 4 6 14 File Chooser File Chooser is an extension of Input Field It can be used to set a file name as command parameter to the Input Field To select a file open a file browser by clicking the small button at the right side of the Input Field and browse to the file that name should be set as parameter File Chooser properties e Absolute Path Set this flag to determine that the absolute path and file name instead of file name only will be set as parameter e File Filter Define file filter s that will be added to the file browser A file filter is a pair of extension e g xml or xml and description to the file format e g XML Files xml The description will be added to the Files of Type combo box in the file browser e Start Directory Start Directory String is used to set a path to directory as starting point for the file browser The path may contain one or more environment variables Note The string is a platform dependent path 4 6 15 Image The use of the image element is deprecated because external images based on the image element are stored on the file system and can not be exp
82. as well as the Kate KDE editor 1 Opening a file browser to the gt HOME_DIRECTORY lt uss lt USS_VERSION gt EX uss 2 6 0 di rectory Here open the file uss config you might need to change file filtering to All Files 7 file home uss uss 2 6 0 Konqueror KET HE2 Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help E C m 732 oo 4 amp 5 GO 353g 98 E gt Location S file home uss uss 2 6 0 QUB Sy Y default preview data report editor MCS220 system loq svstem loq 1 layout dat CGS630 e user loq uss confiq uss layout G 10 Items 7 Files 15 8 MB Total 3 Directories Fy Folder contains many files i e log file the folder also contains the uss config file which contains the settings for USS 91 3 16 CHANGE USS PROPERTIES FILE CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 2 Opening the Kate editor and browser to the gt HOME_DIRECTORY lt uss lt USS_VERSION gt di rectory Here open the file uss config uss config Kate IES File Edit Document View Bookmarks Tools Settings Help 206493 5 FEB Oe 08 lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 lt DOCTYPE properties SYSTEM properties dtd gt lt properties gt lt root gt lt map gt lt node name net gt map gt lt node name eads lt map lt node name space gt lt map gt lt node name uss map gt lt node name config gt map gt lt node name Config gt lt
83. bottom pick control point green square in bottom right of line graph This will resize the graph 4 Use the mouse and left click and hold in the middle of the graph and move the graph to the middle of the display LineGraph Range Axis o un u 0 4 Domain Axis La u D The Line Graph is moved and resized 5 Open the Property Editor to see the graph properties 9 Property Editor x m lt LineGraph gt LineGraph1 9 Dimensions Height 360 Width 430 v 9 General Configure Graph Click to edit 9 Information Comment Name LineGraph1 Tooltip 6 Click on button in property Configure Graph 54 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Data Set User Defined Curve Style Curve Style Colour R 0 G 0 B 255 0000FF Width UseAxs Rangeais Axis Properties Axis Label Range Axis mode Darase T Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range Axis Range Upper Lower OK Cancel The Graph Dialog opens for the Line Graph 7 Click on domain tab General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Axis Label Domain Axis Data Set Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range Axis Range Upper Lower OK Cancel The Graph Dialog shows the domain tab for the Line
84. click on label to start in line editing of label gt USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help s pensum le ww olo E N xl C DI A ale a a Y A A a e E A E display 1 amp x R ax diplyt2 a x Display 1 B B B isplay 2m D B a oO B DM Ranco _Arch_Retrieval R B VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE Downlink File l 5 Click on Display 1 background to select it 6 Save display by selecting from menu File Save Type in file name Display1 uss 68 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 12 NAVIGATION DISPLAY saven ganre LC lib D Unnamed0 uss File Name Displayl uss Files of Type USS displays uss M Save Cancel Save dialog is shown 7 Click OK to save dialog to save display 8 Use the mouse and left click on the second display background to select it I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help e m oa au e s m o o TE Je e ajajajajajo
85. configuration 3 Reports 3 Import Home Display 3 Freeze Mode Location Browse 3 Quick Graph Use selected Display Cancel 5 8 1 1 1 Setting Project Folder e Click Browse button e In the popup dialog select folder you like to use e Click Choose Directory 194 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 8 CONFIGURING THE EXECUTOR Check or uncheck Update when CIS changes configuration depending on whether the folder shall be updated when the configuration has been changed on CIS 5 8 1 1 2 Setting Home Display To use currently selected display as home display e Click either Use selected Display to set currently selected display as home display To browse for a display to set as home display e Click Browse button e In the popup dialog select display you like to set as home display e Click Choose USS Home Display 5 8 1 2 Commanding Preferences for commanding include enabling of commands enabling of direct commanding choosing the command target and confirmation of commands Preferences nx D Project Commanding 3 commanding Enable Commanding 3 Tab Appearance 5 Tooltips v 3 Snapshots D Reports Command Target 3 Import _ Confirm tele commands before sending 3 Freeze Mode 3 Quick Graph Cancel _ 5 8 1 2 1 Enabling Commanding e Check Enable Commanding if you want to use commanding 5 8 1 2 2 E
86. deo Z9 Zoe ZO 139 LES p 20 159 246 2 0 ie 134 DS ZA 1S0 w29 AoD ASIS Zu is V AGIS VOD Toa Mes AO TS pio ES ESO OS OS kes Tun 149 KON 1 979 180 1 55 IAS LOS 180 Log EOS IES 148 ars 87 A 144 124 84 zy ke 15002 69 Cor oS 62 50 34 WE MOA 90 eal AS Ire MAIS 78 1 5 ee allie 76 224 Zu 180 1227 OOO oS e U S7 34 e 20 do 14 17 8 ES 180 ESS aquamarine4 DarkSeaGreen1 DarkSeaGreen2 DarkSeaGreen3 DarkSeaGreen4 SeaGreen1 SeaGreen2 SeaGreen3 SeaGreen4 PaleGreen1 PaleGreen2 PaleGreen3 PaleGreen4 SpringGreen1 SpringGreen2 SpringGreen3 SpringGreen4 greenl green2 green3 green4 chartreusel chartreuse2 chartreuse3 chartreuse4 OliveDrabl OliveDrab2 OliveDrab3 OliveDrab4 DarkOliveGreen1 DarkOliveGreen2 DarkOliveGreen3 DarkOliveGreen4 khakil khaki2 khaki3 khaki4 LightGoldenrodl LightGoldenrod2 LightGoldenrod3 LightGoldenrod4 LightYellowl LightYellow2 LightYellow3 LightYellow4 yellowl yellow2 yellow3 vellow4 geen Genel golds gold4 goldenrodl goldenrod2 goldenrod3 goldenrod4 DarkGoldenrodl DarkGoldenrod2 DarkGoldenrod3 DarkGoldenrod4 RosyBrown1 RosyBrown2 RosyBrown3 246 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 4 RGB COLORS dex MOS woes RosyBrown4 255 106 106 IndianRed1 238 99 SES IndianRed2 205 85 ES IndianRed3 139 5e 56 IndianRed4 255 150 71 siennal 2530 L21 66 s
87. dragged onto a display a label and data field is created The label is associated with the field This association binding can be changed with the Behaviour Label For property of the label When the label is associated with a field the properties in the screen shot below can be used to change the text that the label shows and clipping of the text 9 Behaviour Auto Text CONTEXT Clip Indicator Clip Lenath 20 Clipping ILEFT v Context Opsname v Label For Field1 CTC Failure Stat DMC FAILURE STS v The Auto Text property has three possible settings e OFF The label text is not taken from the TM 131 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR e CONTEXT The label text is taken from the TM as specified with the Context property e BASENAME The label text is taken from the TM as specified with the Context property This setting is different from CONTEXT only if the Context property is set to Pathname For the CONTEXT and BASENAME settings note that the label text from the TM is copied into the Label Text property at editing time and not updated dynamically at run time Further if the SCOE file is changed the label can be inconsistent with the SCOE TM value run a consistency check The Context property determines which part of the TM is copied in to the Label Text The Context drop down list contains the contexts defined in the Editor Preferences Clipping determines which part of the
88. element Criteria Criteria x Image element Rotate xsd decimal element AurcosScale ross oooO lean P element KeepAspectRatio xsd boolean Element InputField element Co bumn o ie Xs Clu en Eo OO Sie element TextStyle TextStyle element DR Element Label element Text te l Textstyle TextStyle AutoSize element element xsd boolean RO bere O he eS Ote Omir DDR et Cabello JRlememeOrRer gt AutoText Modest LON MSN SEM COmeext lt gt abc jane Length xsd integer Cia d Ome i wis Galan ex En Ea TOE ieee d RR at element element element element BASENAME element element element VEG LAs ES e element by Element Limit values must be parseable as Java Number objects ARES element LowCaucionLimit ads Het c class 1 text Cex element HighCautionLimit attribute class text element LowWarningLimit attribute class text text element HighWarningLimit attribute class text LOvOreScaleWarnanglinviie tat ed utes class uer 7 HighOrns cate euo p Puer inne e Deo chats 55e IS ote o E by DOLEAC ebur Dd mese 1 SEE ELIES Class 1 Eco Dot e es reete T muse peas ducere basso SbEOxU y ExpectedValue text element element element element element LinearTickMeter TickMeter LineGraph SimpleTeleCommandParameter SimpleTeleCommandParameter CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE Secure eec reference TEET l2 exe jar TEE JE T
89. element DefaultRangeAxis CategoryAxisProperties Graph Button element IsToggle xsd boolean element IsPressed sxsd Dos lean element IsEnabled xsd boolean element CornerEnabled xsd boolean L element Shape RECTANGLE OVAL FLAT element PressCommand _CommandOrRef element ReleaseCommand CommandOrRef element PressedCompound Compound element ReleasedCompound Compound element Rotation _RotationEnum element FillStyle FillStyle element CornerFillStyle FillStyle Element CAGShape element Shapes SEE D EE e class leo iS IE T AIC element CAGShape CAGShape element Ellipse Ellipse element Polygon Polyaqon y element Rectangle Rectangle by elenen su sso UNO SUE TRAC TNT RS Bea ESO TUS AENOR srt Shape 229 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE CategoryAxisProperties element AxisRange AxisRange element AutoRange xsd boolean element AutoRangeUpper xsd double element AutoRangeLower xsd double element StickyZero xsd boolean AxisProperties CheckValve Valve CloseDisplayCommand Command Color element red xsd nonNegativeInteger element green xsd nonNegativelnteger element blue xsd nonNegativelnteger element alpha xsd nonNegativelnteger ComboBox element VisibleRowCount xsd integer Dorn URTEIL de VU element TextStyle TextStyle element SimpleTeleComma
90. environment 1 Unpack the distribution archive into a directory on the target host or central file server If the target directory is Sbasedir then the distribution unpacks into a directory basedir uss x y z where x y z are version numbers Change the working directory to basedir uss x y z IMPORTANT The installation path may not contain white space characters 2 Read the README file for general and latest information 3 Read the INSTALL file for detailed installation instructions 4 Do one of the following e Change the SPATH environment variable settings to include basedir uss x y z bin into the search path for executables e Alternatively create symbolic links to the programs in the bin directory to a directory that is already on the search path e g usr local bin 1 2 CONFIGURING SYSTEM SETTINGS CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND GETTING STARTED 5 Check ownership of files All files under Sbasedir uss x y z shall be owned by root By default USS does not create or modify files under Sbasedir Therefore it is possible to install and use USS on a read only mounted file system 1 13 Installing the product on Windows To install USS on Windows 1 Unpack the distribution archive into a directory on the target host select the file uss x y z windows i586 zip in the windows explorer In the context menu right click choose Ex tract All and extract the file to a directory of your choice say D Programs Chan
91. home uss uss project Displayl uss 9 TeleCommand1 Cancel Arch Retrieval o ReleasedCompound2 E Label3_VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE im InputFieldi_VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE 2 TeleCommand2_Downlink_File Label 9 5 home uss uss project 3 lib E Displayl uss ES Display2 uss ES MyDisplay uss In the top of the Synoptic Hierarchy shown un docked the two display with their respective label are shown In the bottom the project folder is shown containing the two saved displays 12 Right click on Display1 uss in the bottom part of the Synoptic Hierarchy and select from pop up menu Add Navigation to Display 70 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 12 NAVIGATION DISPLAY I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help ES Waa 5 rom sanno S w eJe ole i s 8 sie a o o ED rre 3 a e e sle u a S BALSA 2 Ww viala JE B R home uss uss project Displayluss x Ti home uss uss project Display2uss x Display 1 Display 2 Displayl Cancel Arch Retri eval VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE _ Downlink File A navigation button is added to currently selected display Display2 uss The navigation button will navigate upon activation to Display1 uss when Display2 uss is executed 13 Save both displays again and close the Editor 14 Open the
92. is then copied and pasted into a command button of a display opened in the USS editor e Edit HLCL A ground command HLCL can only directly be edited in the USS editor because the MCS command editor supports only telecommands 201 6 1 MCS CHAPTER 6 APPLICATION SCENARIOS Edit structured command All commands can be edited as structured commands using the struc tured command editor in USS A structured command is not edited as a command string but as nested structure of commands and their single parameters For each parameter dedicated prop erties can be defined like value ranges types and default values For structured command input fields can be associated to certain parameters of the command An input field in the synoptic dis play which is related to a command parameter enables the user to specify the command parameter value at runtime Configure command target Before execution of a telecommand in a flight synoptic display from eround the user has to configure the command execution target This can be configured in the preferences window of the USS executor refer Switching targets for commands In the section Commanding the following options can be selected Commanding can be enabled disabled i e it has to be enabled if the user wants to issue a command Direct commanding can be enabled which means that the command is sent directly to the CGS CIS Direct commanding can be disabled which means that the command is
93. m 9 Information Shown Data Source in property editor is now changed 14 Now check consistency again Tools Check Consistency Display Consistent Dialog shows that display is now consistent 15 Click button OK to close confirmation dialog 98 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS 16 Select focus the Consistency Results View again gt Property Editor System Configuration Browser Consistency Results 9 Property Editor T System Configuration Browser E Consistency Results x Result Reference Description Info 2006 09 05 10 13 19 Starting consistency check on Untitled File Unnamecd Info Detailed Version VAPM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS Alv v7 1 0 14 Dec 2005 17 33 59 Info SCOE files used file home uss Desktop USS RC2 Acceptance uss 2 6 0 share scoe 316989981 O0 o Info OpNom Spell Check Performed OpNom incl ESA Label Labell Label text label for check contains 2 errors Incorrect Words are label at position O alternatives lab el TankMeter TankMeterl Opsname SID Pathname and Type checked without errors for datasource with Opsname BLB_LSS_S13_ Info Validation of 1 data sources passed 0 datasources are Computations Info 2006 09 05 10 13 19 Passed Consistency check had no errors 17 To generate a HTML report select from menu File Generate HTML report Unnamedo Mozilla Buil
94. press button Close gest MDB communication Dialog closes 8 Save display by selecting from menu File Save swen Suss prjet aa c CDU 316990119 J lib D Display1 uss 5 Display2 uss File Name Unnamedo uss Files of Type USS displays C uss v Save Cancel The save dialog appears opened in the uss project folder 9 Choose save path uss project directory lt CU_DIRECTORY gt APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DAT And file name MDBTEST uss 101 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Save In MANUAL TESTS v 5 a E E File Name MDBTEST uss Files of Type uss displays uss x Save Cancel 10 Click button Save to save file home uss uss project CDU 316990119 APM COMMON TEST SUPP GRD DATA USS EDITOR Display is saved in correct path MDB synchronization 11 To add display to MDB choose from menu File MDB ADD to MDB 4 Gi Files submitted to MDB Ok Confirmation is shown when display is submitted 12 To verify the MDB save of the new display choose from menu File MDB MDB Browser And browse to the MDB path APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS LC APM GJ COMMON_TEST_SUPP Gd GRD DATA LG uss EJ EDITOR gt C AUTOMATIC TESTS o J DISPLAYS E MANUAL TESTS 3 EXAMPLE LY EXAMPLE2 LY EXAMPLE3 D MOBTEST 3 TEST 3 TEST2 3 TEST3 3 USS D
95. project root folder and the display file is changed to read writable for edit 4 8 2 Saving Displays in the MDB The Editor can save USS displays in the MDB Note Only displays locked for edit can be saved in the MDB 4 8 3 Adding a New Display to the MDB When adding a new display to the MDB first ensure that the MDB configuration is correct refer to Preferences and take care of the CU Version setting which is important when adding displays to the MDB 159 4 9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION BROWSER CHAPTER 4 EDITOR The editor will on submitting check for the following MDB naming constraints Display names can be a maximum of 16 characters in MDB notation file names must be in uppercase and file names cannot contain a minus Do the following steps to add a new display to the MDB 1 Create the new display 2 Save the display to a location in the project folder equivalent to the MDB path Use only capi tal letters for the display name and no more than 16 characters otherwise the MDB will not ac cept it E g the file system path ProjectFolder CDU_316990119 APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITORA MANUAL_TESTS is equivalent to MDB path for CDU with Id 316990119 APM COMMON TEST SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL TESTS ProjectFolder is configured in Preferences 3 Right click on the display in Synoptic Hierarchy or on the display itself to get a popup menu 4 In the popup menu choose MDB Add to MDB and the Edito
96. saved as a set of displays in USS format This is the way to go if the conversion shall be integrated in another larger batch process without requiring user interaction Details are described in the following sections The conversion process for each format is described in more detail in the following sections How ever here are some general guidelines that apply to all conversions e If converting extracted displays from another system e g GWDU into USS format use new empty temporary directories for conversion output Do not do any manual conversions under the uss project directory e If adding new USS displays from an external source e g GWDU conversion output to MDB first copy all files to the uss project directory Be careful to use the right directory names and file names both must map to valid MDB path and end item names 7 1 PCS PREP Displays This section describes how NASA PCS PREP displays are imported and converted to USS format PCS displays are XML files with the extension xml PCS displays can be directly loaded in the editor and executor USS needs two more files containing additional information about the displays These files are 205 7 2 PWS FWDU DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS called command_instances csv and pui mapping csv The first one contains information about command PUIS in the display and is used to determine the criticality of a command The PUI mapping file is used to retriev
97. stack sends the command string to CIS for command preparation The CIS returns the prepared command as CCSDS packet and the command stack queues the command In the man ual stack the user has to enable the command and sent it to be released via CIS In the auto stack running in auto mode this is performed automatically The command is transmitted to the on board system After execution onboard the response packet is sent back to ground The command results are displayed in the command history window of MCS Tools HLCL commanding When pushing a command button associated to a ground command HLCL in the USS executor the command string is sent to CIS for execution via HLCL interpreter The HLCL interpreter results are displayed in the command status window of the USS executor Current commanding limitations in USS Command pre post conditions defined in the MDB are evaluated from CGS and the result is dis played in the command response window Furthermore the result of the post conditions is shown in the MCS Tools command history window as TMV status If the command is sent via command stack the pre conditions are evaluated prior to command release i e a command is not sent if the pre condition is not fulfilled Dedicated pre post conditions for command instances cannot be defined in a synoptic display This could be a future enhancement if required 202 CHAPTER 6 APPLICATION SCENARIOS 6 2 LAPAP MKII e Hazardous commands sent in direct
98. state value of type unsigned8 from a flap status SW variable The value starts at bit position 8 in an otherwise untyped byte buffer iure cer Uns rone de TU Sec RUC Im Sot IE MARES aras o E O Rumi Example 4 3 Using expressions to set colors This example shows how to set the background color of a rectangle depending on a parameter value The result type of the expression is a string The string value must evaluate to a valid color specifier Valid colors can be specified as RGB values in hexadecimal format with a hash sign as prefix or as color names if ds_SIM RT_NORM then 86B78A else B88687 Here is the same example with explicit color names See Section 9 4 for the full list of color names 1f ds_SIM RT_NORM then azure else plum Example 4 4 Mapping integers to strings This is a NASA PCS Example which converts an integer parameter referenced by PUI to a string value Note how if expressions can be nested TIE EMDCOTSW1LOG0J 0 THEN On ELSE LF EMDCOTSWIO00Jg 1 THEN Off ELSE ERR H Example 4 5 Constant expression This example shows how a constant value can be defined as a data source If this computation is con nected to a data field the field will always show the value 42 42 Example 4 6 Multi line expression One expression is normally written in a single line Multiple expressions can be used to specify more complex computations Also variables can be used to store intermediate results
99. symbol overflow waiting for data z o l a L x a 71 symbol overflow waiting for data 5 C symbol overflow waiting for data symbol overflow Domain Axis U a Strip graph propeties changed notice background of stripgraph changed but sub graph still have their own background preserved 9 Click and select Line Graph 2 in property editor Select Sub Graph sub Graph Weight 9 Information Comment Name The sub graph order selection etc can be changed via the property Select Sub Graph 10 Open the sub graph edit dialog by clicking button in property Select Sub Graph 61 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY General Gridline Range Axis Data Set External Range Data Source la User Defined Curve Style v Curve Style Colour MN R 0 G 0 B 0 000000 L Width 1 0 Use Axis Range axis v Axis Properties Axis Label Range Axis Colour SS R 160 G 32 B 240 A020F0 m Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range v Axis Range Upper Lower CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL The sub graph specific properties shown range axis properties 11 Add default datasource by clicking the button in the property Data Set Twice click button New in datasource dialog 12 Change the datasources in the datasource dialog to type Integer 13 Add another datasource 14 Click datasource dialog button OK 15 The newest aded
100. the KXML editor and browser to the HOME DIRECTORY uss USS VERSION di rectory Here open the file uss config Qualified name P nt B ZS Proc Instruction version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 8 properties a amp root map a node map a node map a node map 8 node The KXML Editor shows the content of the XML formatted uss config file for the USS system The XML tree hierarchy is shown on the left and the content of the selected node on the right where the content can be edited 5 Browse in the XML tree hierarchy to the node properties root node node node node node n ode map entry 1 and select it to show the content Namespace Name Value 1 key uss view editor x 2 value 0 0 Changing the values here will change view settings X value of the editor which can be edited through the Editor Preferences also 6 Try changing the value to 25 0 to set the Editors default view setting for the X value Namespace Name Value key uss view editor x P value The value is changed and will be used in future invocations of the editor The value is changed and will be used in future invocations of the editor If editor is open it has to be restarted to load the new value 92 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 17 SELECT SCOE FILES TIP Generally most properties should be controlled via the editor or executor uss config TIP A modified properties file can be
101. toStart Arch Retrieval START TIME 10 Click Close to commit editing The Command argument is now chnaged Select command in System Configuration Browser Start Arch Retrival again drag it to display and select a structued command instead Select the newly added button and click the button in the property Command in the property editor 3 Start Arch Retrieva Kind IHLCL v I 3 START TIME Name Start Arch Retrieval Command Preview Start Arch Retrieval START TIME Structured Command Editing Select the parameter START TIME and change the value from nothing to 10 In the command preview field below the result can be seen same as with string command editing 27 Click Close to commit editing The Command argument is now changed 66 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 12 NAVIGATION DISPLAY In the Property Editor the property Command contains a button which gives access to the command editing dialog In the Property Editor the property Command contains a button X which gives deletes the command after this will give the possibility to change command type USS preferred default command type is structured command the structured command gives a less error prone method for contruction telecommands Structured commands can be referenced combined with input fields and comboboxes to make advanced commanding 3 12 Navigation Display The USS Editor can be
102. used for sorting the properties toggling between category and flat list view and for toggling the bottom description pane on and off Categories can be folded and unfolded by clicking the handle icon next to each category title The Property Editor has different in line fields for setting the properties e Edit field e Drop down box e Check box e Button popping up a custom dialog e Insert Add or Remove button changing the fields of the Property Editor Read only properties such as Element type shown their property name in grey e Database icon for dynamic properties Properties for the Command button element in the Command category are entered as a text string Note that the Editor does not perform any check on the correctness of the command string entered 4 4 3 Selecting Elements An element on a display is selected by clicking it with the left mouse button Use the Synoptic Hierarchy to e To select an element that is covered by another element 125 4 4 WORKING WITH ELEMENTS CHAPTER 4 EDITOR e To select the labels on a button Multiple elements are selected by dragging a selection rectangle around them see figure below or by holding down the Shift key while clicking with the left mouse button 26 ES Two elements and a selection rectangle Two selected elements Primary and secondary The primary selected element has green selection rectangles whereas the secondary selected elements have cyan selection rectangl
103. used to create displays that can be navigated by navigation buttons in the USS display format The navigation buttons are complex hyperlinks between displays using their relative path navigation cannot happen on the display itself Pictures in this lesson show the result from pre vious lesson as one of the displays used 3 12 1 Lesson in creating Navigation displays 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views and make a new display so that the editor contains two new displays Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Arrange the displays by dragging them left click hold on display tab so that both are visible at the same time 67 3 12 NAVIGATION DISPLAY LI B USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help 8 6 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL a i B E OO AF Idisplay 1 a x a display 2 a x B B SU cancel _Arch_Retrieval n H H n D GAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE D o o a Downlink_File h Oo 3 Make a label in each display Select display by left clicking on display background Make a label from menu Element Add Label 4 Change label text in first display to Display 1 and Display 2 for label text in second display Double left
104. used to ease distribution of the USS tools 3 17 Select SCOE Files The USS package uses a SCOE file to ease creation of end items 3 17 1 Lesson in changing the SCOE file 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Close the open default new display to allow changing of the SCOE file I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 TES File Edit View Tools Element Window Help No display open 3 Open the editor preferences by selecting Edit Preferences 93 3 17 SELECT SCOE FILES 5 Project 3 Display D Consistency Data Source 3 Import D Database 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL USS Editor preferences dialog is opened 4 Left click with the mouse on the right to the category MDB SCOE 5 Display SID R Consistency o File path homejuss Perforce us Browse 3 Data Source 3 Import CU internal version 316989981 Database Default Settings for SCOE File 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU 3 wbs scor The preferences for the SCOE File is shown some properties are only informational can not be changed and are read from file chosen 5 Click button Browse to open a dialog for changing the SCOE File Choose file oaks alge EURECA Mission DUMMY MISSION 8 CCU Q TEST DISTR V4 0 0 16 D o CCU 268436077
105. will not show use DOI data quality ind colouring of the data field Overflow behaviour Defines how the field should behave when data value are out of range OVERWRITE Old USS behavior never truncates values may overwrite adjacent labels may cause flicker default for new fields for new fields EXPAND Expands field size on overflow never shrinks workaround for GWDU import problems where fields have too small bounding box default for GWDU importer SHOW_HASHES Fills field with hashes like HHHZ PCS behavior Excel behavior default for PCS importer e Show Unit if checked the data field show unit of attached data source 132 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES 4 6 3 1 Field Data Formatting Data fields have the property Field data formatting which specifies the formatting of the data value in the field The format is specified using the printf style which will be well known to C programmers The format specifier has the following syntax gt legs miden eme cursa eni conversion The optional flags is a set of characters that modify the output format The set of valid flags depends on the conversion The optional width is a non negative decimal integer indicating the minimum number of characters to be written to the output The optional precision is a non negative decimal integer usually used to restrict the number of char acters The specific behaviour depends on the conversion T
106. 07 qul Z5 S ZO IROS 245 2p 197 PSA ZR RS d dE SE EAS ZI SS MES Zales ZNE WEES T5155 ARA 20 ES Eod Z0 p ZH Sy 248 2 221049 MSHS Zee Zee Zoe St Zoe ASIS ZO 159 240 2 Ios JS dE 249 ZEE de IAS AD 2 5 205 so egl TROSS SY 60 As EO EC Ziel 240 ZS 2 MES ZA 2 9 ZR 204l ES 25 Bae WIN 1551 29 204 is 257210 JUI ies SS OF SS ES EFS AAL ES Gal de 94 2985 TON GS dW ZU 2095 E 17210 240 224 1E SES Sl 240 ae oS SL 245 LAS 1L Sx SA om END Jesu E 6 ZEORD 2905 205 qs Zi 239 gis SS zm Zoe 205 BlueViolet purple medium purple MediumPurple S e Lle snowl snow2 snow3 snow4 seashelll seashell2 seashell3 seashell4 AntiqueWhitel AntiqueWhite2 AntiqueWhite3 AntiqueWhite4 bisquel bisque2 bisque3 bisque4 PeachPuffl PeachPuff2 PeachPuff3 PeachPuff4 NavajoWhitel NavajoWhite2 NavajoWhite3 NavajoWhite4 henonCha from LemonChiffon2 LemonChiffon3 LemonChiffon4 cornsilki cornsilk2 cornsilk cornsilk4 yl WN OEN OEN ivory4 honeydew1 honeydew2 honeydew3 honeydew4 LavenderBlush1 LavenderBlush2 LavenderBlush3 LavenderBlush4 MistyRosel MistyRose2 MistyRose3 MistyRose4 azurel azure2 azure3 azure4 SlateBluel SlateBlue2 SlateBlue3 SlateBlue4 RoyalBluel RoyalBlue2 RoyalBlue3 244 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE Ins INS Ee 2 0 Ss 2 95 ASIS 202 SS O 295 Z9 SIS BO LO 724915
107. 194 194 194 gray 6 194 194 194 grey76 9 L ERIIRO NS gray77 ESAS SS SS grey77 S nello ls gray 8 EO CIC SLs grey78 AAO ARS UMEN CHA AQ AO a Gh grey 9 204 204 204 gray80 204 204 204 grey80 ZOU Od O gray81 Os 20g O grey81 ad GUE MAO ne ee Dus gg que A 2095 Quo grey82 ZAR ZONE HIM MIR CIS NS DEO SUPR MAP RT grey83 214 214 214 gray84 214 214 214 grey84 cue 217 Bay ss 27 21y 217 grey85 AORO OAS gray86 LM a MN A lo grey86 UL a URP JE D OA ESE grey87 224 224 224 gray88 224 224 224 grey88 LL 2al 22l gray89 BA 221 221 grey89 V2 O ERES gray90 DECRE grey90 E A ee equa DO DATUM D grey91 E D NOE Gray 92 23960952 2297495 grey92 ZUR DN Gp IOS E NEST grey93 240 240 240 gray94 240 240 240 grey94 242 242 242 gray95 242 242 242 grey95 245 245 245 gray96 245 245 245 grey96 247 247 247 gray97 251 9 4 RGB COLORS CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 247 247 247 ASIA ZO LS ASS A LO LL DELS LL DILO O DIO SEA D Se D ESAS alice TRO es GG AS E KE MS ALG Ion IE HE U SIT U BEES U dur U EAS EEES Das SES RR SUE SL SS eae MAA AOS ele grey97 gray98 grey98 gray99 grey99 gray100 grey100 dark grey DarkGrey dark gray DarkGray dark blue DarkBlue dark cyan DarkCyan dark magenta DarkMagenta dark red DarkRed light green LightGreen 252 Appendix A Example Configuration in MCS Environment This appendix describes an example setting for the MCS Facility The current setting may change with out notice A 1 Edi
108. 20 H2 e Command must be confirmed Commands that have to be confirmed are guarded commands and can be recognized by buttons which have diagonal stripes E coL Atmosphere File Navigate Options Window Help Air Press 1 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable sse VTC2 hardwire Air Press 2 mmHg Air Press 3 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable IR VTC 1 hardwire AirPress 4 mmHg ppO2 Sensor 1 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable AGD vTC1hardwire ppO2 Sensor 2 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable AAMKE vTC2 hardwire ppCO2 Sensor 1 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable JBK TC 1 hardwire ppCO2 Sensor 2 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable AMD vTC2 hardwire Airflow Sensor 1 Massflov m3 hrMonitoring Statu Enable Anhibir VTC 1 hardwire Airflow Sensor 2 Massflov m3 hrMonitoring Statu Enable dobibit VTC2 hardwire PCA Cabin Pressure mmHg Last Sample Time MCA Sample Loc MCA Pantial Pressures 02 co2 N2 H20 H2 Executor shows confirmation dialog and sends command to target system if user confirms Command Verification Please confirm transmission of hazardous guarded command EMDIO2E54606K0 Cancel 3 The command processing state issued accepted rejected executed aborted success failure is shown in the command response window 5 4 6 2 2 2 Step Commanding To issue command via 2 Step Commanding 184 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION 1 Click command button an example displ
109. 3 5 1 Prerequisites e There must be at least one display open 174 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING 5 3 5 2 Resizing Display Window USS allows to resize a synoptic display The contents of the display such as fonts and graphics are rescaled accordingly To resize display window e Click and drag window border 5 3 6 Resetting Display Window to Default Size 5 3 6 1 Prerequisites e There must be at least one display open 5 3 6 2 Resetting Display Window to Default Size You can reset a display window to its predefined default size To reset display window to default size e Choose Window gt Reset to default size The display window is reset to its default size 5 3 7 Navigating Display Hierarchy 5 3 7 1 Navigating Display Hierarchy USS provides the capability to navigate between different displays You can navigate through the dis play hierarchy in order to find open or select a display The display hierarchy mirrors the subsystem structure in which displays are organized You can open another synoptic from the synoptic tree visu alization or from navigation buttons Navigation buttons can also have the property to specify that the current window will be replaced on open Navigation in this context means nothing else then exploring any set of displays Where displays are selected via point and click They are automatically loaded To navigate display hierarchy Do one of the following e Navigating
110. A3 ISPR A2 XXX X XXX X Open Closed Closed Closed 3 6 IW IW IW X 9 DA rl ISPR A1 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR WFSV ISPR F1 Open XXX XXX Posnind 7 ISPRF2 ISPRF3 ISPRF4 Open XXX x XXX X Posn Closed Closed Closed 6 Delta Pres sure Sensor Blocks DPSB 1 WPA1 dP1 0 8 kPa n 40 0 w DPSB 3 WPA1 dP2 30 0 1 WPA2 dP2 8 2 kPa MA v v AD AA US DPSB2 WPA2 dP1 9 1 kPa Redun dP 4 3 kPa Preview started 9 May 2006 at 14 17 14 Slider Index 16 4 3 2 1 Animator The previewer Using the Animator Preview Animator a new value is applied to each field every second 4 3 2 2 Slider The slider applies a new value when the slider is moved to a new position Each step on the slider has a position number and the values are always the same for a specific position If e g the slider is moved to position 5 and then to position 6 and back to position 5 again then the values are the same as the first time the slider was at position 5 This consistency holds as long as the display is unchanged Field PRIM CUR 4A Field102 ip Properties ad Line Graph O Copy OPS Name to Clipboard O Copy Display Title to Clipboard 2 Change DataSource VALUE Float of Opsname CTC2 Prim Current A DMC 2 Save default data for DataSource VALUE Float for Opsname CTC2 Prim Current A DMC 2 Load data for DataSource VALUE Float for Opsname CTC2 Prim Current A DMC The pre
111. AYS o C MDBIO o CF EXECUTOR Displayl uss ES Display2 uss Display is reopened 19 Add a polygon from menu Element Add Polygon 20 Add a navigation button from menu Element Add Navigation Button L B Buttoni Test MDB communication The display has additional elements polygon and navigation button 21 Select the polygon by left clicking on it 22 Move the polygon by left click hold and dragging it 23 Left click hold and move one of the control points of the polygon to change its shape B B B Buttoni Test MDB communication Polygon is changed 24 Open the Property Editor by selection menu View Property Editor 25 Select the button by left clicking on it 104 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 26 21 28 29 30 3 OZ E Synoptic Hierarchy 9 Property Editor x l a nx Button OpenDisplayl EE 9 Appearance Button Type Shape Fill Color Shape Fill St4e 9 Commanding Action Open New Window Target 9 Dimensions Depth Height Width x Y 9 Information Comment Name Released Label Text Default Tooltip 9 Misc Button Shape Corner Fill Color Corner Fill Style Corners Enabled Simple Text Button v _JR 212 G 212 B 212 D4D4D4 Solid v Display open _ F 45 80 10 56 OpenDisplayl Buttoni x IN RO G 0 B 0 000000 Solid TS
112. Alias or MDB Path exist in SCOE files and at least if the path in SCOE file still maps the path in file system e A labels that is associated with a field data source and is set to show opsname or pathname will be checked that the label text shows that opsname or pathname e Opnom check Checks that all label texts conform to the OpNom definition or English as set in the Preferences e tis checked that all element names are unique 4 10 3 Batch operations By selecting Run Batch Operation from the Tools menu the editor can be used to make the same operation on multiple displays Batch Operations include e Generation of HTML reports e Consistency Check e Convertion to USS display format Source directory Browse Destination directory Browse Ready HIML reports IS erer Il Convert Help Close Batch Operation Dialog How to use the Batch Operation Dialog 1 Write the source and destination directories in the two input fields or use the browse button 2 Click on one of the batch execution buttons Convert Consistency or HTML reports Please note the following when using the batch operation dialog e Please note that source and destination directories must exist e Errors occuring during the execution must currently be examined in the console or the log e f the output files already exist they will be replaced 4 10 4 Auto S
113. BB CU Consistent Source MDB CU Internal ve source MDB CU Name Source MDB CU Pathname Source MDB CU Scope Source MDB CU Version Source MDB Element Config Source MDB Host Source MDB Instance Editor started with default empty display created property editor showing layout might differ 2 Undock the Property Editor y Property Editor x m displayst1 Be 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 B 238 EEEEEE Background Symbol Library Name v Background Symbol Name A l Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname Source MDB source MDB Cl T ncy Date source MDB CU Interna on ce MDB CU Name e MDB CU Pathnar ce MDB CU Scope ce CU Yersior ource MDB Eleme infig ior ource MDB Host e MDB Instance DB Missio e MDB System Tree Internal Ver e em e version Source MDB Versio Target System MCS Iw Dimensions Height 560 Width 880 9 Information Description Title 9 Log Insert New Change Entry Add New Log Entry Select Change Entry v The Property Editor is undocked and it is showing the open display settings Showed for a display is the following categories a Appearance Basic appearance of display like background colours b Behaviour Only behaviour setting for display c Context Information about displays context and references d Dimensions
114. CUTOR gt Preferences nx 5 Project Import Y Commanding C Open Import Results Dialog 3 Tab Appearance 3 Tooltips 3 Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Made 3 Quick Graph Cancel 5 8 1 7 1 Opening Import Results Dialog e Check Open Import Results Dialog when you want a popup to be displayed that shows the import results which have been encountered while importing a display 5 8 1 8 Freeze Mode Preferences for the freeze mode include its enabling the setting of the major step interval and the setting of the freeze mode duration DDODDDDDDO H OK cancel 5 8 1 8 1 Enabling Freeze Mode e Check Enable Freeze Mode to enable freeze mode Note that this setting will not be applied to displays already open in the executor 5 8 1 8 2 Setting Major Step Interval e Click the spinner next to Major Step Interval to either increase or decrease the interval The setting defines the interval skipped by a fast forward or fast backward freeze mode operation 5 8 1 8 3 Setting Freeze Mode Duration e Click the spinner next to Freeze Mode Duration to either increase or decrease the duration The setting defines the maximum duration a display can be kept in freeze mode without data loss Note that a long Freeze Mode Duration might consume a lot of disk space on the drive where the users home directory is located The default value is 24 hours which can
115. CUTOR to Dilttecenk Data Ouelity Indicator WOU Styles are chosen dependent on which target system the display is designed for Each pair of entries defines the mapping file for one target system USS vien L E SS ba cdir eto pws daqilsty le xnul uss view dqistyle targetl PWS USS Vilew T EL E le rales based cece pwomdqi skye xml uUss view dqistyle targerz PCS sse Vvlew wee sy Metal ecu Cec pes tds se vile xml uss view dqistyle target3 MCS uss view dgqistyle file3 S basedir etc mcs_dgistyle xml Executor uses this file for rendering DQIs 5 7 6 3 See also e Section 1 2 5 8 Configuring the Executor In this section we ll tackle all available preferences which allow the user to configure the executor For each preference we ll fully explain the corresponding dialog 5 8 1 Preferences To configure the preferences choose Options gt Preferences Following preferences are available Project Commanding Tab Appearance Tooltips Snapshots Reports Import Freeze Mode and Quick Graph The corresponding dialogs and the options therein are explained in the next subsections 5 8 1 1 Project Preferences for the Project Folder and Home Display can be set under Project Preferences Pix 5 Project Project 3 Commanding Project Folder 3 Tab Appearance ic ET f Location home cgsadmin uss proje ctl Browse 3 Tooltips Y Snapshots lv Update when CIS changes
116. Col_Cabin_Fan_Assemblies_ACT xml gr Cabin Fan Assembly Cabin Fan Assembly 2 9 Appearance State State Background Color Background Symbol Library 1 1 1 vw Background Symbol Name vw 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname Source PCS Er S 2 vTC2 hardwire off 777 VTC1hardwire E Delta Press Delta Press Fan Speed On Off Status Fan Speed On Off Status Source PCS Release R9 R10 1 5 PCS Cd J 323 368 Source PCS Yersion Target System 9 Dimensions Height Width 2 Information Description PDU 1 120V Outlets Outlet Num 23 SSPC1 Pwr PDU 2 120V Outlets Outlet Num 23 SSPC1 Pwr COL CFA 1 2 Act The imported display is shown shown in the editor The display can now be edited and saved to the USS display format 9 In the Property Editor check the import information i 9 Property Editor e x e ax Col_Cabin_Fan_Assemblies_ACT xml Be 9 Appearance Background Color Background Symbol Library Name L did Background Symbol Name L l 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname Source PCS Source PCS Release R9 Source PCS Yersion R10 1 5 Target System PES Cd J 9 Dimensions Height 323 Width 368 9 Information Description Title COL CFA 1 2 Art Log Inser
117. D DATA v USS gt C EDITOR o C EXECUTOR o 3 MDBIO Item Name Item Type Unified Synoptic Symbol Libraries USSLIB Y Sync Lock For Edit Delete Close MDB Library Sync Dialog NB The Display MDB Browser located under editor menu File MDB MDB Browser cannot be used to handle symbol library MDB actions TIP In USS symbol are collected in libraries which can be kept in the MDB or distributed with USS The symbol libraries are references locally TIP The symbol libraries should be kept up to date locally by keeping them read only and having them synchronized update from MDB when needed by a System administrator 4 6 Elements Advanced Properties This section describes specific properties and handling of the elements The purpose is not to describe all elements types and their properties but rather to answer frequently asked questions Please refer to Working with elements for a complete list of the element types 4 6 1 The Display The Target System is described in section Target system and DOI style The Display Description appears in the Display Report The Display Description can be HTML as shown in the screen shot below 9 Information Description html h1 My displaysih1 tmi Title My display 4 6 2 Label The label text can be edited directly on the display by double click the label The changes are accepted by pressing Enter and reverted by pressing Escape When TM is
118. D Effect LJ 411 159 Valve Properties in Property Editor The Pipe has some unique properties as valves see property Fluid e Diameter Pipe diameter i e size of drawn pipes e Show 3D Effect Draw Pipe with 3D effect The pipe segments can be added deleted or moved e Adding Double click on segment followed by right click on segment or end point selecting Add from popup menu 147 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR e Deleting Double click on segment followed by right click on segment selecting Delete from popup menu e Moving Double click on segment followed a drag of segment end points to move 4 6 12 Input Field Input Fields can be used give an input to the system while the synoptic display is executing Computa tion can refer to input fields and use them as arguments in their computation Input Field properties 9 General Parameter Command None v Parameter Command Parameter v Input Field Properties in Property Editor The Input Field has some unique properties and can refer to a command in same display acting as input to that command e Parameter Command Reference to command in other element in current display e Parameter Command Parameter Parameter in above command 4 6 13 Input ComboBox Like Input Fields the combobox can be used give an input to the system while the synoptic display is executing Computation can refer to comboboxes and use them as
119. DB Prerequisites are e MCS CGS installation with MDB and MDA at a minimum e CCU version containing the FWDU synoptic display s to be extracted and all end items referenced by the display s To extract the displays from CGS MDB proceed as follows Uss Iwdu extract sata Ob TRON cce S lon targ t Dia e OPTION Specify h for getting a complete list of available options Default extract is to process all displays of the specified CCU To extract only one display use the e option Default MDB connection is this one of the Unix user currently logged in No extra options are necessary To connect to another MDB instance or to start the FWDU extract from an MS Windows PC use the according options e ccuVersion CCU internal version number of CCU where displays shall be retrieved from e targetDir Directory where to store the finalized FWDU display files relative to USS installation directory or absolute path 206 CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 3 GWDU DISPLAYS For example if you want to extract data from APM_MASTER fill in ccuVersion and targetDir uss fwdu extract isalbaci a das 5493 225 450 152 s pooracle u genguest oc ccuVersion targetDir 7 2 2 Generating SCOE XML files All in the FWDU synoptic displays referenced data must be available for offline access These data are organized in the so called XML SCOE files To generate XML SCOE files issue the following command SMC SOME mes e colit
120. Data Source Type a External Data Source 2 Computation Details for External Data Source v NewExtemalDataSources Value Output Engineering value v Unit ee fa E The data source dialog is used by the editor to edit all data sources related to display elements 14 In the data source dialog change the Data Source Type to Computation Data Source Type External Data Source Computation Details are changed to computation details 15 Select from drop down box ComboBox with text Select Symbol the expression symbol PI 16 Click in Expression field and type on keyboard plus key 17 Open the System Configuration Browser by clicking the button Tree Select the path location Comms CTC1 Unit_Temp_DMC OPS View Onboard Telemetry 87 3 15 USE ADVANCED ELEMENTS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL OPS View Onboard Telemetry v EI o 7 BLB Ej comms 4 E CTC1 3 Controller Ready Stat DMC D Failure Stat DM C 3 Prim Current A DM C Ey Prim Current B DMC 3 Pwr A Stat DMC 3 Pwr B Stat DMC 3 sec voltage Stat DMC D e E CTC2 o EPU o C5 RFP gt VCR1 e EI VCR2 e VDPU 18 Click button Add followed by button Close Details for Computation Expression PI CTCI1 Unit Temp DMC Select Symbol w Select Construct v Select Function I Li Label and rectangle are selected 19 In the data source dialog set the Unit to deg C Context Name Unit
121. Data Type Add temo Data Source Type External Data Source Computation Details for Computation Expression PI CTCI Unit Temp DMC Selec Symbol v Serea consuva v ferea Funcion e Evaluation Expression Valid Unit degres C Name Expression OK Cancel Unit is changed the unit is a textual property of the data source 20 Click button OK to change data source 21 Open previewer from menu Tools Previewer 88 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 15 USE ADVANCED ELEMENTS 50 Ellip Tick Meter MM degres C The created Elliptic Tick Meter is previewed 22 Use the slider at the bottom of the open dialog to simulate values given to the data source and the effect on the meter C USS Editor Preview Untitled INES File Preview 4 il gt Preview started 5 Sep 2006 at 09 41 41 Slider Index 64 The indicator moves as the slider is moved 3 15 2 Lesson in creating using fluid elements 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Open the Property Editor from menu View Property Editor 89 10 3 15 USE ADVANCED ELEMENTS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Wi USS Display Editor 2 6 0 DIST File Edit View Tools Element Window Help aja 8 Mie mojo DIN ge HL lt me bed Wb wh a amp Al Q d 9 Property Editor 2 x
122. E TER EER RSS SS JR MB S Ad CT 94 Options Monis Cc TIT 91o Window Memi een set Geno oe eee o a 216 IACIPUNICN 2545460245455 ED 445 Wu 3 39 Sa 9 2 Display Versions and Compatibility 0 00000 95 AML Display Pile Formal Schemas x eon s ox podar a A a wo os CONTENTS 94 RCB ec 240 Example Configuration in MCS Environment 253 Awl Editor Parameters 25 2d dw wo vow XR vow oco UE 3 RE E RY xXx 253 AZ Executor Parameters a a a a a a 254 Glossary 257 References 265 Cl Reference Documents 265 C 2 Other References onono a hh 265 Index 267 10 List of Figures 1 Installation and Getting Started 1 1 Editor window after start 2 v bo eee be OO eRe EMD Eee m Rey A 6 1 2 Executor window alter Start ux oo Redde d opo 9x99 9 dox dm ede es dm d 7 2 Concepts OX DYSICMLOVERIOW sario 5444 ooo e eho MGS aS AAA AA 9 22 Symbol library with electrical symbols a 10 23 Data field with data quality indicators en 10 24 DOI help table for an MCS display een 11 25 DOI help table fora PWS display s crases creditate ta erika e dewa 12 11 List of Tables 4 Editor 4 1 Target systems and DOI style files eee 124 42 Element Properties with Default Capability ooo o 128 Lo X DDVBESIONS 4 4442 6h et che be eo AA AA A 133 E ee ee ee ee RM 133 ho T 1 32445 445585 e 90 ASP 3g eb oue EI e Ni aro E Sq PE ee Se 134 46 List of input field constraints es o
123. ES xov BS EH ves qo des 197 eE Soo PTT 197 5 8 1 6 1 Setting Report Folder 2 ale dom ov ed eee dB a c 197 CONTENTS A A IEEE INTE 5 8 17 1 Opening Import Results Dialog Dodo Freeze Mode sssr ardre aandra ea hee we 5 8 1 8 1 Enabling Freeze Mode 0 0 00 een 5 8 1 8 2 Setting Major Step Interval llle 5 8 1 8 3 Setting Freeze Mode Duration o SOLI a oscnetadawacn Goeeas be aes eee as S 15 He 5819 1 Det Pe based Witt s see ea 6 oo oR Oe Gas 9 9 9 5 8 1 9 Set value based limit ocres Bea ee 6 Application Scenarios 5 MES S2 xe teste ae te aeee Se eee eee see eee eee eee eee S6 SE mU 02 5 5 VIR oe orar d rose Pudor 9 rues 4 ee ge oO eee Oo Ge ee Be Oo COMI castes see Geeween Soe ees PASE SEARO RAE ESE ed eee eed 7 Importing Foreign Display Formats ale PCS DREPSDISOIAUS oa eeu ee eae ee So GR ee e RR Oe Das 746 eR S 72 PWS FWDU Displays oe ice oebS e446 og ipei EERO GEG HS EEG ORS S dee oe x 7 2 1 Extracting FWDU Displays from MDB o o e 712 Xseneraune SCOE KML Miles soii Hee ESS SEAR EES EE HESS 7 2 3 Converting the FWDU ASCII definition to USS Format 7 24 Create HTML report of original PWS FWDU displays To GIVDU Displays se ce eadera esas dede wha ee Ge Oe ee ee ES 7 3 1 GWDU to USS Conversion Details o o o 0 7 3 1 1 Conversion of GWDU Display Objects o o 7 3 1 2 Conversion of GWDU Att
124. ET I2 js ce T auc Text I2 element element element element element element element element ExpirationPeriod xsd nonNegativelnteger ExpirationSamples xsd nonNegativeInteger ValueMarkerEnabled xsd boolean StepCurveEnabled xsd boolean LimitAreasFilled 4 xsd boolean DomainAxisLimits Limits Rana brasas A HE REG ey DefaultDomainAxis ValueAxisProperties 234 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA element DefaultRangeAxis ValueAxisProperties element DomainAxesMap _AxesMap element RangeAxesMap _AxesMap Graph Meter element Minimun xs asado te ty element Maximum xsd double element Orientacion 1 YHORLZONTALS VVERTICALY t cemento solem oM m RNC Mo element PusltlCoLorindieGaringorarcus xsd boolean element FillStyle FillStyle Element Navigate TONnBULLON element DefaultNavigationTarget text Button NestedTeleCommandParameter element Parameters actccriouce Class 1 Ylinkecelist element SimpleTeleCommandParameter _reference element SimpleTeleCommandParameter SimpleTeleCommandParameter element NestedTeleCommandParameter NestedTeleCommandParameter TeleCommandParameter OpenDisplayCommand element DisplayBasename text element OpenInNewWindow xsd boolean element Coordinates element X xsd integer element Y xsd integer element Width xsd integer element Heigh
125. Electrical contains symbols such as Amplifier Connector or Converter see Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 Symbol library with electrical symbols 1 gt E El Amplifier E10 Connector Permane E115 Connector Demata LLE El1 Connectors Demata E115 Connector Demata UM E115 Connector Demata e me n d E138 Converter Static E128 Converter Current v E14 Converter Unit AC DC E15 Converter Unit DC DC USS comes with a set of predefined symbol libraries These libraries are called system libraries They contain many of the symbols defined in Appendix C of the International Space Station s Display and Graphics Commonality Standard DGCS including 3D Graphics Communications Computers Elec trical Events Fluid General Groups Logic Mechanical Misc Modes PCS Payloads Radiation Mon itoring Robotics Sensors Station Modules and Tasks Users can define their own libraries in user libraries There is no limit in the number of user symbols Libraries can be created and symbols can be added and removed from a user library with the USS editor Symbol libraries can be placed anywhere below a project folder 2 4 Data Quality Indication One of the main tasks of the USS executor is the visualization of data This involves two aspects 1 the data values must be shown and 2 the quality of the shown data must be clear The quality gives an indication about the availability and
126. Element L element Tooltip 9 Misc Button Shape Oval Corner Fill Color MM RO G 0 B 0 000 Corner Fill Style Corners Enabled lm Properties of Telecommand is shown 12 Click in the Property Editor on the button with text Cancel Arch Retrieval for the property Re leased Label Text Cancel Arch Retrieval Dialog with changeable text is shown 13 Change text to Cancel Cancel 14 Click OK to change property 15 Preview the created display by choosing Tools Preview opens Preview Frame click the created telecommand with label Cancel 65 3 11 CREATE COMMANDING DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 29 24 225 26 T USS Editor Preview Untitled rix File Preview Cancel Arch Retri eval VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE Downlink File O4Sep06 15 16 45 BEEEESS CANCEL ARCHRETRV P1 Preview started 4 Sep 2006 at 15 16 36 Slider Index 0 Previewer shows simulated command execution at the bottom Close Preview Select command in System Configuration Browser Start Arch Retrival And drag it to the display Select String command from the popup Click the button in the property Command in the property editor Kind HLCL Command start Arch Retrieval START TIME 4 il String Command Editing Change the string command from Start Arch Retrieval START TIME
127. Engineering Unit D PcTS STATE 3 PCTS_PACKETID 3 PCTS_RATE 4 i Command Preview Artif Tm Switch IPHD SOURCE null PHD DEST null PHD ACK FLAGS null PHD SEG CNT null PH D TYPE null PCTS_TIMETAG_OXYYYYMMDD null PCTS_TIMETAG_OXHHMMSS00 null PCTS_STATE null PCTS_PACKETID null PCTS RATE null Close The command editor 138 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES 4 6 5 Command List Commands can easily be added to an existing command list by dragging TC from the System Configura tion Browser to the command list Multiple commands can be dragged by selecting them in the System Configuration Browser and dragging to the command list with the right mouse button pressed down A command list is changed into a command combo box command pop up with the property Show as Combo Box ee Tw The same Command List element configured in two different ways Command List properties 9 Appearance Background Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF Font SansSerif plain 0 12 Font Color MM F 0 G 0 B 0 000000 Selection Color E R 176 G 196 B 222 BOC4DE Show as Combo Box L Command List Command Add Remove Command Chosen C ommand 1 mu Command Label Command Command Move Up Down Up Down Commanding Command X Command List Properties in Property Editor The Command List has several unique properties see
128. Executor from installed icon 15 In Executor open display file Display2 uss from the Project folder USS Display Executor uss uss2 File Navigate View Options Window Help Jada ale 00 00 00 000 6 Untitled Untitled Display 2 Displayl 16 Click on the navigation button with text Display1 71 3 13 ADD SYMBOLS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL H USS Display Executor uss uss2 a x File Navigate View Options Window Help amp 6 tel gt memo 00 00 00 000 da 6 Untitled y Untitled Untitled Display 1 Cancel_Arch_Retri eval j VAR_FOR_UPLOAD_FILE Downlink File D4Sep06 15 32 51 INFO Executor started D4SepD6 15 33 05 INFO Opening display home uss uss project Display2 uss D4Sep06 15 34 14 INFO Opening display home uss uss project Displayl uss TM MCS s pr N Upd Perf fs Not Connected Executor opens Display1 uss in a new tab 17 Close the executor and open the editor again 18 Make a new display and save it together with the two previous naming it Display3 uss 19 Make a navigation button and set the button text via the property editor to Change to Display a a mchange to Display p New Navigation button 20 Locate the greyed icon for configurating the dynamic property Navigation Target Commanding Action Disolav open l Open New Window Target Navigation Properties of the navigati
129. ISPLAY 3 gt C EXECUTOR o 3 MDBIO Item Name EST _SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS MDBTEST Item Type Unified Synoptic Displays USS y Sync Lock For Edit Close MDB Browser shows saved display 13 Select the MDB display MDBTEST and press button sync 102 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL LC APM GJ COMMON_TEST_SUPP GJ GRD_DATA Gd uss EJ EDITOR C AUTOMATIC TESTS o E DISPLAYS CI MANUAL TESTS EY EXAMPLE 3 EXAMPLE2 3 EXAMPLE3 Y MDBTEST 3 TEST 3 TEST2 3 TEST3 Py USS DISPLAY 3 gt CI EXECUTOR o 3 MDBIO Item Name EST_SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS M DBTEST Item Type Unified Synoptic Displays USS lt Sync Lock For Edit Close Syncing data to home uss uss project Please wait Synchronization is under way Syncing data to home uss uss project Done Synchronization is done 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS 14 Now open the display again for editing by clicking the button Lock For Edit in the MDB Browser cI APM EZ COMMON TEST SUPP E GRD DATA LS USS EJ EDITOR CI AUTOMATIC TESTS J DISPLAYS EC MANUAL TESTS 3 EXAMPLE 3 EXAMPLE2 3 EXAMPLE3 Y MDBTEST 3 TEST 3 TEST2 3 TEST3 3 USS DISPLAY 3 CI EXECUTOR o MDBIO Item Name EST SUPPAGRD DAT AXUSSAEDIT ORVM ANUAL TESTSAM DBTEST Item Type Unified Synoptic Displays USS v Synt Lock For
130. Issuing Telecommand via Command List 5 4 7 1 Prerequisites e Selected display contains command list 5 4 7 2 Issuing Telecommand via Command List You can issue telecommands by selecting a command from a list and pressing the execute button The scrollable command lists allow you to select telecommands or UCL commands out of popup menus during run time execution As an example you can find a command list in the display Set Cabin Temp which can be found under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ECLSS CABIN_ TEMP uss To issue telecommand via command list 1 Select command from list 185 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR CF Set Cabin Temp ECLSS_Set_Cabin_Temp_MCD File Navigate Options Window Help Set Cabin Temp Setpoint CTCU1 cCTCU2 Cabin Temp Setpoint J A degC Avg Cabin Temp M EY deoc METE 2 Click Execute 3 Command is processed as described in Issuing telecommand via command button section 2 Step Commanding 5 4 8 Finding Displays with Parameter References 5 4 8 1 Prerequisites e Project root folder must be set and existing Project root folder must contain displays 5 4 8 2 Finding Display with Parameter References You can find and optionally open displays where opsnames SIDs PUIs or pathnames bound to the selected element are also used The search is performed over the set of displays contained in the project root folder and its sub folders 5 4 8 2 1 Fi
131. MINAL ON OFF 77 2 77 2 XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXX XXXX 0 56 0 56 139 4 139 4 9 5 9 3 0 00 0 00 INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE NOMINAL OFF OFF 52 0 52 0 XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXX XXXX NOMINAL OFF OFF 52 0 52 0 XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXX XXXX 3 5 MAKING A DISPLAY OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN R K Rem Mem E EA ML em Mem Mm 40 0 Dp CVT 39 9 39 9 9 50 9 50 1 49 1 49 OPEN XXXXXX XXXX CLOSED OPEN XXXXXX XXXX CLOSED OPEN XXXXXX OPEN XXXXXX XXXX CLOSED OPEN XXXXXX OPEN XXXXXX XXXX CLOSED 3 4 3 6 Show PCS display samples e Choose File gt Open Display e Open USS HOME share displays pcs xml Columbus ECLSS xml e Open USS HOME 5hare displays pcs xml Col Air Sensors xml Open line graph on Liquid Carryover Sensor 1 3 5 Making a Display This tutorial section explains the preparations needed in order to run both USS executor and USS editor After this it gives a short tutorial on USS editor which shows how to create a new ground ops Satmon like display the converting of GWDU ground displays in batch operation and how to check GWDU displays for consistency It finishes with a tutorial on USS executor which explains how to connect and disconnect a display shows direct commanding of FWDU displays shows a GWDU display as well as imported Satmon displays samples and PCS display samples and shows the commanding via MCS Tools 3 5 1 Introducti
132. Meter Color Show Status Meter Major Tick Frequency Meter Tick Base imoanciane NE RO G 0 B 139 00008B LJ Ellip Tick Meter Left or Top Cid NE RF o cO 6 0 000000 None A 120 300 EE F o G 0 B 0 000000 R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF 6 Disabled n ly 2 50 5 Label is shown in meter 9 In property editor set property Meter Tick Indicator to Slider Kite Property Editor x 00 are TE Appearance Border Color Border Used Draw as Circle Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Meter Tick Label Style Shape Fill Color Shape Fill Style Start Angle Sweep Angle Tick Color Tick Indicator Color Tick Indicator Thickness o Rehasdniir lt EllipticTickMeter gt EllipticTickMeter1 MMB RO CO B 139 00008B L Ellip Tick Meter Slider Kite m ES w NE RO G 0 E 0 000000 120 300 Nl RO CO B 0 000000 R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF 6 Indicator is changed 10 In property editor set property Field Style to Center 9 Behaviour Field Style Meter Color Show Status Meter Major Tick Frequency Meter Tick Base Meter Tick Unit 9 Dimensions ener 1 1 1 1 vw 50 5 Field is now shown and centered n 11 In property editor set the following properties Start angle 90 Sweep angle 180 Tick Color R 165 G 42 B 42 Tick Indicator Color R 102 G 205 B 170 66 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 15 USE ADVANCED ELEMEN
133. O Dots 1 During During 10 10 100 10 The View Settings is undocked and it is showing the open view settings of the display selected The View Settings can be used to alter the grid and appearance of the display in the editor It has the same layout and features as the Property Editor Showed for a display is the following categories a Grid Basic appearance of Grid in the display view as well as behaviour off elements when they are being moved or resized b Zoom Zoom settings 11 Close the View Settings by clicking the close icon in the undocked view This concludes the introduction to the editors tool views 3 3 4 Editor Print Facility The USS Editor features a standard printing feature which gives access to basic layout and scaling of the printout 3 3 4 1 Lesson in printing of displays 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Wi USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help EIE ES aja l S alll CO a EN a d A e P OITIS 916 f t Synoptic Hierarchy x p ax Misplay 1 x 9 7 Open Displays E No title assigned on display 1 9 Eq home uss uss project c3 lib x Property Editor x ij Symbol Library display 1 ME Appearance a Background Color R 238 G 238 B 238 Background Symbol Library lele Background Symbol Name v Behaviour Sho
134. ON DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS Table 7 10 PlotLineDef attributes PlotLineDef attribute Interpretation wase format BBGGRR The opsname of the configuration item presented by this plot line 218 All data sources are created with type Float which is correct for most line plots but will result in no plot being dis played for dis crete mea sure ments This can only be handled cor rectly when per forming the con version with config uration infor mation CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS Table 7 10 continued PlotLineDef attribute Interpretation If this is set to true this line is drawn as a step graph otherwise samples are directly connected with a line Satmon seems to allow mixing of step and line plots in one graph which is not supported by USS graphs Found no usage of mixed step line graphs in existing displays Not Supported The title for this line used in the graph legend USS graphs always display the opsname which also seems to be the Satmon default Not Supported Found no Hotlink String usage in existing Satmon displays LineNum Integer Unknown LADTableID Integer Unknown Value is always 6 MinGap Integer Unknown Staircase Boolean 7 4 1 5 Procedure Displays This section describes the interpretation of elements used in procedure displays Table 7 11 LeanProcEntry attributes L
135. OR ded cR eR S RR RAE 127 44 6 Aligning and Distributing Elements eee 127 AA Usmethe Grd D 127 44 8 Grouping Elements s s saneca meo Nos eoe eae se A es 127 4 4 9 Working with PP 127 4 4 10 Changing the Element Default Values ooo o 127 Using The Symbol LIPTAY gt eue ox oo Gee eos OH EDN OSES ORES GES a 128 45 1 Pre Defined Dynamic Symbols 0 0000000000000 128 4 5 2 Creating New Libraries and Symbols lees 129 45 2 1 Advanced Editing of Symbols o oo e 129 4 5 2 2 MDB Version Control of Symbol Libraries 130 Elements Advanced Properties oo ee 131 AL INCIDI hon 949 32935 4 3 v3 9 99 dadas 4 131 c DU rm 131 s Dala Ricld rodaron area aa 132 4 6 3 1 Field Data Formatting antakaa i 133 464 Command DULILOUL a up um dox eR p PHA UE e PUE aa ee eer N Ores 134 205 Commmand LIS ps aces evaea Wenn S suas hae PES sea ned oe E 139 0 0 JINaVrgabon DULION e eco So Eos o o fe ROSE AREA GEES 139 AO e e e eros ise X AA NM E ae ee gee ORE RN NU EE NP ES SEP 140 Lol LOC GAPIS PR hang ee See See es eee ee 140 1072 OMI CIAO sasaaa eh yo bas AA 143 20 9 Dar GPE rosita AAA AAA 143 AGO AA 144 467 Polylineand 1 lt se ua ah rhe e 9 ya b RUE e S adobe x e Sus 144 4 6 10 Linear and Elliptic Tickmeter Thermometer and Tankmeter 144 2 0 10 Linear Tick Meter amp 6a o9 242489 o9 REOR S E SURE 5 58944 144 4610 2 Elip
136. OY Zo zu PRO ZO PADS 20 205 205 159 139 TZ 1 42 SS SS 230 22 Z1 g Zo ZB 299 180 180 AA Zee 2490 2 Zo 2 20 5 2159 20 9 ZO 204 204 208 Zoe Z9 Zoe 160 160 dra JEU Zl 47 47 has A OA 159 140 170 15750 ZING AGE 224 224 steel blue Steel Blue light steel blue LightSteelBlue light blue LightBlue powder blue PowderBlue pale turquoise PaleTurquoise dark turquoise DarkTurquoise medium turquoise MediumTurquoise turquoise cyan Iront eyan Ligne e VR cadet blue CadetBlue medium aquamarine MediumAquamarine aquamarine dark green DarkGreen dark olive green DarkOliveGreen dark sea green DarkSeaGreen sea green SeaGreen medium sea green MediumSeaGreen light sea green LightSeaGreen pale green PaleGreen spring green SpringGreen lawn green LawnGreen green chartreuse medium spring green MediumSpringGreen green yellow GreenYellow lime green LimeGreen yellow green YellowGreen forest green ForestGreen olive drab OliveDrab dark khaki DarkKhaki khaki pale goldenrod PaleGoldenrod light goldenrod yellow LightGoldenrodYellow light yellow LightYellow 242 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE SIS ap PR ONS U yellow 259 215 U gold 230 2al L30 light goldenrod 230 22l 130 LightGoldenrod vlc H PSH goldenrod 184 134 11 dark goldenrod 184 134 11 DarkGoldenrod 188 143 143 rosy brown 188 143 143 RosyBrown 205 92 92 indian red 205 92 92
137. Preferences f nx displays 5 Draw Color JR 204 G 255 B 0 CCFFOO Draw Style Lines v Draw Thickness 2 Snap to Grid on Move During v Snap to Grid on Resize During v Spacing Horizontal 50 Spacing vertical 20 Zoom Zoom Factor in Percent 200 Zoom Step Size in Percent 10 1 Open the editor preferences by selecting from menu Edit Preferences KR Project 0 Display Root folder G Consistency 3 Data Source D Import D Database 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE Default Settings for Project 3 7 GUI ELEMENTS The Editor preferences opens it is arranged after categories to the left and each category contains a group of properties No properties change in the system before the OK button is pressed so you can change properties without effect as long as you do not press OK 2 Click on the Project category Project D R Display D Consistency R Data Source 3 Import D Database R MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE Root folder Default Settings for Project The project category contains the following properties a Root Folder Cancel The Root Folder defines where the uss project is located that is were MDB files are synchro nized to and provide common location for displays 3 Click on the Display category 41 3 7 GUI ELEMENTS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL
138. RFM must be verified to support downlink of Ku band packets via the HRM Contest Help URL Opsname 1 1 Verify POU Power Outlets Verify PDUL Subsys Pwr BusS ON E Verify PDU2 Subsys Pwr Bus5 ON MM 1 2 Activate HRM Verify HRM Pwr A OFF Sa Verify HRM Pur B OFF cmd H9M Activation Execute Target System PWS Dimensions Height 1 560 Width 390 9 Informabon Description Tite HRM Actrrabon Log Insert New Change Entry Select Change Entry C Y Symbol brrr 6 8 x Q System Configuration Browser 8x My Consistency Results P x Editor after adding the second sub step title first two verification instructions and command in struction 7 Finally continue by adding the clear text instruction to wait for a minute as a label and adding the remaining verification instructions You can preview the resulting display by menu selecting Tools Preview Display 113 Chapter 4 Editor 4 1 Introduction The USS Editor is the application for creating USS displays for later execution in the USS Executor The Editor supports the definition of layout composition and dynamic properties of synoptic displays The operations of the Editor will be familiar to users of MS Visio with the addition of connecting graphical elements with MDB end items The Editor can connect to the Columbus MDB to retrieve and store display definitions or it can work with displays directly on t
139. Rectangle Sitio raph Symbol TankMeter Thermometer Valve _GraphOrRef o ree las 1 text _reference BarGraph LineGraph StripGraph X RotationEnum DECO ADE COSO MY EGO 94 RGB Colors CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE List of predefined colors that can be used in computations See Example 4 3 for what they can be used for E R isto ec ANTAS by IS Boy oa Inyo as 255 250 250 SNOW 248 248 255 ghost white 248 248 255 GhostWhite 245 245 245 white smoke 245 245 245 WhiteSmoke DAO H gainsboro 255 250 240 floral white 255 250 240 FloralWhite 259 245 230 old lace 259 245 230 OldLace 250 240 230 linen 25519 ES antique white 250 235 215 AntiqueWhite 259 239 213 papaya whip QOEM DT PapayaWhip 255 235 205 blanched almond 255 235 205 BlanchedAlmond ZOOS AS 1L 95 bisque 255 216 185 peach puff 255 216 185 Pocos A ARTIS navajo white DIE NEUES NavajoWhite 255 226 161 MOSS Sa 255 246 220 cons Pk 255 255 240 SR GHE WA 255 250 205 lemon chiffon 255 250 205 LemonChiffon CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 259 245 296 seashell 240 255 240 honeydew PLD Cd me mint cream ALS EA MintCream 240 259 295 azure 240 248 255 alice blue 240 248 255 AliceBlue 290 230 2350 lavender 255 240 245 lavender blush 255 240 245 LavenderBlush ANDAS ALVES misty rose Te ATs OC MS MistyRose SENS pn OR AOS white U U U black 47 79 79 dark slate gray 47 79 79 DarkSlateGray d 79 7 dark slate grey Al 79 7E DarkSlateGrey IRO TT
140. Revert to the saved version of the current display file This function can be used to discard changes made in the display since the last save or to acquire changes made in the display file outside the editor e Close Close the current display e Close all Close all open displays e Save Save the current display to the file system e Save as Save the new display to the file system e Save all Save all open displays to the file system e MDB Browser sync lock for edit delete Show the MDB browser e MDB Open from MDB Open display from the MDB e MDB Forced Open from MDB revert Open display from the MDB and overwrite local display file no matter synchronization state e MDB Lock for Edit on MDB Lock for Edit the display from the MDB e MDB Add to MDB Add a new display to the MDB e MDB Save in MDB Save display in the MDB 120 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 3 WORKING WITH DISPLAYS e MDB Delete in MDB Delete display in the MDB e Create HTML Report Create a detailed report about the current display e Export to Image Export the current display to an image with or without annotation supported formats GIF PNG SVG e Print Print the current display e Print Preview Preview the print of current display e Preferences Change Editor preferences for new displays e Recent files List of the 4 most recent files for easy access e Exit Exit the Editor 4 3 1 Merging Displays For users of GWDU the function
141. S 0 0 U 20 IES 11 5 10 RO LOG 26 EIS LoT 1 69 145 See 174 OZ 140 25 BEO Ak 104 155 6 MER WO4 I DS ZARO 18l Ie U U gt U 15207 ds dike 80 Ilex ey 144 98 SIS 184 158 108 Mek 1579 TAS LOT ST a 19 oS TS EGF 144 oe VG 140 EE S DO 2 39 ZS 15519 Ze zo 201 eF Ze 2S Zi IO OO 239 205 659 Zo 2 55 22105 St Zao 295 Zee 15319 Zo Z36 205 S Zi 2909 ANG w9 U U 2 red4 DeepPinkl DeepPink2 DeepPink3 DeepPink4 HotPink1 HotPink2 HOC PEARS HotPink4 EAk pink2 punk pink4 ES He R I Exon Tyres E LightPink4 PaleVioletRedl PaleVioletRed2 PaleVioletRed3 PaleVioletRed4 maroonl maroon2 maroon3 maroon4 VioletRedl VioletRed2 VioletRed3 VioletRed4 magental magenta2 magenta3 magenta4 9356s o HL EI R ER orchid4 plumi plum2 plum3 plum4 MediumOrchidl MediumOrchid2 MediumOrchid3 MediumOrchid4 DarkOrchardt RH e uc DackOnch rds DarkOrchid4 purplel purple2 purple3 purple4 MediumPurplel MediumPurple2 MediumPurple3 MediumPurple4 es bee thistle2 Ads bles thistle4 qua U grey0 grayl 248 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE co Ol CO 10 i 13 ES Es 18 Ins 20 20 25 Ze 26 Z6 26 28 GN Sil OI DES 36 36 38 38 Al 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 3 ok 54 54 56 99 or ORO 61 61 64 64 66 66 69 69 AE di 74 74 ES I T TES 62 82 84 co 01 Ol CO 1 9 i J
142. S Ie IS igs Is 20 20 E Ze 26 26 4215 2e Sal SE 33 355 SG DIO SO S Al 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 S3 Sal 54 54 56 DS eu Se eal ol 64 64 66 66 69 69 dde zen 74 74 DAT p UE Jc 82 SZ 84 co Ol OW 10 ks dike Es i5 18 18 20 E ZS ES AS Ze B PAS ext 2l SS S 36 26 e 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 Su oll 54 54 So 56 oe 29 61 61 64 64 66 66 69 69 pol pu 74 74 D E ES 19 82 82 84 greyl gray2 grey2 gray3 grey3 gray4 grey4 gray grey gray6 grey6 gray grey gray8 grey8 gray9 grey9 gray LO grey10 RE greyll grayl2 greyl2 Ge avis grey13 gray14 grey14 grav IE grey15 grav BE grey16 Cigar day grey17 gray Eo grey18 IT greyl9 gray20 grey20 OL IL grey21 gray22 grey22 quA grey23 gray24 grey24 gray25 grey25 gray26 grey26 Sheehy grey27 gray28 grey28 dia ao grey29 gray30 grey30 Sie ery o dE grey31 Qin Sta grey32 gray33 249 9 4 RGB COLORS 9 4 RGB COLORS 84 87 87 29 89 D DI 94 94 oe 2n 99 29 OZ SR LOS KOS 110 dO 1386 UREO eZ KE aks TTE S THE 15187 Za 1210 1552 1152 117278 1 45 AT 12 0 TEO 158 P38 BS LS 155905 ee ae 140 140 143 dass 145 Wass 148 148 SAO 1650 SS dom 1555 Ia 1595 RS S S dl Ee KS 15615 84 87 orf 89 99 DE 92 94 94 2 e 29 She 1507 197 BOLS OS WOZ BOZ HEO IRO eZ SI dE Z
143. SOLAR o 3 SYSTEM gt TCS x Sean Add Change Close System Configuration Browser opens in OPS View Onboard Telemetry 97 3 18 CHECK CONSISTENCY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 10 In the search field left of button Search type Sensor and click button Search OPS View Onboard Telemetry v El 5 BLB gt ATCS1 e JH ATCS2 IN Analog Input Section Fail e cI BGB e E CEN e 3 CPU 3 Caution Stat 3 Command History Avail Stat 3 Command History Table 3 Command Rejection Stat 5 Critical Liquid Transfer Stat e 3 EEPROM gt c HM o 3 Hw gt EJ INC 3 Internal IF Fail Es 9 L5 13 Ej 02 D o 56 o 57 e 3v11 gt 3 v12 FA a e System Configuration Browser searches and selects the end item NBLBNLSSNS13NO2 Sensor 11 Click button Change Name Unit Data Type BLB_LSS_S13_02_Sensor pct Float System Configuration Browser changes the data source in the Data Source Dialog 12 Click button Close TankMeter1 Edit Data Source BLB LSS 13 02 Sensor Remove Data Source Type External Data Source O Computation Details for External Data Source Opsname v BLB LSS 513 02 Sensor lann Value Output Engineering value Unit pct Data Source Dialog now has a fully configured data source 13 Click button OK in data source dialog 9 General Data Source BLB LSS 13 02 Sensor
144. TION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 1 2 Exiting the Executor 5 1 2 1 Prerequisites e Executor must be running 5 1 2 2 Exiting the Executor To exit the executor 1 Choose File gt Exit 2 Executor exits The current window layout is saved and can be restored on the next run 5 1 2 3 See also e Starting the Executor 5 2 Monitoring and Control Configuration 5 2 1 Connecting to System to be Monitored and Controlled 5 2 1 1 Prerequisites e Executor must be ruming 5 2 1 2 Connecting to System to be Monitored and Controlled To establish data connection with the system to be monitored and controlled 1 Do one of the following e Choose Options gt MCS Connection e Click the Not Connected button in the status bar On USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 File Navigate View Options Window Help ekeke 58 een E 6 COL Synoptics H m COL Synoptics Home Page COL Home Page MCD q S Version Ops Products 3 0 External Payload EA Gr El El U B FI Upa Pert 166 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL CONFIGURATION 2 In the popup dialog change the connection parameters as needed MCS Connection Service CISim Host localhost Port 7060 3 Click Connect Connection to MCS CIS established reflected by executor status indicator i e former gray icons tur
145. TS it USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help mom samorz mK e ejo o e Jals olo Dlalals eje la 8 6 elo a 2 e m gt 8 DE 2 lvialal ajaa m a amp Ay lt I3 Property Editor x a nx f display 1 x lt EllipticTickMeter gt EllipticTickMeter1 ES 9 Appearance Border Color MM RO G 0 B 139 000 Border Used Draw as Circle L Label Text Ellip Tick Meter Meter Tick Indicator Slider Kite we Meter Tick Label Style ILeft orTop wl Shape Fill Color EE F o G 0 B 0 000000 Shape Fill Style Start Angle 30 Sweep Angle 180 Tick Color NN R 165 0 42 B 42 8A Tick Indicator Color MA R 102 G 205 B 170 Tick Indicator Thickness 6 9 Behaviour 30 Field Style Center 7 40 Meter Color Show Status Meter Major Tick Frequency 2 Meter Tick Base 50 Meter Tick Unit 5 50 Ellip Tick Meter BENI The Elliptic Tick Meter changes appearance and meter range is changed 12 Select data source field in the property editor TN MK a H H VEINS UI BR 1 x lt NP d eee CC NP NP NP NP N 9 General Data Source MeterDS1 9 Information 13 Click the property button to open the data source configuration dialog Name Unit Data Type Now NewExternalDataSource5 Float EI Remove E gt
146. They are USS version persistent so to speak 14 Now add a rectangle to the display from menu Element Add Rectangle A rectangle is added to the open display 15 Move the rectangle so that it acts as a border to the previously created label Test Symbol from Label 16 Select both by using the menu Edit Select All Test Symbol from Label Label and rectangle are selected 17 In the symbol library press button Edit and select from pop up menu Create new Symbol from selected Elements Create new Symbol from element F3 2 Name O Image SVG Type a SubDisplay USS ox cancer Configuration dialog is shown 18 Set the properties Name Test Sub Display Symbol Type SubDisplay USS 61 3 14 CREATE NEW SYMBOLS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Create new Symbol from element P Name Test Sub Display Symbol n S O Image SVG Type _ SubDisplay USS 19 Click button OK to create symbol Ha Symbol Library d x Property Editor Ce 8x J Test Library Edin tdm d Cra abet Madni From Lat Test Sub Display Symbol Test Symbol Symbol is created as a Sub Display Sub Display are real USS displays that can be embedded in the symbol this powerful feature allows for high versatility in creating symbol 20 Delete created elements in the display by selecting from menu Edit Delete M USS Display Editor 2 6
147. USE ADVANCED ELEMENTS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL When creating a symbol from selected elements this can be done in two distinct ways As a svg picture classical way and as a USS sub display were the components are kept and can be recreated ir T System Configuration Browser g Symbol Library 4 x 4 KS A B x display 1 x 33 LIB_924 Create New Library Rename Library Delete Library CompoundSymbol Create New Symbol Add Selected Elements as Symbol Open MDB Add selected elements as Symbol into selected library Popup menu in symbol library view 2 Name 2 Image SVG amp SubDisplay USS Cancel Dialog for creating symbols from elements 3 15 Use advanced elements The USS package feature several advanced display elements which give powerful visualisation possi bilities 3 15 1 Lesson in creating advanced elements 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Open the Property Editor from menu View Property Editor Wi USS Display Editor 2 6 0 x File Edit View Tools Element Window Help amo a oo amolo nNnalele e 8 6 60 alsia S DIZ Jill L y Property Editor e x a ax displays e x display 1 E 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 B 238 Background Symbol Library L Background Symbol Name
148. USS PROPERTIES FILE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Expression a AFS2 Cab Air Massflow VTC AFS82 Cab Air Massflow VTC TankMeter Expression In the property editor open the data source dialog for the Data Field click button for property Data Source In the data source dialog change the data source to computation and enter expression derivative of the TankMeter expression 2 AFS2 Cab Air Massflow VIC For the TankMeter Pipe and Valve change the property Fluid to Air 9 Appearance Fluid Color AIR w Fluid Property changed to Air Click and select only the pipe Click the greyed icon for the property fluid to open the data source configuration dialog and add new data source and enter the expression if 2 AFS2_Cab_Air_Massflow_VTC gt 900 then Red else Blue Click and select only the TankMeter Change Maximum Range of TankMeter to 250000 Open the previewer via menu Tools Preview Display Use slider to simulate display Preview of created display 3 16 Change USS Properties File The USS package feature a common configuration system which is located in the home folder in the folder uss lt USS_VERSION gt EX uss 2 6 0 3 16 1 Lesson in USS properties The USS Editor and Executor use Data Quality Indicator definition to give information about the state of the data being processed the lesson assumes the XML editor KXML editor is installed
149. USS User Manual November 7 2007 USS User Manual Edition uss 2 15 0 Published 20071107 Copyright 2007 Astrium Space Transportation and Rovsing A S Contents 1 Installation and Getting Started Li saline the Product s 64454465 4434 44554 EUR o x o9 09 ee dee woo EGGS ew d LLL Peronu s x sco 63ucbde RA4CPReG4 e9233253 X55430659 39 9 35 11 2 Installing the product on Linux and Solaris lcs 1 1 3 Installing the product on Windows eee LLA Integration WithiCGS ia s oy cet o9 eon oh 4 oU ad LLS Integration with CD NICS iuc 9d o4 39 un R RR R9 AA ES 12 Configuring System SetingS s sco s narra AA LAL Do3HOB e COF Hes x o6 939 694450553 4 2 Ee Oo P9 HEE aa Lo GOES Slated 225344455 55344 oo Pub EDO X qd or ee did qo d E b ede 1 24 tarune ns EOL 23 939993 395439 4 45309 24 9 ORR 99 ES 284 Lod a ss e Sese uz Gees 379 8 908 eh eee GSE SRE SSE RN 2 Concepts Zl Editorand Executor eu ss 4 539 3 9459 6b eee HRS SER EP ESR ad Ze S aT eo AAA AAA AAA eee eae oe 271 DVDR PC 20 Symbol LImEanieS 32 sx x 4585 rea 2509 09 9 s X 493 Ge Ses 24 Data Quality Indication lt lt s x 39 5399399449 ood se RSs bee SE RES ee eds 3 Tutorial Ok AROEN 225564440654 249 542465 a 3 2 Installation of USS package 39449 339 9 o 2s eR Ge ERE AAA 3 21 Lesson in installing USS package ee oo Using We Editor GUL spe st 294 9953 94 3 05 9 2354 5 4 93 199 S 9 E SES NEM ciii LETT 3 82 Docking mechanism of editor panels
150. a S mg MINNIE E OUR Ey ParameterCautionViolationThreshold Returns the limit caution violation threshold of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterCautionViolationThreshold parameter String Integer Example paucametcerecouebsdonmvaodassomrveesbtoltee erouteccdpunebempdeupMem s 154 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 7 DATA SOURCES ParameterDeltaMonitoringStatus Returns the delta monitoring status of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterDeltaMonitoringStatus parameter String String Example paramerterDeleaMon Teo ringstatus CICUL Cabin Tremp DMC gt ENG IMET So ParameterExpected Value Returns the expected value of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterExpectedValue parameter String String Example parameterExpectedValue CTCU1_Cabin_Temp1_DMC gt foo ParameterExpected Value ViolationThreshold Returns the limit caution violation threshold of a pa rameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterExpectedValueViolationThreshold parameter String Integer Example parameterExpectedValueViolationThreshold CTCU1_Cabin_Templ_DMC gt 2 ParameterHighCautionLimit Returns the high caution limit of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterHighCautionLimit parameter String Number Example parameter ey ei US alo eme ondes SAS ParameterHighWarningLimit Returns the high warnin
151. ackground colour is now set to be used in the Line Graph 14 Go to the range tab and click the button for the property Data Set 57 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Context Name Unit Data Type Details for Data Source No DataSource Selected The Data Source Dialog is open The dialog is used in the editor for all data source configuration for elements 15 Click the Add button to add a new data source Name Unit Data Type a NewExternalDataSource5 Float ajl 4 Data Source Type External Data Source O Computation Details for External Data Source Opsna v NewExtemalDataSources Value Output Engineering value v Unit te a The Data Source Dialog add a new external data source 16 Under the details for the External Data Source click the button to open the System Configuration Browser OPS View Onboard Telemetry v ad A o L BLB gt C COMMS o 3 DMS o L ECLSS gt L EDR o 7 FSL o CI PAYLOAD o 3 PL o SOL gt C SOLAR o C SYSTEM o ETCS x Search L Add Change Close 17 In the System Configuration Browser browse to the following BLB Analog_Input_Section_Fail and select it 58 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY 4 OPS View Onboard Telemetry G4 BLB a o L ATCS1 o Gj ATCS2 D o cI BGB o CEN e rra
152. aking a display 2 0 0 0 000048 36 Importexistine displays ss r aue aa R N Od RODE Eee BGG He m T us O 01 L L FP AH 0 UA UA W CONTENTS 3 6 1 Lesson in importing a display o o 0 00000000 34 3 6 2 Lesson in batch importing displays e 0 38 Of e e o2 90 999 e P EC dS rd ara A 39 3 71 Lesson in using the GUI elements View Settings and Preferences 39 38 Chausime DOLSIYIES s uut ue uni wo 3 99 3 8 dee do G44 84 UE do deut cde deae SS 45 3 8 4 Lesson in viewing and changing DOI files sls 45 3 8 2 Lesson in adding a DQI file i oom 9 o his 255 44 ede G44 46 29 Create ASCILCISPIONS 4 sx 08 9 89 54 R4 9239 RU SA EIS se oooh sees ES 47 3 9 1 Lesson in creating ASCII displays eee 47 3 9 2 Lesson in working with ASCII displays elements defaults and seperators 52 3 10 Making a Graph Display susurra rro 46544455 9444555595 53 3 10 1 Lesson in creating Graph displays 0 2 0 0 00004 53 3 10 2 Lesson in creating Strip Graph displays oaoa ee 60 3 11 Create Commanding Display 2 45466 bw eh eo eee or EROR Ew 9o eH Ee GS OS 63 3 11 1 Lesson in creating Commanding displays 0 0000 63 DIA Navigation Display henge Yee on eee hee he OO 9 39 8 ee ee a eS 67 3 12 1 Lesson in creating Navigation displays o ooo o 67 EUIS OG SV HIDOIS 3 nano x SO dE RON SIT EU RUP ae Ju 9419 1 Lesson in creating Symbols xc oe le vt ne Bae de
153. all procedure displays e Large procedures are not displayed in multiple columns The Satmon executor seems to wrap very long procedures into multiple columns USS always displays procedures as one column 7 4 3 USS Satmon importer version 2 15 known issues This section lists the known deviations of USS Satmon displays compared to the original Satmon execu tor 7 4 3 1 Alphanumeric Displays e Telemetry field contents are clipped on the right to match their field bounds if the value is too large A character is displayed in the field if the value has been clipped Fields with 1 character width 11 11 will only display the clipping character if the value is too long e Some static text elements are colored white instead of their original color New styles may have been used in Satmon created after August 2007 which are unknown to the importer and therefore are colored with the default white see Table 7 6 221 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 3 2 Plots e No graph is displayed for some discrete measurements This could be fixed by updating all data sources with the correct type information from a XML SCOE configuration Most discrete mea surements are now detected if the ops name contains STAT 7 4 8 3 Procedure Displays e Range monitoring fails for state codes that have been specified as raw value instead of their engi neering value e Large procedures are not displayed
154. alols ales ml ol ulale elo lt liga Symbol Library 6 x a Ox display 1 x e mx 3D Graphics y Edit S D 3D1 Camera Control Mod 3D1 Camera Rotate t x Jo El Ld J 3D1 Camera Translate 3D10 Restore Vieyy A 3D11 Roll Left 3D11 Roll Left Alterna d 3D11 Roll Right 3D11 Roll Right Altern 3D12 Save View 3D13 Step Size E PIS P n s MAE TI E 9 Property Editor 2 8 x 3 Make a new label by selecting from menu Element Add Label Gabel a Label is created in the display 4 Open the property editor from menu View Property Editor 78 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 14 CREATE NEW SYMBOLS ti Symbol Library Property Editor x Properties are shown from label lt Label gt Labell Be 9 Appearance Font Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular Font Color MM F o G 0 B O 000000 Label Text Autosize Label Text Horizontal Alignment Left w Label Text Vertical Alignment Center w 9 Behaviour Auto Text OFF 1 wi Clipping Context Label For 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height ilz Width 37 x 10 Y 10 9 Information Comment Label Text label1 Name Labell elected Eleme 1 element Tooltip 5 Set the properties to match approximately following picture Property Editor e x enx Change Font Font Color Label Text
155. also Finding text in display e Find Parameter Ctrl Shift F Searches for a parameter which can be a pathname SID PUI or opsname in displays See also Finding display with parameter references 9 1 3 View Menu The view menu groups actions for the displaying or not displaying of GUI elements e Toolbar Toggles between Toolbar is displayed and not displayed See also Showing Hiding the toolbar e Show Hierarchy F11 Toggles between Hierarchy is shown or not shown See also Navigating display hierarchy 9 1 4 Options Menu The setting of preferences the connecting to or from MCS can be done in the options menu e Preferences Opens a dialog that allows the setting of preferences changing the behaviour of the executor e g tooltip behaviour tab appearance etc See also Configuring user settings e MCS Connection Opens a dialog in which the settings for the MCS Connection can be config ured The connection can be established or disconnected See also Connecting to system to be monitored and controlled Disconnecting system to be monitored and controlled 226 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 2 DISPLAY VERSIONS AND COMPATIBILITY 9 1 5 Window Menu Actions that manipulate the appearance of the windows are grouped into the window menu Cascade Displays all open displays cascaded Tile Displays all open displays as tiles Minimize All Minimizes all open displays Maximize All Maximizes all open display
156. am be read by all newer versions added CLIP LEFTY anda Cheo RIGHTY to Eleld OvertlowBenhaviolr for additional estero on o eons TeleCommandParameter Value is now obsolete and is no longer written Format 5 1S written once USS 2 9 x amd cam be read by all newer versions added TC to TeleCommand Kind for tele commands added Field OverrideDQI and Field FillStyle for individual coloring added Symbol CornerEnabled Symbol FillStyle Symbol CornerFillStyle and Symbol DOIFlagEnabled for DOI support on all symbols added Symbol ValueMapping and Symbol StateForInvalidValues for mapping parameter values to symbol values added ComboBox SimpleTeleCommandParameter Sis R R Sr Se a Ss 228 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA r POmmMa amp Aa ho EE E RH Uo pa sO sailed Sat woe head by ads enewerd veles o anat Sais ele ente nte en cl ens on so S Sony amas Mio spp ote di anymore default namespace Start of grammar The remaining patterns are alphabetically ordered A element USSObject element Generator text element FormatVersion xsd positivelnteger element Display Display ACG element StartAngle xsd integer element ArcAngle xsd integer Shape AxisProperties element Owner _GraphOrRef element shames texto Sb AxisRange element Lower v xsas double element Upper xsd double BarGraph element DomainAxisLabel text
157. and IX o Dimensions 9 Information Comment Name Te eCommand1 Released Label Text Default CommandButton1 Tooltip 9 Misc Button Shape Oval v Corner Fill Color MM F 0 G 0 B 0 000000 Corner Fill Style Solid e Corners Enabled L Command Button Properties in Property Editor 134 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES The Command Button has several unique properties e Button Type Defines capabilities and appearance of the button e Shape Fill Color Defines the fill colour of the button i e the colour of the button e Shape Fill Style Defines the fill style i e solid fill button none no colouring of button e Command Shown attached command press mini button to open command editor and X to remove command e Button Shape How button is drawn Oval rectangular or flat i e no 3D effect e Corner Fill Color Colour of drawn corners e Corner Fill Style Defines the fill style i e solid fill corners none no colouring of corners e Corners Enabled if checked the corners are drawn The Button Type property aggregates two properties of a button e Whether it has both a pressed and a released state or is simple with only one state The state determines which label or compound is shown on the button at run time e Whether the contents is Text or a Compound containing any composition of elements The contents of compound buttons is edited in a sp
158. arameter is acquired via playback with an old acquisition time that is older than what the quick eraph buffer can hold The time span to show in the graph can be configured via executor preferences See Section 5 8 1 9 for details on how to do this The quick graph can combine multiple parameters in a strip chart same domain axis for all param eters Just repeat the procedure above and all further parameters will be added to the already open quick graph The contents of a quick graph can be saved printed or exported as HTML report just like a normal display These functions are available via the File menu entries in the main menu of the quick graph window 5 5 Freeze Mode 5 5 1 Introduction The default mode for a display is the real time mode in which the display immediately displays teleme try received from the connected target system All real time telemetry received for a display is stored in a disk based repository for up to 24 hours When a display is set into freeze mode the display of real time telemetry is suspended making it possible to navigate through the previously recorded telemetry for this display via video recorder like controls The earliest point in time that can be displayed during freeze mode is the moment when the frozen display has been opened in the executor The maximum freeze mode duration can be configured in the freeze mode preferences When a display is kept in freeze mode for longer than the configured dura
159. are with or max lenght of string no constraint defined String A command for a button can also be edited as follows e In the propertyeditor press the mini button to open the command editor e If a command for the button has not been defined yet a dialog lets you choose between string telecommands and structured telecommands e Choose structured telecommand if the telecommand has nested parameters or parameters that need user input e The structured command editor shows a tree view of your command structure on the left hand side a panel to modify properties of a selected parameter on the right hand side and a preview field on the bottom showing a canonical version of the produced command string e Following actions depending on the node type can be taken by right clicking a node in the tree view Add Simple Adds a simple parameter to this node that can not be further nested Add Nested Adds a nested parameter to this node that can have further simple or nested parameters as input Delete Deletes a parameter node from its parent e On the right panel side a name and a type can be chosen for each parameter node e For the top command node a kind and a name can be selected In Edit Telecommand A L Switch Name PHD_SOURCE 3 PHD_SOURC D PHD_DEST Delete Tyne Unsigned nC Value Min Value 0 Max Value 4294967295 LD PCTS_TIMETAG_OXYYYYM 3 PcTs TIMETAG 0xHHMM
160. ars can be dragged and docked to any position 4 2 1 Arranging Views and Tab Windows The layout of the Editor can be customized Windows can be minimized maximized closed and moved around to dock in order to create a personalized window layout 4 2 1 1 Docking mechanism of editor panels The USS Editor features a docking framework for tool and display views By default views are opened as frames inside the main editor application Small docking control icons allows you to 116 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 24 THE EDITOR WORKSPACE 1 Undock Minimize Close when view is docked i e inside main window aax 2 Dock Close when view is undocked i e appears in a separate window r1 x 3 Undock Minimize Maximize Close when views are collected in tabs multiple views in tabs 4 2 1 2 Basic Concepts Se The Views listed above are layed out in tab windows 4 Property editor x IS Synoptic hierarchy mx display 1 Background color MM F0 G 0 B 0 000000 Opsname Target system Height 560 Width 880 Description KI Opsname Opsname of selected displays A Tab Window containing two Views Property Editor and Synoptic Hierarchy A window divider can be dragged with the left mouse button to resize the windows A window divider is the grey area between windows When the mouse is over the window divider it changes shape to a double arrow 4 2
161. at o c CPU 3 Command History Avail Stat 3 Command History T able 3 Command Rejection Stat o EEPROM e EI FCC 3 Gen Com AFS RS485 Int Stat 3 Gen Com Int SM RS485 Main Stat 3 Gen Com Int SM RS485 Red Stat 5 Gen Com Int VU R 485 Main Stat 3 Gen Com Int VU RS485 Red Stat 3 Gen Com LAN SMSC LTU Stat D Gen Com SMSC COL HRD Stat E Z 0x Four fields are selected 12 Align the fields to their common left by selecting form menu Element Align Vertical Left it USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help ajajajaja iviala 00 3 mx display 2 2 x Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label EPM_Gen_Com_AFS_RS48 s Int sta cg EPM Gen Com Int SM RS485 Main Stat R EPM_Gen_Com_Int_SM_RS485_Red_Stat EPM_Gen_Com_Int_VU_RS485_Main_Stat 3 Said 1918 58 porom saoz mefa 0 0 o 0 i KTS SBIXEIEIIEIEES SBR F ajajejeje ja S sla alalal a 4 gt vials e HEHE B Property Editor f amp System Config aaax OPS View Onboard Telemetry EPM o L7 AAA R Air Cooling Diff Press 3 Analog Input Section Fail 3 Anomaly Flag Stat o 3 CPU 3 Command History Avail Stat D Command History Table 3 Command Rejection Stat o C EEPROM FCC 3 Gen_Com_AFS_RS485_Int_Stat
162. ately Lesson topics 1 Installation of USS 2 Usage of the USS Editor 3 Creation of displays 4 Import of display of non USS format 5 Major GUI elements 6 How to Edit DOI style files 7 Creation of ASCII displays 8 Making a graph display 9 Creation of displays with commands 10 Creation of displays with navigation 11 Adding symbols to displays 12 Creation of new symbols and symbol libraries 13 Creation of displays with advanced elements 14 Changing the USS property file 15 Changing the USS Editor SCOE file 16 Checking Consistency of Displays 17 MDB display actions 18 Quick tutorial 19 An extended example The creation of a procedural display a task specific display visually resem bling an ODF procedure 13 3 2 INSTALLATION OF USS PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 2 Installation of USS package For Prerequisites for installation and other information on installation of USS see Chapter 1 USS consists of 3 installation packages for different platforms GNU Linux Solaris and Windows A USS package contains among others USS main applications Editor and Executor e Java Virtual Machine Environent Java JRE version supported by USS e Execution scripts for platforms e Example displays SCOE files Default Symbol libraries 3 2 1 Lesson in installing USS package Assumption The archive has the file name uss 2 6 0 1inux i586 tar gz is used with this tuto rial in home directory 1 On the desktop find the
163. atmon displays Imported display definitions become USS displays meaning that they will have the USS XML based file format and the uss file extension The imported displays cannot be exported back into the legacy display formats 3 6 1 Lesson in importing a display 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 34 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 6 IMPORT EXISTING DISPLAYS 2 Open import a GWDU display by selecting from menu File Open The file open dialog is now open 3 Browse via the open dialog to the display CMD_QUEUES gwdu Remember to change File of Type to All Files CMD_QUEUES gwdu can be found under path lt USS_INSTALL_DIR gt examples import gwdu 1 Look In mcs T IS a BJ TOP LEVEL Py PP ISS gwdu T CMD_QUEUES gwdu D PP MCC H gwdu Y CMD_STATUS gwdu SAS CONTROL gwdu 3 DE SERVER gwdu 3 DOWNLINK STAT gwdu 3 PD_01 gwdu 3 PD_SBAND gwdu 3 PP_HOSC gwdu File Name Ic MD QLIEUES gwdu Files of Type GWDU displays C gwdu lv Open Cancel The import display selected preview shown 4 Click open to open display i gt USS Display Editor 2 6 0 INE File Edit View Tools Element Window Help 41 84 4 2 E elo A bii al d gj a a x E eyo 4 iQg le 916 _w Property Editor x a ax displays RO home uss uss main examples import
164. ato E16 Current Relay E2 Battery Generic E20 Diode Light Emitti E21 Diode Light Sensing 2 7 2 L J Symbol E265_Fuse selected in Symbol Library shown un docked 5 Left click Hold and drag the symbol to the middle off open display to add it to the new display LI EM USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help 8 unitorm scating 100 1 w 9 9 00 e F m amp ue s u c o gt aj e e 6 48 6 6 5 M gt a s s s a u pogo e al a x Ve f display 1 x l CA Electrical Edit gt K E22 Diode Rectifier E23 Diode Rectifier Si En JT E245 Diode Zener E255 Filter Unit Elect d E265 Fuse A A E265 Fuse B E27 Generator Frequency E285 Ground Chassis E295 Ground Earth E30 Heater 4 The Symbol is added to the display as an element using the image material given by the sym bol This element contains a reference to the symbol so that if the symbol library is updated the symbol element in the display will be likewise 6 Resize the symbol element by dragging its control points in the corners make it larger 74 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 13 ADD SYMBOLS LI B USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help ER samo z 2005 Su oa a ee ol niaje e e
165. atting details of GWDU display objects The following table lists for all GWDU attributes the way of conversion into USS properties In case of special handling a comment explains the details Table 7 2 GWDU attributes conversion to USS properties GWDU Attribute USS Property Text font REE S Lucida Will be translated in a best fit manner Lucida typewriter des SZE Or ROUANE Depending on source definition Text format bold Text format bold italic underline color italic underline color Text direction Omly horizontal Text rotation Steps of 90 degrees allowed Line width lpt dplim SSS Lmecoor lieclor Context features of graphs Standard format deal Number of samples to Sample based graph in opposite to time based pur be shown graph T T S n string to be implemented in Opque gt Opaqueisdefadlt Cid H Color of bar or curve Default colors 210 CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS Table 7 2 continued GWDU Attribute USS Property Comment Default legend Time Value axis label eee oon Standard format Ticks Tick label Tick label On or off standard format Dynamic behaviour of texts and shapes Color size position Text is converted to In case of 5OPSNAME usage dynamics are Dynamics of texts i data field not converted Dynamics of Symbol shown changes according to subdrawing i threshold 7 4 Satmon Displays NOTE Y
166. atus Meter Major Tick Frequency Meter Tick Base Meter Tick Unit o Dimensions 9 Font Field amp Label Font Field amp Label Font Color Tick Label Font Tick Label Font Color 9 General Data Source o Information 9 Limits Domain Meter Maximum Meter Minimum Bar v LetorTop 5 vw MM P 0 G 0 B 0 000000 None lw IN 7 0 6 0 E 0 000000 R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF 6 Disabled v D 2 50 5 Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular 0 B Fo G 0 6 0 000000 Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular 0 EE FAO G 0 8 0 000000 MeterDS4 50 50 Thermometer properties in Property Editor The Thermometer does not have any unique properties but is a special case of the Linear Tick Meter with the same properties except property Orientation 4 6 10 4 Tank Meter The Tank Meter element represents a fluid tank with fluid definition Tank Meter properties 146 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES 9 Appearance Fluid Color CUSTOM FLUID v Shape Fill Color L_JR 255 0 255 B 255 FFFFFF Shape Fill Style Solid v 9 Behaviour Meter Color Show Status vi o Dimensions 9 General Data Source MeterDS3 o Information 9 Limits Domain Meter Maximum 100 Meter Minimum 0 Tank Meter Properties in Property Editor The Tank Meter has one unique property otherwise the properties are the same as the linear tick
167. atus for all open displays Overall Monitoring Status Indicator Status of Measurements Grey All monitored measurements have an unknown state Green All monitored measurements are within limits Yellow One or more measurements are out of soft limit Red One or more measurements are out of hard limit The color used is always that of the highest criticality i e red yellow green and grey 5 2 5 2 1 Monitoring status history All displays that had or have out of limit measurements are main tained in a history To show monitoring status history 1 Right click on monitoring status indicator 2 In the popup menu select the display you want to navigate to 3 The selected display is removed from history 171 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 9 USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 nix File Navigate View Options Freeze Window Help L amp s S s E al O 19Jun07 09 41 17 4a CMU 1 Nom Power DMSS_CMU1_N 6 CMU 1 DMSS CMU CMU 1 Nom Power O CMU 1 Nom Power DMSS CMU1 Nom Power n m bd DMS CMU 1 Nominal Power Commands Pwr A On par A Off Pwr A Off Pwr B On Pwr B off Pwr B Off Reset Ready Stat Not Rd HK Data Nom HK Data Input Pwr A Qurrent 6 00 A Board Pwr B Current 6 00 A Execute CMU Command and Measurement Unit CMU1 Commands Close CMU 1 Nom Power DMSS CMU1 Nom Power MCD CMU 1 DMSS CMU1 MCD Dis
168. aver The editor has a auto save function which stores project displays being edited in the sub folder auto save to the USS project folder The folder structure is preserved beneath this sub folder By default the editor will auto save every 300 seconds see Preferences for configurating the auto save function 162 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 11 CONFIGURING THE EDITOR Please note the following e Since the auto saver saves only project displays a new display should be saved when constructed to make it part of the auto saved displays If errors should occure while unsaved changes exist choose to continue the appli cation and save changes to a new display file name not over writting the old e Opening and editing an extensive amount of displays more than 20 might cause the auto save function to not meet it fail save max execution time To minimize this risk save current display before changing to editing other display Max execution time can be set manually in uss properties Ex for maximum execution time to 10 seconds add a line with uss editor autosave maxexecutiontime 10000 4 11 Configuring the Editor The Editor can be configured in two levels The system settings with are set by the administrator of the tool and the User Preferences set by the display author 4 11 1 System Setting System settings are defined in the uss properties file which is common for the Editor and Executor The uss properties file can be edit
169. ay for this is COL Activation Part 1 which can be found under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ACTIVATION ACT_PT_ 1 uss This button remains pressed All other command buttons are released The execute button is changed to enabled state If you made a mistake and don t want that command to be executed click another command button Previously selected button is deselected and the new one is selected radio button behavior 2 Click Execute The command associated with the selected button is sent to target system Selected button is deselected and execute button becomes disabled again EJ COL Activation Part 1 COL_Activation_Partl_MCD x File Navigate Options Window Help PDU Outlet Activation HRM Activation PDU1 CTCU1 Pwr Bus PDU2 CTCU2 Pwr Bus Activate par A RM GD J rer o ov O r Pur B Pwr A Current EH A Pur B Current mE A Nom Core Stat ja Nom Ready Stat S PDU 1 VDPU Pwr Bus PDU 2 VDPU Pwr Bus MIR L e Pwr On Pur m HRM Configuration with CDI Configure Serial Path Tlm a Input Selected aaas SS os mo i ps PDU1 Fan Pwr Bus PDU2 Fan Pwr Bus Output Datarate Pwr On J Par Pwr On ER pm WPA Final Activation CHX Cntl Loop Activation Activate J Cnt Loop Stat WPA1 CHX Temp WPA1 Plenum Delta Press AA WMV3 MDV Pwr ume COL Functional Overview WPA1 Accum Liq Oty1 EE L Bi 4 e 7 i ter PEE 5 4 6 3 See also e Issuing Telecommand via Command List 5 4 7
170. bol to USS symbol needs to be provided The symbols will be included in a user symbol library Icon Will be transferred as reference to a PNG file Image Will be transferred as reference to a PNG file Inputs po ee Command buttons should not be used to open displays via HLCL because command Subdrawing Dynamic Symbol Symbol Symbol Button Command button buttons are not IDAGS compatible for navigation Use Picture select button instead Popup menu Command List is fixed not popup Picture select Text menu Dynamic objects Bar graph Bar graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Bar line graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Packed bar graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Packed bar line graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Stacked packed bar l line graph Strip chart line graph Center bar graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Horizontal bar graph Bar graph Horizontal only one sample Pigback bar graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Pickback dist bar graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample 208 CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 3 GWDU DISPLAYS Table 7 1 continued GWDU Object USS Object Comment Solid bar graph Bar graph Vertical only one sample Step graph Line graph With attribute step High low graph High low bar graph High low line graph Line graph Line graph Line graph Stacked line graph Strip chart line graph Filled line graph Line graph Fill
171. can open USS displays from the MDB stored in a tree like structure containing the displays The open function covers to possible actions sync synchronize and lock for edit locking of display in MDB Synchronization When an updated version of a display is needed latest version of display in MDB synchronization is performed from the Editor When invoking File MDB MBD Browser Sync Lock For Edit an MDB Browser is opened The MDB Browser shows the tree structure of the MDB and here multiple displays can be selected by navigating the tree The selected displays can be syn chronized by right clicking and selecting sync Click Close to quit the MDB Browser Synchronization is always done to the Project Folder Lock for Edit When a display needs to be locked for edit locking the display in MDB ensuring only one person edits the display at a time lock for edit is performed from the Editor In the MDB Browser the selected displays can be lock for edit by right clicking and selecting lock for edit this will also synchronize the selected displays Results of Lock for edit action on a display e In MDB The display end item is locked to the database user This results in nobody else being able to lock it and only the person who locked the display in the first place can submit an updated display unlocking it in doing so e Locally on the file system An updated version display is copied to the file system placed ap propriately in
172. ce CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL LY Property Editor x a nudi Nl RO G 0 B 0 000000 Coo O x L SYN Cmd Queues MDB 5 17 33 59 MCS AJV1 MASTER 12 MCS212 CG5626 MCS 600 800 APM COL_CC MCS_OPS CONFIG SYNOPTICS Add New Log Ent AO uss Selected Change Comment Automatic import of GWDU display Selected Change Date 7 10 06 Selected Change Revision 1 0 6 Close the imported GWDU display 7 Now importa PCS display with path lt USS_INSTALL_DIR gt examples import pcs xm1 Col_Cabin_FanAssemblie 3 Col Cabin Fan Assemblies ACT xml D Col_Cabin_Smoke_Detector_1 xml 3 Col Cabin Smoke Detector 2 xml 3 COL CAUTION AND WARNING VTC1 xml D Col CDA 1 and 2 Heater Control VTC1 xml D Col CDA 1 and 2 Heater Control VTC2 xml Guta Presa fan Sce ed Qn O8 Status D Col_CDA_1_and_2_Valve_ControlVTC1 xml 3 Col CDA 1 and 2 Valve Control VTC2 xml File Name Cal Cabin Fan Assemblies ACT xml Files of Type PREP displays C xmb 8 Click open to open display 36 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 6 IMPORT EXISTING DISPLAYS M USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help G4 VE D ia 2 dO m s 7 e m a sa xl tom sama i 9 Property Editor x T A lt B i Ro home uss fuss main examples import pcs xml Col Cabin Fan Assemblies AC x a B
173. ch is defined by the display author when storing the display into the MDB The same naming rules apply to GWDU displays In the headline of the window the displays opsname is displayed not its file name If you want to view the file name you must choose File gt Properties as described in chapter Show display properties To load display from file system You can load a saved display from the file system as described below 1 Choose File gt Open 2 In the File chooser dialog select the display you which to load A preview will be displayed on the right hand side Look In C SYNOPTICS_ROOT y Ga i eaa y COL_HOMEuss 3 GO HOMEuss File Name COL HOME uss Files of Type USS displays uss Open Cancel 3 Click Open The display is loaded and opened No check for duplicate displays is made i e a display can be loaded multiple times 5 3 4 Reloading Display from File System 5 3 4 1 Prerequisites e Make sure that the display is currently selected 5 3 4 2 Reloading Display from File System You can reload a display from file system after changes have been made to the file e g with the editor To reload display from file system 1 Select Display by clicking on its tab The selected tab changes to a different color 2 Choose File gt Reload Display is reloaded from file system 5 3 5 Resizing Display Window 5
174. chema Relax NG schema mess www relaxng org for USS display Tiles in HE format Sllcls ER pie uo a meo Copyright Ce 2005 200 T EET Space Iran portation This schema defines the USS display format This file uss rnc is released as Open Source under the following MIT style license Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Soruware to dead an the Sotuware wI thoU restriccion ancluding without limitation the ligas Lo Use Cory mesas merge pulis distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following Conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be nel ded aim aly seopwkes or Sus ante Tall pOKrEeLons On Ene Sod Wee THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Sis Sie a Sie Se Ss e Ss SS Ss Se Sie Se Se Ss e e Ss Sr Se SS a a Change History Format 6 Iis written since UsS 2 14 x amd c
175. commanding mode are checked via CGS and rejected because no password has been specified The command executor displays the CGS error and prompts the user to enter the password Hints how to edit onboard commands in USS For more details see section Command Buttons e Attaching a command to a command button should be performed via drag and drop mechanism selecting a command from a list of available commands This way the command definition copied to the display is inline with the definition in the SCOE data For each mandatory parameter having no default value an input field will be created If the parameter has constraints these are also attached to the input field The user may set a default value for a parameter e If for any reason the constraints shall be updated take care to use only a more restrictive definition than was set in the SCOE command definition In other words an updated constraint should always be a subset of its orign e Ifa non mandatory parameter shall be explicitely set to a value the user has to create an input field for it add constraints if applicable and set a default value This could be overwritten onboard Take care to correctly set the constraints being valid against the SCOE definition e Executing the consistency checker on a display performs a complete check of all commands In particular it checks the names of the parameters their types as well as their constraints if applica ble As a consequence the consistenc
176. created in empty display 3 Make a standard field for use in ASCII displays the field can be specialized Change field proper ties to match the propertie sin the picture below 9 Appearance Field Data Autowrap Field Data Formatting Field Data Text Horizontal Alignment Left Field Data Text Vertical Alignment Top Field DQ Override Field Overflow Behaviour Font Font Color Shape Fill Color Shape Fill Style Show Data Indicators Show Unit 9 Dimensions Depth Field Data Columns Field Data Decimals Field Data Rows Height Width Y 9 General Data Source 9 Information Comment Name Tooltip LJ lw i v L OVERWRITE Lucida Sans Typewriter Bold 1 L uad R 237 G 237 B 41 FEDED29 T v i iw None D laa 10 0 1 Field1 Field properties after change 4 Make sure the field is selected and use editor menu Edit Set as Element Default 5 Try adding a new label by selecting in the menu Element Add Field Each field element created will get same apperance properties as the original field To change the default simply make a new standard field and select from menu Edit Set as Element Default 92 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY TIP Before starting a larger display design time can be saved if default elements have been probably set 1 Continue with previous display 2 Add a label by selecting in the menu Element
177. ct Copy Command to Clipboard from popup context menu The opsname based command is copied to clipboard execute ilap EAE EIUS eq Ue Pwr BUS On AP 0 ONBOARD RECEPTION NODE APM FLTSYS SW_SYS CCSDS_CONFIG END_NODES DMC_DMS_SERV ONBOARD EXECUTION NODE USM SW DMC USS Swop Instance 5 4 5 Copying Parameter Name to Clipboard 5 4 5 1 Prerequisites e Display must be open and selected 5 4 5 2 Copying Parameter Name to Clipboard You can copy the parameter name to clipboard for use in another application To copy parameter name to clipboard 1 Right click over a parameter name E g parameter CTCU1 Cabin Temp Setpoint in display Set Cabin Temp under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ECLSS CABIN TEMP fwdu 2 Select Copy OPS Name to Clipboard from popup context menu The opsname of parameter is copied to clipboard For the above mentioned example the following text CTCU1_Cabin_Temp_Setpoint_DMC 5 4 6 Issuing Telecommand via Command Button 5 4 6 1 Prerequisites e Selected display contains command button 5 4 6 2 Issuing Telecommand via Command Button Commands can be sent in different ways They can be sent in 1 step commanding this is done in dis plays without execute button In displays with execute button they are sent as 2 step commanding Two step commands always require selecting two command buttons in order to execute the command to be sent this is done by the execute button Commands can then be send as di
178. d we ao maa ert E nS G C 5 2 5 Checking Monitoring State This section describes how the monitoring state can be viewed for a single display or for all displays 5 2 5 1 Display Status Indicator Each display has a coloured indicator that changes colour according to the state of its data sources 169 5 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 8 USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 File Navigate View Options Window Help Jels e s e sje lala I c ome rage Co tome 6 COL Synoptics H Le COL Synoptics Home Page COL Home Page MCD External Payload Upd Q Perf 9 fs Not Connected The following table lists all four possible status indicators and the corresponding states of data sources in the display Table 5 1 Indication of Acquisition Status for Status of Data Sources Display Status Indicator Status of Data Sources Display Status indicator is not displayed atall Display contains no data sources Display Status indicator is grey For each data source in the display the status is o not monitored At least one data source is in limits and no Displ tatus indicator i isplay Status indicator is green data source has a caution soft nominal or warning danger limit violation At least one data source has a caution soft nominal limit violation and no data source has a warning danger limi
179. d ID 2002101714 UnitedLinux a Eile Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Q O Q Q Rares Game Sm UnnamedO label for check _ _ _ _ _ _ ____ O amp O EJ Document Done 0 311 secs TIP The Editor property OpNom check can be enabled to check via the consistency checker the conformance of label elements attached to f ex data fields The text in this type of attached label has to comply with the OPS name of the data source involved disable the check in editor preferences and non OpNom labels will not be reported in the consistency check 3 19 MDB Displays The USS Editor can work with a MDB Displays can be synchronized normally and forced overwrite submitted new displays check in of changes and Deleted Lesson setup A working connection to a MDB is needed proper setup of editor preferences to the MDB in question 3 19 1 Lesson in using the editor MDB interfacing 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Open Property Editor from menu View Property Editor 99 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 9 Property Editor x ax display 1 ES 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 0 238 B 238 EEEEEE Background Symbol Library Name v Background Symbol Name v 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context He
180. datasource is now selected add a new axis for that datasource by clicking button in property Use Axis Set title in Axis properties to Another Axis General Gridline Range Axis Data Set NewExtemalDataSourcet lt l User Defined Curve Style r Style Solid Curve Style Colour BS R 0 G 255 B 0 00FF00 Width 1 0 Use Axis Another Axis v x Axis Properties Axis Label Another Axis Colour MW R 0 G 0 B 0 000000 m e Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range r Axis Range Second datasource uses a second axis 16 Click sub graph dialog button Ok 17 Do the same for the other sub graphs select sub graph and edit adding two datasources to to range axis 18 Save display to default name and location menu File Save 19 Preview Strip graph display in the editor previewer menu Tools Previw Display 62 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 11 CREATE COMMANDING DISPLAY TIP Multi axis graphs must have datasources with output numeric values e g type Integer Float 3 11 Create Commanding Display The USS Editor can be used to create commanding displays in the USS display format 3 11 1 Lesson in creating Commanding displays 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Open the System Configuration Browser f 7 7 System Configuratio
181. de 5 3 14 Undocking Windows 5 3 14 1 Prerequisites e At least one display must be open and selected 5 3 14 2 Undocking Windows USS executor allows to undock windows from the executor so that they open in an external standalone window All or just a single undocked window can be docked back into the executor Only one window at a time can be undocked so there s no multiple undocking although multiple docking is possible To undock windows e Choose Window Undock in the executor The selected display is opened in an external standalone window gt Untitled COL Go Home MCE PII E3 File Navigate Options Window Help al s 5 3 15 Docking Windows 5 3 15 1 Prerequisites e At least one window must have been undocked 5 3 15 2 Docking Windows Undocked windows which are displays which have been opened in an external standalone window can be docked back into the executor Either a single display can be docked back or all undocked windows can be docked back into the executor But there s no multiple undocking though 178 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION 5 3 15 2 1 Docking a Single Window You can dock a single selected undocked window back into the executor To dock a single window e Select the undocked window e Choose Window gt Dock in the undocked that is external standalone display Untitled COL_Go_Home_MCCIMIEE3 File Navigate Options Window Help mu lt Dock Ctrl D Al
182. e Background Color Background Symbol Library Name Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button Context Help URL Opsname R 238 G 238 B 238 FEEEEEE Target System Dimensions Height 1 560 Width 880 9 Information Description Title HRM Actration 7 Log Insert New Change Entry Select Change Entry 1 HRM ACTIVATION NOTE The redundant 28 V power supplies from PDU1 and PDU2 Outlet 40 on both PDU s for the HRM are shared with other equipment MMU CMU HSE HUB These outlets are switched ON at COL activation and remain permanently ON independent of the HRM status For activation deactivation two Pwr converters in the HRM are used to supply Pwr to nominal and redundant HRM cores which are cold redundant via the HRM internal common Pwr Bus This procedure uses the FLAP HRM Activation which switches ON both HRM Pwr converters activates the nominal HRM core if the nominal HRM core activation fails the redundant HRM core is automatically activated instead starts RT acquisition amp monitoring of HRM data enables the HRM MMU link Master MMU Fiber Optic Jumper installation must be completed before starting this step After HRM activation correct configuration of HCOR APS HRFM must be verified to support downlink of Ku band packets via the HRM T System Configuration Browser 8x Qe Symbol Library 8x By Consistency Renta 08x
183. e Are Angle Length 180 Are Start Angle 0 Arc Properties in Property Editor The Navigation Button has some unique properties e Arc Angle Length Length of the arc in degrees 360 for a full ellipse e Arc Start Angle Start angle of the arc in degrees clockwise start at right most point 4 6 9 Polyline and Polygon To add or delete a point to a polyline or polygon right click on a point of the shape and select appropri ate action on the context menu that appears Polygon and Polyline popup Delete Point Add Point Edit Point Polygon Popup menu Polygon and Polyline popup actions e Add Point Adds a point to pick point green box chosen e Delete Point Delete point pick point green box chosen e Edit Point Opens small dialog for editing point pick point green box chosen i e x and y coor dinate 4 6 10 Linear and Elliptic Tickmeter Thermometer and Tankmeter Data sources can be added to meters by dragging TM from the System Configuration Browser The meters consist of two major variations LinearTickMeter EllipticTickMeter and Thermometer with tick indicators and the TankMeter with none The meters cannot be rotated so placing must be done with properties on the meter elements i e Linear Tick Meters gauge can be rotated with the orientation property 4 6 10 1 Linear Tick Meter The Linear Tick Meter is a linear gauge with a minimum and maximum Most of the properties of the Linear Tick Meter are
184. e Axis Show Legend v Legend Styles Label Style Style Exanple ja Field Style Style Example Unit Style Style Example Legend Layout No of Sections 1 Field Columns 6 Field Decimals 2 OK Cancel Line Graph Legend properties in Graph dialog Line Graph Legend Tab properties e Show Legend If checked legend will be shown drawn Legend Styles Box Click buttons to edit label field and unit text styles respectively e Label Color Click button to edit label colour in legend e No of Sections Sets number of section the legend fields are put into e Field Columns Defines how many columns the fields uses i e how many numbers e Field Decimals Of the columns above field decimals defines how many of them are used for decimal part of field value Line Graph General properties General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Title LineGraph Background Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF Plot Background Color R 255 G 255 B 255 FFFFFF Step Curve Show Value Marker A _ Q Horizontal Orientation e Vertical Expiration Time Method _ O Samples OK Cancel Line Graph General properties in Graph dialog Line Graph General Tab properties 142 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES Title Title of graph in display Background Color Defines bac
185. e data source is a enumeration via the Symbol State Mapper dialog Value symbol State INVALID STATE e red On C green Symbol State Mapping Dialog available from Property Editor Here data source enumeration on the left can be mapped to symbol states on the right 4 7 Data Sources A Data Source bound to an element provides data to the element when the display is executed The Editor supports binding properties of an element to a data source When the data source provides the value that the element presents e g the value of a Data Field or the temperature value of a thermometer the Data Source is a Value property the other possibility is a dynamic property which determines other properties of the element than its value e g its colour or position on the display Another aspect of a data source is whether it is external or a Computation External data sources are simply MDB end items without further processing Computations are defined by specification of an expression and can perform calculations on other data sources as described in Section 4 7 4 4 7 1 Data Source Dialog Data sources can be bound to a property in two different ways e Using drag and drop from the System configuration browser e Using the Data Source dialog as described in this section The Data Source dialog is opened from the Property editor by clicking the database icon for dynamic properties or the button with three dots for value
186. e the Opsname for a parameter PUI Both files are searched in the same directory as the display or in any of its parent directories See the example displays that are delivered with USS for an example of how the configuration files should look like Example 7 1 Batch converting a set of PCS displays The following command reads all PCS displays in the directory examples import pcs xml con verts them to USS format and writes the result into the output directory tmp ss con ens a o tme cxamples import pcs xml 7 2 PWS FWDU Displays This section describes how PWS FWDU displays are imported and converted to USS format The import of FWDU displays involves four steps 1 Extracting the FWDU displays from MDB 2 Generate XML SCOE files containing all referenced data if not yet available 3 Converting the Sammi ASCII format to USS format General Guidelines e If converting extracted displays from FWDU format into USS format use new empty temporary directories for conversion output Do not do any manual conversions under the uss project direc tory e If Adding new uss displays from external source e g FWDU conversion output to MDB first copy files to uss project directory Be careful to use the right directory names and file names both must map to valid MDB path and end item names 7 2 1 Extracting FWDU Displays from MDB The first step to extract FWDU displays is to read the FWDU ASCII definition of each display from the M
187. eanProcEntry attribute Interpretation The x position of the row Integer procedure step step title in number of characters If there is a param this must be a step otherwise this is a step title Steps are displayed parcus Siting with style YellowFa Step titles are displayed with style Mnemonic With USS version 2 15 a telemetry field is displayed for the parameter The text to display as step or 219 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS Table 7 11 continued LeanProcEntry attribute Interpretation 220 Supported with USS version 2 15 Displays a green led symbol if the parameters engineering value is gt the ExpectedMin and lt the ExpectedMax value The ExpectedMax value is optional If ExpectedMax is not specified the led will only be displayed green if the parameter engineering value equals the ExpectedMin Satmon seems to allow usage of either the raw or the engi neering value as Expect edMin and Expect edMax for state codes The led display wil be wrong if the raw value has been used This might be im proved if con figu ration informa tion is avail able for all param eters CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS Table 7 11 continued LeanProcEntry attribute ExpectedMax 7 4 2 USS Satmon importer version 2 12 known issues This section lists the known deviations of USS Satmon displays compar
188. ecial mode of the Editor illustrated in the screen shot below First set the button to the needed size This is important as later resizing of the button will also resize its contents Right click it and select Edit Released Pressed Button Compound In the button edit mode only a subset of the element types are available When finished editing close the CompoundEdit tab to return to normal mode 7 CompoundEdit OpenDisplay ReleasedCompound184 x The button editor Creating a Command Button by selecting from a list of defined commands e Open System Configuration Browser e Select OPS View Onboard Commands OPS View Onboard Commands GJ TLM 3 Generate Tlm Report Cmd SW D tart Cyclic Tim Packet Cmd SW 3 Stop Cyclic Tlm Packet Cmd SW o 3 TREND J EPF o HLCU a CI 1 raa n Ix stan Grice Us Symbol Library 8x ap System Configuration Browser 4 8 x E Consistency Results 8 x Select onboard command e Navigate to the command you want to attach to a command button You may also use the search function e Drag and drop command to display area The Create Command window opens 135 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Create Command Please select the command to create from the list and choose the command type by selecting one of the radio buttons DMS_TLM_Start_Cyclic_Tim_Packet_Cmd_Sw Structured v with input fields Q S
189. eck the property Auto Scale Image d Property Editor x enx Symbol Symboli 9 Appearance Auto Scale Image L Keep Aspect Ratio L Reset Image Size Reset to 20x20 Rotation Degrees 270 Shape Fill Color R 212 G 212 B 212 Shape Fill Style None Show Data Indicators 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 155 Width 72 X 271 Y 88 9 Information Comment L Name symbol Tooltip 16 Observe that the icon of the symbol element is resize to its real size in pixels and but the extend of the symbol element is persistent 77 3 14 CREATE NEW SYMBOLS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL When adding compound symbol to a display this can be done in two distinct ways As a symbol reference classical way and as a the components inside the compound symbol recreating the components r Qt Symbol Library 4 x Comi Add Symbol to Display Add Symbol Components to Display Edit Symbol Delete Symbol Focus to Properties Editor Popup menu in symbol library view 3 14 Create New Symbols The USS Editor can be used to create new symbols and symbol libraries 3 14 1 Lesson in creating Symbols 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Open the Symbol Library from menu View Symbol Library it USS Display Editor 2 6 0 INES File Edit View Tools Element Window Help ajajajaja o a e elo jaj a al
190. ect Ratio L Reset Image Size Reset to 155x72 Rotation Degrees 0 Shape Fill Color E R 212 G 212 B 212 Shape Fill Style None r Show Data Indicators 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 220 Width 380 X 140 Y 170 P 9 Information Comment Name Symbol Selected Elements 1 element Tooltip 9 Misc L 2 L Corner Fill Color MMBR 0G 06 0 000000 I Es System Configuration Browser A x Ih Consistency Results x L Synoptic Hierarchy x Symbol element properties are shown 8 Undock the Property Editor and click the property Reset Image Size button to reset back to the original size of the symbol 75 3 13 ADD SYMBOLS Property is reset 9 Re dock the Property Editor CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL F Property Editor x enx Symbol Symbol 9 Appearance a Auto Scale Image Keep Aspect Ratio imd Reset Image Size Reset to 155x72 Rotation Degrees 0 Shape Fill Color E R 212 6 212B 212 Shape Fill Style None Show Data Indicators 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 220 Width 380 X 140 Y 170 9 Information Comment Name Symbol element Tooltip jz Selected Elements The display shows the reset symbol element in the display 10 In the property editor click the property Symbol Name lig Property Editor x Symbol Symbol Be Show Data Indicators 9 Dimensions Depth Height Width X Y 9 Information Comment Name Symb
191. ect them all by using the keyboard combination CTRL A 4 In the Property Editor click to edit the colour and click button to open colour dialog Select tab RGB and choose the green colour Red 6 Green 152 Blue 6 da Pick a Colour My Colours Swatches HSB RGB Preview M R 6 G 152 B 6 069806 Set as colour Rename ok Cancel Reset 5 Click OK to the colour dialog 47 3 9 CREATE ASCII DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL LB USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help malo 208 atoms lo 200 lalala o nalejeja a a ajaj w w amp e 8 4 x X Property Editor x aa displaye amp x lt Label gt Labell lt Label gt Labell 2 lt Label gt Labell 3 lt Label gt Labell 4 Label Labell 5 Best Text Labels A est Text Label SE Best Tek Label 9 Appearance Best Tek LabelB Font Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular Best TeK LabelB Font Color NN 6152 B 6 069806 z Label Text Autosize L Label Text Horizontal Alignment eft Label Text Yertical Alignment Center 9 Behaviour Auto Text OFF
192. ed in any standard text editor 4 11 2 Preferences The preferences setting are accessed though Edit Preferences on the menu These are the preference pages e Project Project settings for editor Contains project root settings and settings for auto save func tion see the Auto Saver Project The root folder for the synoptic hierarchy Autosave Interval Determines the time the auto save function shall wait before re auto saving open project displays default 300 seconds Autosave Enabled Determines if the auto save function for the editor shall run default on e Display Grid and zoom settings for new displays To change the settings for the current display use the View Settings e Consistency OpNom setting for the Consistency Checker The consistency checker verifies that the text of labels conforms to OpNom Used OpNom language Determines which language dictionary to use in addition to the OpNom dictionary English words in the selected dictionary will not be flagged by the con sistency checker Used OpNom check Toggles the ESA Annex to the OpNom on off e Data Source Context setting for the data source editing defines which contexts shall be possible and which are the default context Context List Determines the list of contexts used by the editor mainly in the data source dialog but also during drag and drop operations from the System Configuration Browser 163 4 11 CONFIGURING THE
193. ed line stacked l Strip chart line graph Filled line dist graph Line graph Strip chart graph Line graph Raster strip chart i Stacked strip chart l Strip chart line graph Vertical strip chart Linepraph Verca graph Raster vertical strip i S EE Line graph vertical Waterfall graph Raster waterfall graph Point chart graph Point line graph Spectro graph Stacked spectro graph Smooth spectro graph Smooth stacked spectro graph Pie chart graph Radial graph Radial NE graph Realtime line graph Realtime step graph Scatter graph Impulse graph Impulse to zero graph Web graph Multi Y web graph Surface graph Vector graph Flowfield graph Contour graph Filled contour graph Blocks graph Packed blocks graph Indicator graph Controller graph Horizontal controller eraph Fader graph Dials graph Dials with history eraph Dial 360 graph Line graph With value markers With realtime attribute With realtime and step attributes Line graph Line graph Bar meter Elliptic meter Elliptic meter Elliptic meter 20 NO 7 3 GWDU DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS Table 7 1 continued Artificial horizon LM Dynamic drawing gum mo Moving drawing ELO Data field Tegendgraph Coorgaph SSCS Suegaph Box graph J Cdega gt Triangle graph 7 3 1 2 Conversion of GWDU Attributes GWDU attributes are the form
194. ed to the original Satmon execu tor 7 4 2 1 Alphanumeric Displays e No telemetry is displayed for OutputAlphas using a SID in the Param attribute On a few newer displays the SID is used to identify an item instead of the expected opsname These items won t be acquired by USS and therefore not be displayed e Telemetry fields draw outside of their bounds making values unreadable USS does not perform clipping on field contents like Satmon but draws outside of the field bounds if the field is too small Space for 2 characters is lost by default because dqi characters are turned on for all fields This could be improved by preparing a mcs dqistyle for Satmon which does not have dqi characters e Some static text elements are colored white instead of their original color New styles may have been used in Satmon created after June 2006 which are unknown to the importer and therefore are colored with the default white see Table 7 5 e Freeze mode does not work for all Satmon displays Workaround Add correct SID identifier to the USS DataSource description 7 4 2 2 Plots e No graph is displayed if it contains discrete measurements This could be fixed by updating all datasources with the correct type information from a XML SCOE configuration 7 4 2 3 Procedure Displays e Telemetry field for a procedure step is missing in all procedure displays e Range monitoring and indication for the parameter referenced in a procedure step is missing in
195. efine your own DOI styles it is helpful to understand how USS looks for an applicable style when the value of a data field needs to be updated The process is as follows 1 Determine the target of the current display say MCS The target of a display is a simple string that can be defined in the editor It defines the target environment where the display is designed to run Current targets are PWS PCS MCS and CGS It is assumed that all displays with the same target should have the same look and feel 2 Search and read the DOI style file for the target say mcs dgistyle xml A target to style file mapping is defined in etc uss properties 3 Look up the DOI entry for the combination of acquisition status monitoring status and delta monitoring status of the current parameter value 4 Render the data field with the colors and flags found in the previous step As a last example Figure 2 5 shows part of the DOI settings for a PWS display Compare this with Figure 2 4 and you can see that the same parameter status values can lead to very different output This flexibility allows to use USS in different operational environments with different demands on visualiza tion and user feedback 11 2 4 DATA QUALITY INDICATION CHAPTER 2 CONCEPTS Figure 2 5 DOI help table for a PWS display PWS Data Quality Indicators DQI ae a ee a S O Des a SOREN couen DANGER HIGH LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION
196. efined dynamic symbols in the USS library can be inspected as described in the section Pre Defined Dynamic Symbols 151 4 7 DATA SOURCES 4 7 4 1 Operators CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Supported operators for expressions are divided into several different types e numerical e boolean e string e list e conditional e and other operators The following table explains the different operator types Table 4 8 Operators Numerical operators Boolean operators String operators List operators Other operators t Basic operators 7o Modulo operators Power operators XOT operators amp amp and And operators or Or operators not Not operators lt less operator gt great operator less or equal operator gt great or equal operator equals equal operators l lt gt not equal operators 2 strings are equal l 2 strings are not equal 2 strings are not equal The first string less lexically than the second one gt The first string great lexically than the second one lt The first string less or equals lexically than the second one gt The first string great or equals lexically than the second one Concat string Concat two lists Substract a list to another one in Test if an element is inside a list set a variable operator absolute value power 2 operator Percent operators 1 50 2
197. erarchy tool view Symbol Library Toggles the Symbol Library tool view Property Editor Toggles the Property Editor tool view View Settings Toggles the View Settings tool view Consistency Results Toggles the Consistency Results tool view Toolbar Sub menu Toolbar for adding removing toolbars Refresh Refresh of open views 4 2 2 3 Editor Tools Menu Item The following operations are available from the Tools menu some operations are inactive if they are not feasible Preview Display Opens the Previewer for currently selected display Open Display in Executor Opens the Executor for currently selected display save needed Consistency Check Executes a consistency check for currently selected display opens Consis tency Results on errors Run Batch Operation Open the dialog for executing batch operations Find Parameter Open dialog for selecting an end item to search for in project displays in project root folder 4 2 2 4 Editor Element Menu Item The following operations are available from the Element menu some operations are inactive if they are not feasible Add Sub menu containing all display elements that can be added to current selected display Align Sub menu containing all alignment operations that can applied to current selected elements Grouping Sub menu containing all grouping operations that can applied to current selected ele ments Move Sub menu containing all movement operations that can ap
198. ersion number c System mission System mission setting d System element config System element configuration 9 Click on the MDB CDU category Display CU version 0 consistency CU test version 1 R Data Source m CU revision 0 R Import z D Database CU path APM COMMON TEST _SUPP GRD_DATA USS 3 MDB General CU issue 0 C MDB CDU CU instance MCS AlV1 Y MDB CCU CU domain CCS MDB SCOE D s MDB CDU Connection Properties The MDB CDU category contains the following properties 43 3 7 GUI ELEMENTS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL a Cu version The CU version to use with CDU b Cu test version The CU test version to use with CDU c Cu revision The CU revision to use with CDU d Cu path The CU path to use with CDU e Cu issue The CU issue to use with CDU f Cu instance The CU instance to use with CDU g Cu domain The CU domain to use with CDU 10 Click on the MDB CCU category 3 Project MDB CCU L Display CU path APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DAI 3 Consistency hee lt D Data Source l CU version 1 3 Import 3 Database CU issue 0 3 MDB General CU revision 0 L MDB CDU MDB CCU Connection Properties 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE The MDB CCU category contains the following properties a Cu path The CU path to use with CCU b Cu name The CU name to use with CCU c Cu version The CU version to u
199. es The align operations exploit the concept of primary and secondary se lection Elements are deselected by clicking the display area outside the selection or selecting Edit Deselect Further selection operations available on the Edit menu are e Select Invert e Select All e Select Elements of Same Type e Select Elements of Same Depth 4 4 4 Basic Operations The Editor generally tries to position a element to have valid positions and size when being moved resized or likewise with mouse actions i e like mouse move of element outside display borders How ever if special settings for element value is needed the property editor can be used to set the values i e set element position outside display dimensions e Undo redo All operations performed on elements in the Editor can be undone Edit Undo or Ctrl Z and redone Edit Redo or Ctrl Shift Z Note that each display has its own list of undoable operations This implies e g that cut and paste of an element from display 1 to display 2 followed by Undo on display 2 will only undo the paste operation not the cut operation To make the element reappear on display 1 Undo must also be performed there This approach is identical to e g Microsoft Word when working on multiple documents e Move Selected element s can be moved with the Element Move commands or the arrow keys on the keyboard e Drag drop Element s can be dragged and dropped between displays in the Sy
200. f Stat DMC oo S Displays containing parameter COL Activation Part 1 ACT_PT_1 Start PDU 1 28V Subsys PDU1 28V SS PDU1 Outlet 29 PDU1 OUT29 Select All DMS Monitoring 3 EPDS Subsys MON_3 re Close 6 Click Open 7 Click Close Executor opens selected display 5 4 9 Finding Text in Display 5 4 9 1 Prerequisites e At least one display must be open and selected 5 4 9 2 Finding Text in Display You can find text in displays This is done by using incremental search To find text in display 1 Choose Navigate gt Find Text As You Type 2 In the status bar the text Starting find as you type is displayed 3 Enter text Each time a new character is typed it is appended to the previously entered text All elements where the entered text appears either as static text or as a parameter name bound to that element are highlighted which means that the text is surrounded by an orange box Status bar shows how many occurrences have been found in this case 1 occurrence for typing en 187 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 File Navigate View Options Window Help elelee ale een 20 00 00 000 6 COL Synoptics H 6 COL Synoptics Home Page COL Home Page MCD External Payload Find en 1 occurences 4 Press Esc to finish Highlighting is re
201. f the CGS type from the config uration was known for ev CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS Table 7 8 continued OuiputAlpha attribute The length of this FormatStr String OutputAlpha in number of characters LADTID Unknown Value is always 6 ShowTail Unknown Value is always 1 Unknown Value is always 0 7 4 14 Plot Displays This section describes the interpretation of elements used in plot displays Table 7 9 PlotDef attributes PlotDef attribute The domain axis duration in TimeDuration Integer seconds characters If this is true then auto scaling of the range axis is YAutoScale Boolean performed to match value range of received telemetry This overrides the range set by YMin and YMax Show value markers only if DotsOnly Boolean this is true and do not draw a line between values Not supported Seems to be always hh nn USS TimeLabelFormat String automatically formats the time label showing also seconds and milliseconds if possible Not supported Known values l l are UTC and CSECYEAR OS dad USS always uses the mission time as time base for graphs YTickSep LargeTickSep XAxisColour YAxisColour YAxisLabelFormat TimeParamLADTID IgnoreNoData The following table describes the attributes of the PlotLineDef element used inside PlotDef ele ments to bind a line in a plot to a parameter and define its appearance 217 7 4 SATM
202. for the specific milestones Will be maintained over the time Can also include use cases which are not scheduled for a release Effort estimates are very rough in developer weeks See Development Plan RID Review Item Disposition S S S Subsystem S W Software SA Safety Analysis SAS Special Application Software interface via CGS API to CGS kernel SCA Software Criticality Analysis SEEA Software Error Effect Analysis SID Short Identifier SMD Software Maintenance Disposition SOW Statement of Work SPA Software Problem Analysis SPR System Problem Report Software Problem Report SRR System Requirements Review See Review of user requirements and overall development plan ning SSMB Space Station Manned Base SSO Safety Significant Operation Stale When used as a status character parameter is in the data stream but connection with the data stream has been lost See IDAGS State The physical configuration On Off Open Close etc at the subsystem level or below See IDAGS Status A qualitative assessment of the overall condition or health of the system at any level See IDAGS SW Software SWPA Software Product Assurance Symbol see graphic symbol See IDAGS 262 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY T TBD To Be Determined Defined Done TC Telecommand TES Test Evaluation Software software performing real time data acquisition calibration monitoring automatic and manual procedure execution command build command ver
203. g 2 Undock the view called Property Editor by clicking with left mouse button on the undock icon for the Property Editor View The Property Editor will undock and still function as part of the editor application ling Property Editor x Symbol Library i eax display 1 Be 9 Appearance Background Color Background Symbol Library Name Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname Source ement Configuration II i Jl II a Jl Souri DI Jl D ha H Ip MI nl il Tree Versiotr iurce MDB Ye Target System 9 Dimensions Height Width 9 Information Description Title 9 Log Insert New Change Entry Select Change Entry R 238 238 B 238 EEEEEE Aissior ce MDB System Tree Internal Yer em v v L MODE MCS y 560 880 Add New Log Entry The Property Editor is undocked and can be moved around independently of the main applica tion on computers with multiple screens the view can be moved to another screen to better take advanced of the setup 3 Re dock the Property Editor by clicking with left mouse button on the dock icon in the undocked view The Property Editor will dock again 18 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI M5 USS Display Editor 2 6 0 ICE File Edit View Tools Element Window Help almlo a ula jmlolol D ula
204. g limit of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterHighWarningLimit parameter String Number Example parametro piola casa EA en ME LB ParameterLimitId Returns the limit identifier of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition parameterLimitId parameter String Integer Example parameter Tos Tec sinesuenmpieMGN S AA ParameterLowCautionLimit Returns the low caution limit of a parameter specified by a string con stant Definition parameterLowCautionLimit parameter String Number Example SEL eddie Cattaneo O ParameterLowWarningLimit Returns the low warning limit of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition 155 4 7 DATA SOURCES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR parameterLowWarningLimit parameter String Number Example Parmeter ERRA EE GE EE EDE E ORC USE ai MDMA cu ParameterMonitoringStatus Returns the monitoring status of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition DacaneceerMoniroringStauvus parameter String oi dm Example parameteren eorn o tatus CMS UA eiue Rem eMC Sea ESTERI IE DARET S ParameterProcessingStatus Returns the processing status of a parameter specified by a string con stant Definition parameterProcessingStatus parameter String String Example parcomerenBProcesswndgsbeaus Teu me gibus Temp T DMO e NEG SIDE ParameterRaw Value Returns the raw value of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition
205. ge the work ing directory to D NProgramsNuss x y z IMPORTANT D The installation path may not contain white space characters 2 Read the README file for general and latest information 3 Read the INSTALL file for detailed installation instructions 4 Create desktop links for editor and executor e Right click on uss editor bat select Send To Desktop create shortcut e Right click on uss executor bat select Send Tol Desktop create shortcut 1 14 Integration with CGS To integrate USS with CGS 6 3 1 or higher the CGS Installer should be used It does automatically unpack the USS archives and changes some properties to meet the CGS needs USS Editor and Executor are integrated in the top level user interfaces of CGS Generation of XML SCOE files and export of displays from data base to file system is automatically done by CGS when required USS displays stored in the mission data base are available through HLCL UCL commanding and CGS screen setups For further information refer to CGS User Manual 6 3 1 Section 7 3 2 4 13 USS Displays 1 15 Integration with CD MCS The USS executor provides status lights indicating telemetry and link status in the status bar of its main window The configuration of these lights needs to be adjusted for CD MCS This is done by renaming the file cdmcs server properties xml to server properties xml in the etc directory of the installed product 1 2 Configuring System Settings Afte
206. ger element Width xsd integer element Height xsd integer element Name text element Depth xsd integer element Tooltip text element Comment text element DataBindings eset raouiie Class 1 Yriirinkec hash setc I element DataBinding element DataSource _DataSsSourceOrRef L element DynamicProperty 4 Jo CI Rae Lan SM MESE AP Cds ii AE YDRAW COLORS EEES IO A PASS SET EI ded ea a Iie lt 4 CORNER COLOR T Ellipse Shape EllipticTickMeter element StartAngle xsd decimal element SweepAngle xsd decimal Semen Dra was odres ex Sel boolean a TickMeter ExitCommand Command ExternalDataSource DataSource Externallmage element arameo Image Field element Rows xsd integer 232 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA element Columns xsd integer element Format text element Decimals xsd integer cu ormemessu E cS element ShowUnit xsd boolean element ShowIndicators xsd boolean L element AutoWrap xsd boolean element TextStyle TextStyle L element UnitTextStyle TextStyle element Rotation _RotationEnum element OverflowBehavior OVERWRITE EXPAND SHOW _ HASHES CLIP LEFT gt YCEE ES b element OverrideDQI xsd boolean element FillStyle FillStyle Element FileChooser element StartDirectory text element FilterList ETIE class p vLlinkecelist b element F
207. graph opening dialog with a sub set of line graph properties e Select Sub Graph Control sub graphs line graphs change ordering with up down arrows select sub graph with drop down combo box and press mini button to edit currently select sub graph opening dialog with a sub set of line graph properties e Sub Graph Weight Set the currently select sub graph weight see above for weighting explanation 4 6 7 3 Bar Graphs The Bar Graph element is a chart graph histogram The Bar Graph has many common properties with the line graph containing more or less as sub set of line graph properties Bar Graph Range Tab differences compared to line graph e Contains only one range axis definition common for all range data source e No Tick and therefore no property Rotate Tick Label e No Auto Move property e Bar Graph has the possibility to limit the automatic range properties Automatic Range Low er Upper Bound Bar Graph Domain Tab differences compared to line graph e Bar Graph does not have any domain data sources or axes therefore only domain axis property Label Bar Graph General Tab differences compared to line graph e Bar Graph does not have value markers and step curve properties 143 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 8 Arc The Arc element is drawn as a sub section of an ellipse where the size of the element determines the shape of the ellipse Arc properties 9 Appearanc
208. gwdu mcs APM COL CC MCS OPS KS A B x CMD QUEUES gwdu GE 9 Appearance a Background Color E RO G 0 B 0 000 Background Symbol Libr Background Symbol Name v Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname SYN_Cmd_Queues MCS Command Queues Ii The imported display is shown shown in the editor the import process is seamless and a conver sion is done between GWDU and USS format The display can now be edited and saved to the USS display format 5 In the Property Editor check the display import information given by the Source information 35 3 6 IMPORT EXISTING DISPLAYS CMD_QUEUES gwdu AE Background Color Background Symbol Library Name Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname Durce MDB CU Consistency Date ource MDB CU Internal Version ource MDB CU Name MDB CU Pathname ource MDB CU Scope ource Durce ource MDB CU Version MDB Element Configuration ource MDB Host ource MDB Instance ource MDB Mission ource MDB System Tree Internal version ource MDB em Tree Version ource MDB Version Target System 9 Dimensions Height Width 9 Information Description Title Log Insert New Change Entry Select Change Entry Selected Change Author DUC G L A L La LO LA L L L L La L L La 9 Appearan
209. he file system The Editor comes with static and dynamic symbols as defined in Appendix C of the Display and Graphics Commonality Standard The symbols are found in the Symbol Library and can be dragged and dropped onto the synoptic display The Editor can import existing display definitions from e SAMMI II e DataView Gipsy e PREP Imported display definitions become USS displays meaning that they will have the USS XML based file format and the uss file extension The imported displays cannot be exported back into the legacy display formats 4 2 The Editor Workspace When opening the Editor the workspace will appear The workspace contains menus toolbars the display area in a tab window to the right and a number of views to the left The Editor menus adapt to selections and disables options that are not possible examples are MDB and element operations 115 4 2 THE EDITOR WORKSPACE CHAPTER 4 EDITOR USS Display Editor 1 4 0pre File Edit View Tools Element Window Help 8 le ejo ma gt e 9 Property editor x f i Ez display x 1 displays 1 Background color Opsname Target system Height Width E Synoptic hierarchy X uml Open Displays ec No title assigned on display 1 e ls C uss use m ain sh arexdisplaysiuss 9 GE arm 9 L5 FLTSYS cJ ors o 7 INT o CI PAYLOAD ES MCS Status uss
210. he required conversion is a character indicating how the argument should be formatted The set of valid conversions for a given argument depends on the argument s data type An empty of string flag will treat the data as a string Conversions Table 4 3 Conversions Argument Category integral The result is formatted as a decimal integer integral The result is formatted as an octal integer The result is formatted as a hexadecimal integral integer The result is formatted as a decimal number in computerized scientific notation floating point The result is formatted as a decimal number floating point The result is formatted using computerized scientific notation or decimal format depending on the precision and the value after rounding The result is formatted as a hexadecimal floating point floating point number with a significand and an exponent Sn The result is treated as a string and is not E formatted String Statecode etc floating point Flags The following table summarizes the supported flags y means the flag is supported for the indicated argument types Table 4 4 Flags Floating Point The result will be left justified 144 3 The result should use a y y conversion dependent alternate form y 4 The result will always include a sign Y 4 The result will include a leading space y y for positive values The result will be zero padded The result will include locale specific y 2 y 5 i
211. how Execute Button L e Context Help URL Opsname satmon 1092 Targ et System MCS _ Iw 9 Dimensions Height 364 Width 782 9 Information Description Title Systems Comms System Bu 9 Log l l Insert New Change Entry Add New Log Entry v T il LD The imported display is shown shown in the editor The display can now be edited and saved to the USS display format 12 In the Property Editor check the import information iw Property Editor x nx 1092 xml 9 Appearance Background Color BI F o G 0 B O 000000 Background Symbol Library Name Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname satmon_1092 1 Target System IMCS Dimensions Height 364 Width 782 9 Information Description Title 7 Log Insen New Change Entry Select Change Entry 1 0 2 JYOte Add New Log Entry v The Property Editor shows the properties for the imported display This concludes the lesson in the USS Editors import mechanism The USS Editor and Executor use the same import mechanism 3 6 2 Lesson in batch importing displays The USS Batch operation tool dialog can be used to performe a operation on multiple displays Batch operations e HTML reports A HTML Report contains a picture of display and display information e Cons
212. ht click a display in the hierarchy and selecting Add Navigation to display Displays in the upper list are already open Click a display in this list to set focus to it The displays in the second list can be opened by right clicking and selecting Open Display 4 10 2 Consistency Check By selecting the Consistency check from the Tools menu the current display is checked against the current SCOE file A report is generated listing all inconsistencies e For all data sources Opsname SID and Pathname are checked if they match each other If the Opsname is found but the SID or Pathname does not match the data in the SCOE file then the SID or Pathname found in the SCOE file is proposed in the report e The data source Unit is checked if it matches the data in the SCOE file e The data source Type is checked If the data type is enum the data is checked if it contains all the statecodes in the right order e Computation data sources will be checked if they return any syntax errors 161 4 10 WORKING WITH PROJECTS CHAPTER 4 EDITOR e Displays referenced as navigation target by elements e g navigation buttons at first is checked if the display exists in file system Second it is checked how navigation target is defined In case it is defined as Filename consistency check is finished In other case it is defined as Alias e g OPS NAME or MDB Path it is checked if type of display is USS DISPLAY then is checked if
213. ick Color Tick Indicator Calor Tick Indicator Thickness 9 Behaviour Field Style Meter Color Show Status Meter Major Tick Frequency Meter Tick Base Meter Tick Unit o Dimensions 9 Font Field amp Label Font Field amp Label Font Color Tick Label Font Tick Label Font Color 9 General Data Source o Information 9 Limits Domain Meter Maximum Meter Minimum CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Bar v Left or Top v EE F 0 6 0 B 0 2000000 None m 120 300 MM F 0 G 0 B 0 000000 R 255 6 255 B 255 SFFFFFF 6 Disabled v Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular D EH F0 G 0 B 0 000000 Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular D MM F0 6 0 B 0 000000 MeterDS2 50 Elliptic Tick Meter properties in Property Editor The Elliptic Tick Meter has some unique properties but otherwise the same properties as the linear tick meter except property Orientation e Draw as Circle Instead of drawing an ellipse a circle is drawn instead 4 6 10 3 Thermometer The Thermometer is equivalent to the Linear Tick Meter except for one property and the appearance i e drawn as a thermometer kelvin and degrees Celsius drawn Thermometer properties 9 Appearance Border Color Border Used Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Meter Tick Label Style Shape Fill Color Shape Fill Style Tick Color Tick Indicator Color Tick Indicator Thickness 9 Behaviour Field Style Meter Color Show St
214. ick the button Edit and in the pop up menu select Create New Library New Library kd Enter the name of the new Library Dialog for setting new library name is shown Set name to Test Library 7 New Library Enter the name of the new Library Test Library Click OK and select new Library in the drop down box ComboBox gi Symbol Library 4 x ME Property Editor ano J Test Library M Edit A new empty symbol library is created Add a new symbol created from the previously created label by clicking the button Edit in the symbol library and selecting Create Symbol from Selected Elements Create new Symbol from elements F3 Name O Image GYG Type _ a SubDisplay USS Dialog shows the configuration possibilities for the new symbol Select Type Image SVG and name the symbol Test Symbol Create new Symbol from element F3 Name Test Symbol Image SVG Type CO SubDisplay USS Click button OK to create symbol 80 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 14 CREATE NEW SYMBOLS ys Symbol Library x Property Editor ax 3 Test Library v Edit Test Symbol The symbol is created in the new library Symbols can only be created in the user symbol libraries because predefined symbol libraries are distributed as part of the USS package an will be over written on system update
215. ienna2 205 104 59 sienna3 L139 71 36 sienna4 255 211 155 p r Ee 230 197 145 burlywood2 205 170 125 burlywood3 139 115 65 burlywood4 255 231 186 wheatl 236 216 174 wheat2 205 186 150 wheat3 139 126 102 wheat4 255 165 79 Lan l 230 L54 73 tan2 205 133 63 tan3 139 90 43 tan4 255 127 36 chocolatel 299 119 SS chocolate2 205 102 29 chocolate3 13939 69 19 chocolate4 255 4e Ae E e TT TT 238 44 44 Pine Sor e 205 36 36 Lirebricks L39 26 26 Egusetagoed 25b 64 64 brownl 259 59 59 brown2 205 oul 51 brown3 L139 395 35 brown4 255 140 105 salmonl 230 130 9e salmon2 205 112 4 salmon3 L39 76 57 salmon4 ZION LOW oe eleme ran 238 149 114 Erone aA lmenZ NES ii e memes ITE MEDI SS LightSalmon4 LS ASS 0 orangel 238 154 0 orange2 ZOD ees U orange3 PSSS 0 orange4 On eee U DarkOrangel IE U DarkOrange2 205 102 U DarkOrange3 is om U DarkOrange4 255 114 86 cos all 250 106G MEE Coral 2 205 91I 69 Corals 139 62 47 coral4 2595 99 71 tomato1 239 92 66 tomato2 205 79 57 tomato3 BI 54 3 tomato4 2o EO 0 OrangeRed1 238 64 U OrangeRed2 ANS 38 U OrangeRed3 qu ec U OrangeRed4 ZI 0 0 redl ADO 0 0 red2 ZU 0 0 red3 247 9 4 RGB COLORS Ss 22 19 ESO 205 ipa 295 Ze ZI SS ZOD Zoo 921085 ES 9 ZI 205 LES Zo Zee IES L LOD dus E S 22199 LEO 205 ES LIO Zoe ZU AES Ow 2 BOS ZO 15519 vu is 205 ISS 224 209 180 10775 iS S 154 104 FE 145 dps Og dhe dE du IES 93 ZO LS Zu ESA
216. ification TEV Test Evaluation Software software to evaluate archived raw and processed data TIFF Tagged Image File Format TM Telemetry Tooltip Small informational pop up window that appears when the cursor is placed over a display object See IDAGS TQVS Training Qualification and Validation Subsystem TS Technical Specification See Spec U UCL User Control Language UCLc User Control Language compiler UHB User Home Base UI User Interface UML Unified Modeling Language www omg org UP Unified Process UR Usability Review Present the system to the end users can also be performed instead of CDR or partial AR URL prefix The URL prefix is the location e g server where the help files lie It is needed because all help links in the display are relative USS Unified Synoptic System W Window A portion of a screen that includes the display and its decoration See IDAGS WWW World Wide Web X XBM X Bitmap XBM is an image file format XML The Extensible Markup Language XML is a W3C recommended general purpose markup lan guage for creating special purpose markup languages It is a simplified subset of SGML capable of describing many different kinds of data XP eXtreme Programming www extremeprogramming org 263 Appendix C References C 1 Reference Documents CGSSUM CGS 6 2 User Manual CGS Software User Manual DGCS Display and Graphics Commonality Standard OpNom05 International Space Stati
217. igure 2 4 DOI help table for an MCS display MCS Data Quality Indicators DQI Status BS nen DANGEKHIOH LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION ACOU RS ounen DANGER HICH LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION ACOU NNN acoureeD GEH ACOU a MN acoUTRED pancer HIGH Linn VIOLATION in umns 0 Ls NN acoUTRED DANGER HIGH LMI VIOLATION UNDEFINED A00U o IMM acoUTRED pancer HIGH Limir VIOLATION UNKNOWN A00U 7 III aner DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION ACOU o IMM acoUTRED DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION ACQU o MIMI eanne DANGER LOW Lumir VIOLATION DISABLED ACOU Co MMMM acoUTRED DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION in umrs 0 1 IMM eanne DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED A00U 12 EINEN acoUTRED DANGER LOW umir VIOLATION unknown Jacou Hs III acouizzo O pisaniED DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION ACQU ia so AcouIRED psamzp DELTA NOMINAL LIM VIOLATION 400U ACOU 16 S Acou psamzp finas owu AcQU 16 o acuso D UNKNOWN 2 acoU 19 MSO Acou O incas GHE 20 SS ACQUIRED IN LIMITS DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION ACQU DOI settings are defined in style files These are XML configuration files and can be changed with any editor For example the file etc mcs_dqistyle xml is the configuration for displays in the MCS environment The file etc pws_dqistyle xml defines the DOI styles for the PWS displays onboard Columbus If you want to d
218. ileChooser FileFilter SLemene wi Xess on text s element Description text x T element UseAbsolutePath xsd boolean InputField PEUR C y Me elementi area NONE SO Si o oo oa Fluid element Name SMA AD M VALCRY J A AO NI SS MEA AS AAA EME ERIT DM RE EN HELIUM HYDROGEN MIXED_GAS_AND_LIQUID ENTERRO CEN NONO CCO OFTAN O A mmol WTOXIC COOLANTS MS EMINUS T WVACUUMS UNA TERES by clemente Color ee oor Graph element GraphDataset GraphDataset erlesutsiohe ideo Mae elemento eben ARORA D A ERA element LegendEnabled xsd boolean j element LegendSections xsd positiveInteger element LegendFieldColumns xsd positiveInteger element LegendFieldDecimals xsd nonNegativelnteger element LegendFieldTextStyle TextStyle element LegendLabelTextStyle TextStyle element LegendUnitTextStyle TextStyle element CriteriaDrawStyles element DrawStyle DrawStyle yy element GraphBackgroundColor Color element PlotBackgroundColor Color element DomainGridlineDrawStyle DrawStyle element RangeGridlineDrawStyle DrawStyle Element GraphDataset element Graph _GraphOrRef 233 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA element CriteriaMap Z ie uri ds co Cios eee E SS Mao element entry element ExternalDataSource Bcc rub co c LeLeren ce 1 by element Computation Computation element DataSourcePair DataSourcePair reference
219. in multiple columns The Satmon executor seems to wrap very long procedures into multiple columns USS always displays procedures as one column 222 Chapter 8 Localizing Displays For Different Languages 8 1 Introduction USS provides support for localizing displays into different languages The support includes the transla tion of textual element attributes To localize displays USS reads localization files that lie in the directory next to the displays Those lo calization files contain replacement mappings in the form key value where the key describes exactly the attribute within an element that needs to be translated and the value contains the translated text The localization files can be generated automatically by a tool called uss 1ocalizer generator The translation itself must be done manually by a professional translator Localizations can exist for many different languages in parallel and are selected by the current Locale setting set in USS 8 2 Translation work flow This section describes the procedure work flow of generating display translations 1 Generate Display with the Editor 2 Generate Localization skeletons 3 Manually translate localization files 4 Open display in Executor Display is automatically translated according to the localization files 8 3 Generating skeletons with the Skeleton Generator Following command reveals the options of the skeleton generator uss localavwer generatom bar h
220. individually for each curve i e range data source Curve Style Box If using user defined curve styles Style solid dashed and dotted colour and line width can be defined for selected range data source see Data set Use Axis Select which Axis to use for selected range data source see Data set Or press buttons or to add respectively remove axes Axis Label The label of the axis Mode Select mode of selected axis see Use Axis select between data set i e values from range data source or Time Based Absolute for time values Rotate Tick Label If checked Tick label is rotated Auto Move If checked Graph will move automatically Always show Zero If checked Graph will always show the zero on the axis Automatic Range If checked Graph will change the range of the axis to keep values 140 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES e Upper Range Upper limit of axis Automatic Range unchecked e Lower Range Lower limit of axis Automatic Range unchecked Line Graph Domain properties General Legend Gridline I Domain Axis Range Axis Axis Label Domain Axis Mode Time Based Absolute v Data Set Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range r Axis Range Upper Lower OK Cancel Line Graph Domain properties in Graph dialog Line Graph Domain Tab properties e Axis Label The label of the axi
221. ing which are described below a Size Selects Paper size in printer b Source Select paper source i e tray in printer c Orientation How the print is oriented on the paper d Margins Margins on the paper 4 Click the tab Appearance to show further properties and check properties Banner Page Print General Page Setup Appearance Color Appearance Quality Monochrome Draft 0 Normal a Color i High Sides Job Attributes One Side Banner Page Priority Tumble lob Name 7 Duplex User Name Cancel 23 3 4 QUICK TUTORIAL CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL The Print dialog shows the Appearance properties for printing which are described below if available a Color Appearance Sets if print should be in color b Quality Select output quality c Sides Select the pages arrangement d Job Attributes Selects job attributes like banner page and priorities 5 Click print to print display The Print is printed on the configured printer with a banner page first 6 In the editor select from menu File Print Preview Print Preview Print Close Example Display The Print Preview dialog shows the expected print layout This concludes the lesson in the USS Editors printing mechanism 3 4 Quick Tutorial This tutorial section explains the preparations needed in order to run both USS executor and USS editor After this it g
222. ing Displays inthe MID 2 s s ace oe Goo ot ea AG a Hee al 159 CONTENTS 4 8 3 Adding a New Display to the MDB eee 159 4 8 8 Forced Open From MDB revert leen 160 255 Delete MUD 2434 5 0446655 oo d ee d RE Sq SS RR SX xa dee d gu 160 4 9 System Configuration Browser les 160 410 Working with P 0Je6lS 4 3430 9 oo ero AAA AAA 161 AU yor Hierarchy s s ea 4 43 P 2055 2 3 909 8 ou ee oOo oo oS REN 161 2 102 Consistency T s uos o epa o 692665 93 RS y Go oboe ded GS 161 4 103 Batch operdlloliS o erario 162 A MIO SdVSES 6255 756 Oe ee este b PUE ARA NOS 3 9 PE SSE GEESE GA 162 411 Contisurme he EOHOE 252 6 545644 E OE ER 265554 OR 4 Dee dd SCR Se ES 163 Ad DV sleM CHIN 2 eed aco oe be ee dei d 1 6 2 9 5 9 95 4 3 09 dog 163 AZ DR ROS sierra brasas ero 9924 59 59 9 4 163 Allo VEW CNES PP ee eee eee a dee CESAR Ed ee eee Rees ee sad 164 Executor 165 Ol ira 334 29 4 6 See eee 232993 5955292534945 225325999 899 165 Sisk Contisurine User Setnes x lt 994 e054 5S 9 SHEE P 9 9 SRE SESE oS 165 Dus Perese sss x 24d 3 9 208 AA 8 3 165 5 1 1 2 Configuring User Settings a uod 444646445 485544 dede ds 165 52 uus Wie BXeOdlOE gt sere ras 99 8 eee ee eee he oes 8 35 166 DILE 3JEEOPOQUUSH S sr concisa XE OR EP EERE Se HESS EE 166 SJ EXI te EXOSHIOE se rr 64 645 56 955554 os SEES SOR SUR S AS 166 Dees C Cc 166 52 Monitoring and Control Configuration e 166 5
223. ioned precedence of uss config over uss properties 1 2 1 Location of SCOE files The location for the SCOE files can be set in uss properties as follows 1 Edit basedir uss x y z etc uss properties with a text editor and set the correspond ing property uss scoe dir to the new location of the SCOE files Example 1 1 Configuring SCOE files in CGS MCS In MCS the SCOE files usually are in CGS_HOME etc mda ccu xml The location can be set with uss scoe dir CGS_HOME etc mda ccu xml 1 3 Getting Started USS consists of two major applications The first one is the editor described in Chapter 4 and the second is the executor described in Chapter 5 The editor is the application for creating USS displays for later execution in the executor The editor supports the definition of layout composition and dynamic properties of synoptic displays The executor executes the displays which have been authored in the editor For an introductory tutorial we suggest to continue with Chapter 3 1 3 1 Starting the Editor The editor is started via a shell script batch file on Windows Open a shell and enter uss editor sh The editor will open in a new window see Figure 1 1 S uss editor sh TIP In MCS the editor and executor can be started from the task selector menu 1 3 GETTING STARTED CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND GETTING STARTED Figure 1 1 Editor window after start M5 USS Display Editor 2 6 0rc2pre
224. is Common q ener cs e oe mls mee e NC cq version O e ccu version CCU internal version number You will get this number using the IMDB CU version manager on the CCU version The generated files will be stored in MCS_HOME mcs_tools data scoeXML lt ccu version gt _0_x xml Copy or move these files to directory lt USSinstallationdir gt share scoe 7 2 3 Converting the FWDU ASCII definition to USS Format The final step is to convert the directory tree containing the wdu files to uss files Mes s convern sal Dar TOETIONI T cir o5 E e ciis e OPTION Specify h for getting a complete list of available options e dest dir Directory where to store the FWDU display files converted to USS with extension uss e source dir Directory containing FWDU display files with extension fwdu 7 2 4 Create HTML report of original PWS FWDU displays This section describes how a HTML report of original PWS FWDU displays can be created in two steps 1 As described above Section 7 2 3 convert PWS FWDU displays to USS format using option e wich will disable the enhanced conversion of command lists and images uss convert sh bat e o dest dir source dir 2 Create HTML report of converted displays Now source directory is destination directory of first step Us rep or stu oeil SoUPIS CC e obi 7 GWDU Displays The import of GWDU displays involves the following steps 1 Extracting the GWDU displays from MDB and converti
225. istency A comparison of display end item references with actual SCOE file set in Editor preferences e Convertion A convertion of a non USS display format to the USS display format 38 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 7 GUI ELEMENTS 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Open batch dialog by selecting from menu Tools Run batch operation Bs Run batch operation x Source directory Browse Destination directory Browse Ready HTML reports Consistency Convert Help The batch dialog is now open 3 Browse via source directory browse button to USS installation directory lt USS_INSTALL_DIR gt examples imp 4 Browse via destination directory browse button to temporary files directpry tmp 5 In the Run batch operation dialog click button Convert to start the convertion of PCS displays 2eading Converting Col CDA 1 and 2 Heater Control VTC1 xml Hep Cancel The batch operation starts and progress is shown in bar 6 The batch operation will continue until all in source directory displays are converted Ready Batch executed without errors Consistency Convert HTML reports Hep Close The batch operation completion is shown in bar and re enabling of buttons This concludes the lesson in the USS Editor
226. itorm scating t f C View Settings 6 x a displays DIST 9 Grid Draw Color Draw Style Draw Thickness Snap to Grid on Move Snap to Grid on Resize Spacing Horizontal Spacing Vertical 9 Zoom Zoom Factor in Percent Zoom Step Size in Percent MA R 204 6 255 B 0 4CC 1 During 7 During dy 10 10 100 10 6 The Display grid colour change as well as the draw style the grid is now fully drawn 4 Now change the following properties a grid spacing to 50 20 Horizontal Vertical b set the Zoom factor to 200 c grid draw thickness to 2 pixels I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help 98 aja Tm 8 ale s az 3 o t O y View Settings 6 x a displays AE 9 Grid Draw Color Draw Style Draw Thickness Snap to Grid on Move Snap to Grid on Resize Spacing Horizontal Spacing Vertical 9 Zoom Zoom Factor in Percent Zoom Step Size in Percent Zoom Step Size in Percent Zoom step size in percent MO R 204 6 255 B 0 FCC Lines 2 6 display 5 amp x 5 Undock the View Settings and to get a better view of the settings changed 40 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL f Fi View Settings x Walk through of the Editor
227. ives a short tutorial on USS editor which shows how to create a new ground ops Satmon like display the converting of GWDU ground displays in batch operation and how to check GWDU displays for consistency It finishes with a tutorial on USS executor which explains how to connect and disconnect a display shows direct commanding of FWDU displays shows a GWDU display as well as imported Satmon displays samples and PCS display samples and shows the commanding via MCS Tools 3 4 1 Preparation This section explains the preparations needed in order to run both USS executor and USS editor 1 Start MCS Console a Start Task Selector by typing ts amp into the command shell b Start TSCV and press continue on all warnings that may appear c Start MCC_ Client e Shutdown MCC Client if already running e Start MCC_Client and wait until it reaches active status d Start HCI Online Test Control e In the HLCL shell type init client to start TM acquistion 2 Keep DOWNLINK_STATUS GWDU display open for later USS side by side test 3 Switch to an empty desktop workspace 4 Open a task selector by opening a shell and typing ts amp into it 24 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 4 QUICK TUTORIAL 3 4 2 Editor Tutorial This section gives a short editor tutorial It shows how to create a new ground ops Satmon like display the converting of GWDU ground displays in a batch operation and how to check GWDU displays for consistency 3 4 2 1 Crea
228. jor Tick Frequency 2 Meter Tick Base 50 Meter Tick Unit 5 7 Re dock the property editor M USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help Wf scaling y 100 W Dina ejeje gt 63 amp X ODI e s s o o a Jala 9 Property Editor x i display i a x lt EllipticTickMeter gt EllipticTickMeterl BBE 9 Appearance Border Color Border Used Draw as Circle Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Meter Tick Label Style Shape Fill Color Shape Fill Style Start Angle Sweep Angle Tick Color Tick Indicator Color Tick Indicator Thickness 9 Behaviour Field Style Meter Color Show Status IN RO G 0 B 139 000 L Bar ls LeftorTop__________ w NN F0 G 0 B 0 000000 None lxs 120 300 NN RO G 0 B 0 000000 R 255 G 255 B 255 6 Disabled 65 3 15 USE ADVANCED ELEMENTS 8 In property editor set property Label Text to Ellip Tick Meter i 9 Property Editor x lt EllipticTickMeter gt EllipticTickMeterl BBE CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL A Ox 9 Appearance Border Color Border Used Draw as Circle Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Meter Tick Label Style Shape Fill Color Shape Fill Style Start Angle Sweep Angle Tick Color Tick Indicator Color Tick Indicator Thickness 9 Behaviour Field Style
229. k Enable Commanding Check Direct Commanding Click OK Right click in white box under Fan Speed In the popup dialog select Line Graph Leave line graph window open In the display click on Pwr Off command button Click Execute button in the bottom of the display Watch command feedback in response panel Pwr changes to Off Fan Speed drops to 0 rpm Watch line graph changing value 3 4 3 3 Show GWDU display Open APM COL_CC MCS_OPS CONFIG SYNOPTICS MCS DOWNLINK_STAT gwdu to show updated telemetry Click TM Packet Status button Show monitoring Show display navigation Show parameter properties 1 Right click on parameter 2 In the popup dialog select Properties 3 Click Close Show display search for selected parameter Right click on parameter In the popup dialog select Find Parameter In Other displays Click Close 27 3 4 QUICK TUTORIAL 3 4 3 4 Show commanding via MCS Tools Choose Options gt Preferences Select Commanding in the tree structure on the right Check Enable Commanding Uncheck Direct Commanding In Command Target select or enter Manual Stack mcs cc 3 Click OK Start MCS Tools Task Selector gt Onboard Commanding In MCS Tools select Options gt Preferences Set remote commanding to Manual Stack mcs cc 3 Select CFA1 Deactivation and Execute Select row in manual stack Enable Activate Select CFA1 Activation and Execute Select row in manual stack Enable Activate 3 4
230. k spinner next to Time Based to either increase or decrease the time period Or enter value into field 5 8 1 9 2 Set value based limit e Click spinner next to Value Based to either increase or decrease the total number of samples Or enter value into field 199 Chapter 6 Application Scenarios 6 1 MCS Ground telecommanding with USS integrated into MCS is described in this section An overview of the commanding scenario is given in the following diagram Columbus Commanding Elements On Ground A A IMCS Tools i l I Cm e cmd strings MTL Activities l leans SWOP Commands I ExecuteFLAP Predefined TC n OPPS aa E l r wm I Command Sequence __ Events Stack File r HEL PARRA nd 1M eaaa l CBS iniarpratar Es ek Prepared Released sto TC HLCL String Response u TC Command String Released TC U Papi CIS HLCL Interpreter Measurements HLCL response Command History TM TM Processed Para TC Automated TC Processed Para MCS Para Procedure MCS Para Executor Col Event Log TM TC Response Processed Parameters SA Server Columbus Ground TC TM Processed Columbus Ground TC TC Response Parameters Nasa Ground Commanding System TM TC Response Ground TC e Edit TC A telecommand SWOP command executeFLAP Predefined TC can be edited in the command editor of MCS Tools The command string
231. kground colour of graph Plot Background Color Defines plot background colour of graph i e background of curves draw ing area e Step Curve If checked graph are drawn in step i e non continuously e Show Value Marker If checked graph places a marker for every real value i e to indicate points that are not interpolated Orientation Choose between Horizontal and vertical orientation of plot inside graph Expiration Box Choose method for defining expiration choose between Time how long time to keep samples values and samples how many samples values to keep And define in input field below the actual value A graph can be converted into a real time graph by setting the check mark the LineGraph range axis auto move property A real time graph has a time based horizontal axis where the plot continues and scrolls to the left as times passes on even when no parameter update is received 4 6 7 2 Strip Graphs The property StripGraph LineGraph Weight can be used to set the relative height og the line graphs within the strip graph The property has no unit the relative height is set as the weight relative to the total weight for all line graphs in the strip graph Strip Graph properties 3 T raph Click to edit Select Sub Graph LineGraph1 Sub Graph Weight 50 Strip Graph Properties in Property Editor The Strip Graph element has several unique properties J J e Configure Graph Click mini button to edit main strip
232. lay is lost if the display is frozen for no longer than 24 hours Starts a playback of telemetry at the current display time The playback can be stopped with the pause operation Performs a step forward in time to the next change of single or multiple telemetry items on the display Note that this operation will skip periods of time for which no telemetry is available in a single step Performs a major step forward in time The Fast Forward default duration for a major step is 60 seconds re The value for major step duration can be changed in the freeze mode preferences Cand The display time is set to the latest point in T time for which telemetry has been received for the display 5 6 Help Step Forward 5 6 1 Showing Display Help 5 6 1 1 Prerequisites e Help file must exist URL prefix must have been configured for executor 5 6 1 2 Showing Display Help You can view the HTML help of the display which has been provided by the display s author To display help 1 Choose Help gt For Display name of display menu command If no help file has been defined for the display the menu item is disabled 2 Executor shows HTML help for selected display in web browser 5 6 2 Getting Executor Version Information 5 6 2 1 Prerequisites e Executor must be ruming 5 6 2 2 Getting Executor Version Information To get the executor version information e Choose Help gt About e Executor shows version information in popu
233. lder where the snapshots will be saved can be set 196 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 8 CONFIGURING THE EXECUTOR Preferences 3 Project Snapshots 3 Commanding Save Snapshots to home cosadmin uss 2 9 0pre sn Browse 3 Tab Appearance Tooltips C Ask me every time I take a snapshot LY Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Mode 3 Quick Graph 5 8 1 5 1 Saving Snapshots e Click Browse button e In the popup dialog select folder in which you like to save the snapshots e Click Choose Directory Check Ask me every time I take a snapshot when you want to select the folder every time you take a snapshot 5 8 1 6 Reports Generated reports are saved to the folder which is set in the preferences Preferences 5 Project Reports 3 Commanding 3 Tab Appearance 3 Tooltips 3 Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Mode 3 Quick Graph Save Reports to home cgsadmin uss 2 9 0pre repo Browse Cancel 5 8 1 6 1 Setting Report Folder e Click Browse button e In the popup dialog select the folder in which you like the reports to be saved e Click Choose Directory 5 8 1 7 Import While importing a display the import results are being logged in case an error is encountered You can set the preference to open a dialog showing the import results when an error was encountered 197 5 8 CONFIGURING THE EXECUTOR CHAPTER 5 EXE
234. lect button cancel Send direct command via CIS USS allows for operator initiation of commands from synoptic displays Command buttons are used to execute predefined commands 5 4 6 2 1 1 Step Commanding To issue command via 1 Step Commanding 1 Click on command button 2 Command is sent using one of these methods e Command is asynchronously sent to target system The command button is immediately available for further command initiation A sample display for this kind of command is the PCS display COL Atmosphere which can be found under examples import pcs xml all col atmosphere xmlor examples import pcs xml col atmosphere xml 183 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR ELp COL Atmosphere File Navigate Options Window Help Air Press 1 mmHg Monitoring Status Gan 15555 VTC2 hardwire AirPress 2 mmHg Air Press 3 mmHg Monitoring Status _ Enable Ini VTC 1 hardwire Air Press 4 mmHg ppO2 Sensor 1 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable AGD TC 1 hardwire ppO2 Sensor 2 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable AY VTC2 hardwire ppCO2 Sensor 1 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable ABBR TC 1 hardwire ppCO2 Sensor 2 mmHg Monitoring Status Enable AMBY yTC2 hardwire Airflow Sensor 1 Massflov m3 hrMonitoring Statu Enable Inn VTC 1 hardwire Airflow Sensor 2 Massflov m3 hrMonitoring Statu Enable M E VTC2 hardwire PCA Cabin Pressure mmHg Last Sample Time MCA Sample Loc MCA Pantial Pressures 02 CO2 N2 H
235. lelele 8 e elo u p a gt EN a R A e ing Synoptic Hierarchy x TTT displayf1 2 x fecox 9 C Open Displays amp No title assigned on display 1 9 Eq home uss uss project C lib y Property Editor x y Symbol Library e ma displays 1 EIER 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 B 238 Background Symbol Library lw Background Symbol Name Lx 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname Il KI v NE il K The Property Editor is docked again and can be moved around inside the main application The view will when moved click and hold left mouse button dock in different position or on top of other views 4 Close Property Editor and Symbol Library views by clicking closing their common tab view i Clicking this close button will close the following views Synoptic Hierarchy System Configuration Browser Do you still want to close all the views in this group Cno The editor will warn you of the closing of multiple views This concludes the lesson in the USS Editors docking mechanism 3 3 3 Tool views of the editor The USS Editor features a multitude of tool views default views are opened in their latest position and size The editor menu gives the easiest access to the tool views 1 Property Editor
236. ll meter none no colouring of meter e Tick Color Color of ticks drawn e Tick Indicator Color Color of tick indicator drawn e Tick Indicator Thickness Thickness in pixels of tick indicator drawn e Field Style Location of internal data field i e legend e Meter Color Show Status The gauge fill colour changes to display data quality e Meter Major Tick Frequency Placement of major larger ticks e Meter Tick Base Placement of first major larger tick e Meter Tick Unit Spacing between ticks spacing between major ticks will be Meter Major Tick Frequency x Meter Tick Unit e Orientation Orientation of the meter gauge e Field amp Label Font Fonts of field and label inside meter e Field amp Label Font Color Colors of fonts of field and label inside meter e Tick Label Font Font tick label inside meter e Tick Label Font Color Colors of font tick label inside meter e Meter Maximum Largest value shown in meter e Meter Minimum Lowest value shown in meter 4 6 10 2 Elliptic Tick Meter The elliptic tick meter is equivalent to the Linear Tick Meter except for one property and the appearance i e drawn as an ellipse instead of a linear scale Elliptic Tick Meter properties 145 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES 9 Appearance Border Color Border Used Draw as Circle Label Text Meter Tick Indicator Meter Tick Label Style Shape Fill Color Shape Fill Style Start Angle Sweep Angle T
237. lobal attributes currently only display title have following format Display attributeName Normal Attribute Keys have following format ElementType elementName attributename Container elements like Compound and StripGraph have following format to address subcompo nents ContainerType containerName SubComponentType subComponentName The depth of nesting is not limited for the localization files 224 Chapter 9 Reference 9 1 Menu references for the executor 9 1 1 File Menu The actions on files are grouped into the file menu Open Ctrl O Opens a display of any format that is USS displays FWDU displays GWDU displays or PREP and SATMON displays which are both in XML format See also Loading display from file system Save A Copy Saves a copy of the current display in one of the following formats USS uss FWDU fwdu GWDU gwdu or PREP and SATMON displays which are both saved as xml files See also Saving a copy of current display Close Ctrl W Closes the current display See also Closing display Close Other Closes all displays but the currently selected one if there is more than one display open See also Closing other displays Close All Closes all open displays See also Closing all displays Reload F5 Reloads the current display See also Reloading display from file system Load Layout Ctrl L Loads a previously saved layout which is any number
238. lp URL Opsname 3 Make a label Menu Element Add Label and set property Label Text in property editor to Test MDB Connection gest MDB communication Label changed 4 Select from menu File MDB MDB Browser Connecting to MDB Please wait The MDB Browser is loading configuration data from the MDB can take minutes 5 After loading of MDB configuration data the MDB browser dialog opens EJ APM C COMMON_TEST_SUPP E GRD DATA Gq USS gt J EDITOR gt 3 EXECUTOR gt c MDBIO Item Name Item Type Unified Synoptic Displays USS Sync Lock For Edit Close 6 Open and select the MDB path APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS and press button Sync 100 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 19 MDB DISPLAYS APM Gj COMMON_TEST_SUPP G4 GRD DATA G4 uss 7 EDITOR o C AUTOMATIC TESTS o 7 DISPLAYS MANUAL TESTS Y EXAMPLE 3 EXAMPLE2 3 EXAMPLE3 3 TEST 3 TEST2 3 TEST3 3 USS DISPLAY 3 e J EXECUTOR o MDBIO Item Name DM MON TEST SUPPAGRD DAT AXUSSXEDIT ORXM ANUAL TESTS Item Type Unified Synoptic Displays USS v Syni Lock For Edit Close Syncing data to home uss uss project Please wait The MDB Browser is synchronizing the MDB node APMNCOMMON TEST SUPPNGRD DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS as well as all the sub nodes and displays 7 Close MDB Browser
239. m file system 173 Loading window layout 173 localize Translation work flow 223 M MCS Editor Configuration 253 Executor Configuration 254 MCS Configuration 253 N Navigate Navigating display hierarchy 175 Navigating to home display 176 P PCS Importing PCS PREP displays 205 Preparation Preparations 24 Print Print preview 191 Printing display 191 PWS Importing PWS FWDU displays 206 R Reference Menu references for the executor 225 Reload Reloading display from file system 174 Reset Resetting display window to default size 175 Resize Resizing display window 174 RGB Colors 240 S Satmon Importing Satmon displays 211 Save Saving a copy of current display 192 Saving window layout 172 Schema XML Schema 228 Show 267 INDEX INDEX Showing display help 190 Showing display properties 181 Showing element properties 180 Showing parameter values in a quick graph 188 Showing tooltip for element 179 skeleton Generating skeletons with the Skeleton Gen erator 223 Start Starting the Executor 6 Switch Switching target for commands 167 Symbol Libraries Concepts 10 T Toggle Toggling tabbed mode 178 U Undock Undocking windows 178 V View Showing Hiding the Toolbar 177 268
240. map gt lt entry key uss view showsynopichierarchy value false gt entry key uss view showconsistencychecker value false gt entry key uss view showsystemconfigurationbrowser value false gt entry key uss view showlibraryeditor value false gt entry key uss view editor x value 26 0 gt entry key uss view editor y value 11 0 gt entry key uss view editor width value 988 0 gt entry key uss view editor height value 646 0 gt entry key uss toolbar editor standard toolbar value 3 0 21 gt entry key uss toolbar editor edit toolbar value 6 0 21 entry key uss toolbar editor element toolbar value 2 0 21 entry key uss toolbar editor zoom toolbar value 4 0 21 gt lt entry key uss toolbar editor transform toolbar value 1 0 21 gt entry key uss toolbar editor layout toolbar value 0 0 21 gt entry key uss toolbar editor layers toolbar value 5 0 21 gt entry key uss view tabscrolling value false lt entry key uss view tabplacement value North gt Line 1 Col O INS NORM uss config The Kate Editor shows the content of the XML formatted uss config file for the USS system The Kate editor contains features for context highlighting Browse down to see the USS properties they can be changed manually by editing via Kate 3 Close the Kate editor again 4 Opening
241. matic steps D DaSS Data Service Sub system DDF Design Definition File Design Decoration Standard features of a window to allow closing resizing iconification and movement See IDAGS Default size During authoring displays are giving a default size That is their normal original size at which they look the best So resetting the size of a display back to default size displays it again 1 1 without any zoom Display grouped set of data and information contained within a window See IDAGS Display Element group of pixels assembled together to form an object e g labels symbols See IDAGS DJF Design Justification File Verification and Validation Plan Test data DMS Data Management System DN Discrepancy Note DocBook DocBook provides a system for writing structured documents using XML It is particularly well suited to books and papers about computer software though it is by no means limited to them www docbook org Data Quality Indicator DOI A Data Quality Indicator is a letter or small symbol attached to a data field or icon to show the quality of a data value DQM Data Quality Monitor DRD Document Requirement Description 258 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY E EAC ERA Astronaut Centre ECSS European Cooperation for Space Standardization ww w ecss nl Enditem Box See Parameter Text Box Engineering Task Can be everything e g part of a use case user story write chapter in a document write test cases develop a m
242. mbol Libraries oymbol Libraries must have uppercase names of maximum 16 characters to be compliant with the MDB 3 20 Extended Example Create A Procedural Display The USS Editor can be used to create procedural displays in the USS display format Procedural displays are task specific displays that visually resemble ODF procedures They provide all the command buttons and data fields as well as all the guidance required to accomplish a given task and therefore minimizes the need for display navigation This example will demonstrate the creation of a simple but realistic procedural display for activating the Columbus HRM High Rate Multiplexer COMMS subsystem The ODF procedure for this task and the four conventional displays required for carrying it out are shown in the following figure 106 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY rou ga Corre Y erir pee z IV Bec lt 4 Com 1 arason Cem A OMS HAM Comfegurat Conmands LE I EL Jev mc 1 ome PA f A sewers L Con i bad a n mp LL me Zp rea ala L wera ru LLL EE 73 eme w kn PA Par ELL Reds ar xa CLLUNN CLINIC gt au Le y ie F s pa GUO Ga am mm var mie OLI FORE DIN abar y roe eet Coreen L arv preiet TE Kra Per Current gt VICI Pee tus Z E E PY Rek s LLL im 1 FA cL sie WENL Z AT a 22 ume zH lt ee em em ana tame L 2 peer em 1 m 1 m a S 0 e
243. ment Align Grid properties sets the grid properties for the current display Grid properties for new displays are set in the User Preferences Edit Preferences Example The grid and alignment functions can be used to arrange fields in a tabular layout In View Settings set for example the Spacing Vertical to 2 pixels more than the height of the fields to be arranged Then drag the fields to their approximate positions and they will snap to the correct place as illustrated in the screen dump below Tabular layout of fields 4 4 8 Grouping Elements Elements can be grouped to create compound elements Compound elements can consist of any type of elements including other compounds When elements are grouped a new compound element is au tomatically created The compound element can be modified in the property editor and its constituents can be inspected in the Synoptic Hierarchy Open Displays 4 4 9 Working with Depth The depth property of elements determines which elements are drawn on top if the elements overlap The depth is set through the Element Depth menu or directly in the Depth property using the property editor The element with the highest depth value is drawn on top Graphs are always drawn on top of other elements 4 4 10 Changing the Element Default Values All elements are created with the default element properties The default properties for an element can be set by right clicking on the element a
244. meter except fewer J J e Fluid Color The Fluid can be predefined or a custom i e color Press mini button to open color editing for custom fluid 4 6 11 Pipe Valve and CheckValve Pipes and valves can be used together to present a flow system However pipes and valves remain independent unconnected elements on the drawing surface A pipe can be positioned precisely using the cursor keys 4 6 11 1 Valves The Valves element represents a fluid valve Valve and CheckValve can be assigned states INDETERMINATE CLOSED IN_TRANSITION OPEN These states can be set statically and or assign with a data source via the data source dialog Data source assigned to the valves state property must return Strings or enumerated values which corresponds to the states above Valve properties 9 Appearance mM 3 CUSTOM FLUID Iv oe GENERIC Three Way Valve Valve properties in Property Editor The Valves have some unique properties J J e Fluid Color The Fluid can be predefined or a custom i e color Press mini button to open color editing for custom fluid e Modifier Graphical Symbol in valve symbolising usage e Three Way Valve If checked the valve is three way instead of two way 4 6 11 2 Pipe The Pipe element represents a fluid pipe system or a group of pipe segments Pipe properties 9 Appearance Fluid Color 3 CUSTOM FLUID Iv 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Diameter 5 Height 15 Show 3
245. moved Status bar shows Find stopped 5 4 10 Showing Parameter Values in a Quick Graph 5 4 10 1 Prerequisites e Move the mouse over a parameter element e g a data field 5 4 10 2 Showing Parameter Values in a Quick Graph USS can display history data of a parameter in a quick graph To show a quick graph for a parameter shown in a data field do the following 1 Right click on parameter element e g Cabin Templ in display Cabin Temperature Control Unit 1 which can be found under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ECLSS OTOUI 58 2 Select Quick Graph from context menu 3 A non modal window with a line graph for the selected parameter opens CTCU1_Cabin_Temp1_DMC 5 25 degC 7 6 5 a Da a 3 2 1 0 20 53 20 54 20 55 2056 20 57 2058 20 50 2100 21 01 21 02 absolute time 4 Click Close to close the graph window or leave it open as long as you need it The line graph in the quick graph window automatically updates when the parameter shown re ceives an update Note that no curve is drawn when the parameter status is invalid not aquired static 188 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 5 FREEZE MODE etc This also means that parts of a curve can be missing when a parameter was switching from nomi nal to missing and nominal again If you don t see a curve where you would expect one always check the parameter details first see Section 5 4 2 1 One possible reason for a value not being shown is when a p
246. n Browser x mad OPS View Ground Commands _ Y El o c AUTO gt Gj CCSDS o 3 COLCC o 3 CONF 3 Cancel Arch Retrieval 5 Downlink File e 7 INIT gt EJ INITIALISE e EJ MCS o 3 OB o 3 OFT o CI PERFORM gt RED e EI RTGR gt CI RTGRPH e CI SEND The System Configuration Browser is shown 3 Shift the System Configuration Browser to OPS View Ground Commands using the view selector on the right 4 Browse to the End item Cancel Arch Retrieval and select it 5 Use the mouse and left click and hold on the end item and drag it to the open display Select a String Command from the popup w i System Configuration Browser x RAS displays2 A OPS View Ground Commands v 4 o 7 AUTO e E CCSDS o al C OLC C o C CONF 3 Cancel Arch Retrieval 3 Downlink File gt 3 INIT L viuda scence eee o 5 OB o 3 OFT gt LC PERFORM gt RED o EI RTGR la 771 PT Cc PPH A structured telecommand button is made in the display with text Cancel Arch Retrieval 6 Browse to the End item Downlink File and select it Select a Structured Command from the popup 7 Use the mouse and left click and hold on the end item and drag it to the open display 63 3 11 CREATE COMMANDING DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Cancel_Arch_Retrieval BAR FOR UPLOAD FILED p g B n g Downlink File B s
247. n be maximized by clicking the maximize button or by double clicking the tab ling Display view settings x I 9 Library editor E x dL y System configuration browser x IL E Consistency checker x The window bar 4 2 1 5 Tab Layout Tabs are scrolled when there is no room for all the tabs to be visible at the same time A tab can then be quickly selected via a drop down list The selected tab is scrolled so it becomes visible B Property editor x amp Synoptic hierarchy gi Librai L li displayt1 P Property editor E Synoptic hierarchy Us Library editor Scrolling tabs 4 2 2 Editor Menus The Editor menus adapt to selections and disables options that are not possible examples are MDB and element operations The following top menu items exist in the editor e File File Display manipulations open save reload MDB operations print etc Click for File menu description e Edit Editing selecting of displays and elements and preferences Click for Edit menu descrip tion e View Opening Closing of editor tool views Click for View menu description e Tools Editor Internal External Tools Click for Tools menu description e Element Display element manipulations Click for Element menu description e Window Window zooming and navigation Click for Window menu description e Help Help menu Click for Help menu description 4 2 2 1 Editor Edit Menu Item The following operations a
248. n be obtained by right clicking the end item and selecting Properties The tool tip that appears when holding the mouse over the end item gives SID and Path information see screen shot below Views Onboard Commands SEND L CYCLIC CMDS UCL_AUTOMATED PROCEDURE gt CSET Path APMICOL_CCIMCS_DEVAIMPERFORMANCEVPSISEND_CYCLIC_CMDS gt CI STAR sig 302998821 gt 3 STARTO System Configuration Browser context menu The SCB contains a search function at the bottom enter the string to search for and click the Search button To search again press F3 4 10 Working with Projects 4 10 1 Synoptic Hierarchy The Synoptic Hierarchy is a tool view for the Editor to ease navigation of currently open displays and the USS project displays defined by the project root folder It provides possibility to create navigation target to project displays and easy opening hereof Furthermore it provides rename delete and explorer functionality The Synoptic hierarchy displays two structures e Open Displays The displays currently open in the Editor Below each display all elements on the display are shown This view can also be used to drag elements between displays and to inspect compound objects for their contents e Synoptic Hierarchy the file folder structure for the XML based USS displays files below the Project root folder This view can be used to easily create navigation buttons by rig
249. n different displays The standard or default home dis play is the COL Synoptics Home Page under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS_ ROOT COL HOME uss If the home display isn t configured as explained above under prerequisites fol lowing error message will appear gt Information No home display set Please set a home display in the project preferences To navigate to home display Do one of the following e Click on the homepage button in the toolbar QA USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 INE File Navigate View Options Window Help sJulela12 le elo 20 00 00 000 e Choose Navigate gt Home Home display is opened 176 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING 5 3 9 Showing Hiding the Toolbar 5 3 9 1 Prerequisites e Executor is running and toolbar is visible 5 3 9 2 Showing Hiding the Toolbar USS provides the capability to hide the toolbar to provide more space for the display view e Choose View gt Toolbar if toolbar isn t already hidden Toolbar is hidden 5 3 10 Closing Display 5 3 10 1 Prerequisites e Display must be open and selected 5 3 10 2 Closing Display Closes only one display the currently selected display To close display e Select Display you wish to close The tab is displayed in a different color e Do one of the following Choose File gt Close Right click on tab select Close Display is closed 5 3 10 3 See also e To close all open displays Clo
250. n green and button in status bar which switches from Not connected button into Connected button m CILE LITE 5 2 1 3 See also e Disconnecting System to be Monitored and Controlled 5 22 Disconnecting System to be Monitored and Controlled 5 2 2 1 Prerequisites e Connection must have been established already 5 22 2 Disconnecting System to be Monitored and Controlled To stop data connection with the system to be monitored and controlled 1 Do one of the following e Choose Options gt MCS Connection e Click the Connected button in the status bar mms els S ME 2 The popup dialog appears MCS Connection Service ClSim Host localhost Port 7060 3 Click Disconnect 4 In the log window the text Disconnected from CIS is displayed Disconnected from CIS reflected by executor status indicator which turns from green back to gray and the text of the button now again shows Not Connected TM MCS gt ES SSI und Q Pert s Not Connected 5 2 2 3 See also e Connecting System to be Monitored and Controlled 5 2 3 Switching Target for Commands 5 2 3 1 Switching Target for Commands You can switch between different targets for the commands The available targets are 1 direct command string to CIS 2 stack either manual or auto stack 3 local log file window as command target 167 5 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR The usi
251. nabling Direct Commanding e Check Direct Commanding if you want to use direct commanding 5 8 1 2 3 Choosing Command Target e Inthe drop down list next to the label Command Target select the command target you like to use 5 8 1 2 4 Confirming Tele Commands e Check Confirm tele commands before sending when you wish the tele command to be confirmed after sending 5 8 1 3 Tab Appearance Preferences for the tab appearance include both the Tab Placement as well as the Tab Policy 195 5 8 CONFIGURING THE EXECUTOR luli Preferences 3 Project 3 Commanding D Y Tooltips 3 Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Mode 3 Quick Graph Tab Appearance Tab Placement a Top C Left Right Tab Policy Wrap Scroll Bottom CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 8 1 3 1 Setting Tab Placement e Click one of the radio buttons Top Left Right Bottom The tabs will be placed at the chosen position 5 8 1 3 2 Setting Tab Policy e Click either Wrap or Scroll 5 8 1 4 Tooltips Preferences for tooltips can be set to either show the tooltips or not gt Preferences 5 Project 3 Commanding 3 Tab Appearance D 3 Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Mode 3 Quick Graph Tooltips Enable Tooltips 5 8 1 4 1 Enabling tooltips e Check Enable Tooltips if you want the tooltips to be shown 5 8 1 5 Snapshots For snapshot creation the default fo
252. nd Parameter with No Display Open 1 Choose Navigate gt Find Parameter 2 In the popup window enter the parameter you like to search for in the text field labeled Searching for parameter 3 Click Start Find Parameter Searching for parameter PDU1_CTCU1_Pwr_Bus 0 Displays containing parameter 4 If that wasn t the parameter you intended to search for you can stop the search by clicking Stop and entering a new opsname SID PUI or pathname to search for into the text field below the label Searching for parameter Then click Start 5 Select display from list 6 Click Open 7 Click Close Executor opens selected display 186 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION 5 4 8 2 2 Find Parameter from Open Display 1 Right click on any element with parameter binding 2 Choose Find Parameter in Other Displays from pop up context menu 3 A window pops up with a list of all displays containing the selected parameter 4 The search is automatically started with that parameter If that wasn t the parameter you intended to search for you can stop the search by clicking Stop and entering a new opsname SID PUI or pathname to search for into the text field below the label Searching for parameter Then click Start 5 Select display from list Or click Select All Find Parameter Searching for parameter IPDU1 CTCU1 Pwr Bus On Of
253. nd selecting Set as Default Affected element properties are listed in the table below Note that if an element is created when another element is selected then the new element will get the size of the selected element and not the set default size 127 4 5 USING THE SYMBOL LIBRARY CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Table 4 2 Element Properties with Default Capability Saved as default for FillStyle Fill colour and style Shapes Buttons Meters TextStyle Font face and colour ne ial Command List Field Rotation Label Buttons Field DrawStyle AutoWrap ShowUnit ShowIndicators UnitTextStyle Shapes are Arc Rectangle Polygon and Ellipse Meters are TankMeter Elliptic Linear TickMeter and Thermometer 4 5 Using The Symbol Library The Symbol Library contains a number of pre defined IDAGS compliant symbols in categories 3D Graphics Communication Communications Computers Electrical Events Fluid General Groups Logic Mechanical Misc Modes Radiation Monitoring Robotics Sensors Station Modules Tasks and USS Symbols can be dragged onto the display by clicking the symbol holding down the right mouse button dragging the symbol to the display and releasing the right mouse button Note that multiple symbols can be selected by holding down the Shift key during selection gt Symbol Library x 2 Property Editor E Synoptic Hierarchy Ih q AKS B 4 USS Edit O DynamicBox DynamicLed DynamicLed3D r
254. ndParameter SimpleTeleCommandParameter reference jos Element command IE E col sodes simecmcc ons OT e remo e r Tor peasons Ol Dac kwo r conmpabillley OF sues bile formats Command element Tooltip text CommandButton element isGuardeod sd boolean BUCTON CommandList element ShowButtons xsd boolean element BackgroundColor Color element Selecticontolor Color element TextStyle TextStyle element ShowAsComboBox xsd boolean element List element CommandList Item eliene nterra T tte 3 element Command CommandOrRef Eg Element Compound element Elements _ElementChoicex Element Computation element Expression text element Arguments element ExternalDataSsSource ExternalDataSource reference 4 element Computation Computation _reference by 230 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA element StatusPropagation xsd boolean DataSource Criteria element Key laccciouctce Class 1 boxe he rererencte element Ext SrNalMDara S ounce kee ennall Dara S ounce E E EES y element Computation Computation _reference element DataSourcePair DataSourcePair reference by element Name text DataSource element Names attribute class element entry element string text sn hasi c m element string text L L Dy element Type atcrLiouce Class 1 text 2 elemen
255. ng from binary Dataviews format to XML report format 2 Generate XML SCOE files containing all referenced data if not yet available 3 Converting the XML report to USS format including creation of a symbol library if applicable 4 Store USS displays in MDB as new end items These steps are available as an integrated process in CGS For details please refer to the CGS User Manual section USS Displays 207 7 3 GWDU DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 3 1 GWDU to USS Conversion Details This section describes in detail how GWDU display elements are mapped to USS elements 7 3 1 1 Conversion of GWDU Display Objects The table given below lists for each GWDU display object the target USS object In case of special handling a comment explains the details Table 7 1 GWDU display object conversion to USS object Static Objects UU LE L Ag EEN Ellipse Flpe S Cide mips Polyline Polin SoS S SSS Text Vector tex In case of setting width and height the best fit Scalable fonts text Label font size will be calculated No scaling of fonts The GWDU Symbols used for the sub drawing must be re edited as SVG or PNG graphics and a mapping table from GWDU symbol to USS symbol needs to be provided The symbols will be included in a user symbol library Static symbol The GWDU Symbols used must be re edited as SVG or PNG graphics and a mapping table from GWDU sym
256. ng it can be pasted elsewhere as text other program etc e Show Information Open a dialog showing any information available for element e Change Data Source Value Open a dialog for manipulating directly in preview mode the value and states of the data source attached to the element e Save default data for Data Source Value Saves the samples created for the data source attached to the element this enables manipulation of the data so states of interest for data source can be reached e Load data for Data Source Value Loads previously saved samples a data source this enables manipulation of the data so states of interest for data source can be reached 4 3 2 6 Preview in Executor The display can also be opened directly in the Executor by selecting Tools Open Display in Executor from the menu When you select open display in executor a new executor instance will be started which is not connected to a remote system but which is running in preview mode Any executor in stance already running will not be affected 4 3 3 Target System and DOI Style The target system for the display is defined with the property Target system of the display Click the display open the Property Editor and locate the property Target system The allowed target systems and their associated DOL style file are listed in the table below 123 4 4 WORKING WITH ELEMENTS CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Table 4 1 Target systems and DQI style files DOT
257. ng of local log file window as command target turns effectively the sending of remote com mands off To switch target for commands 1 Choose Options gt Preferences 2 In the popup dialog select Commanding 3 Check Enable Commanding 4 Uncheck Direct Commanding 5 From drop down list choose new Command Target e g Manual or Auto Stack Preferences TER 3 Project Commanding Commandin L a lv Enable Commanding 3 Tooltips Direct Commanding 3 snapshots D Reports Command Target Auto Stack mcs ws 1 M E Import j Confirm tele commands before sending 3 Freeze Mode 6 Check Confirm tele commands before sending if you wish commands to be confirmed 7 Click OK From now on all commands are directed to the new target 5 2 4 Checking Acquisition State 5 2 4 1 Prerequisites e Connected to monitored system 5 2 4 2 Checking Overall Acquisition State USS provides an indication of acquisition status The executor gives indicators on the update perfor mance indicator In case of severe problems the user is notified User notification is done via dialogs and or a log window You can verify e that a display still gets updates from the monitored target system and e that the display executor software is functioning i e the display is not frozen due to local software failure as described below To check overall acquisition state
258. nments Use the he1p option for getting help on these Chapter 2 Concepts This chapter describes the main concepts necessary to understand how USS works 2 1 Editor and Executor USS has two main applications editor and executor Operational displays are prepared and maintained with the editor The executor loads and executes displays at mission time Figure 2 1 shows a high level system overview of USS together with its main interfaces The editor interfaces with the mission database MDB for storing and loading displays and symbols Note that this is an optional interface The editor can also directly edit displays in the file system The second main interface of the editor is the XML SCOE file that represents a snapshot of relevant MDB data including telemetry parameters telecommands and house keeping parameters The SCOE file basically provides a cache for fast access to MDB data Figure 2 1 System overview amp Symbols The executor interfaces with the CGS Corba Interface Server CIS This interface is used for acquisi tion of real time telemetry and for sending commands 2 2 Projects The number of displays usually depends on operational needs It may range from only a dozen displays to several hundreds or even thousands of displays Designing and organizing the display structure is the task of the display author In many cases the display structure mirrors the hierarchical structure of the space system A set of dis
259. non modal dialog appears with detailed information about the selected display Display Information COL Synoptics Home Page COL_Home_Page_MCD Title Opsname Filename Source Target System Description Help URL Author Number Date Comment COL Synoptics Home Page COL_Home_Page_MCD fhome cgsadmin APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ROOT COL HOME uss CU Consistency Date 31 08 2005 23 36 25 CU Internal Version 268436077 CU Name ASS 400 M1 INT CU Pathname 14PM CU Scope CCU CU Version 4 0 0 Element Configuration APM MDB Host 149 243 225 45 MDB Instance APM_MASTER MDB Version APM320 CGS450 Mission MASTER System Tree Internal Version 269435592 System Tree Version 12 PWS Current Revision mr 1 0 2006 07 26 09 28 12 Automatic import of FWDU display Changelog 3 Click Close 181 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 4 4 Copying Command to Clipboard 5 4 4 1 Prerequisites e Display must be open and selected 5 4 4 2 Copying Command to Clipboard A command in this context is a command string as text The content of the text depends on the under lying target system You can copy the command to clipboard for use in other applications To copy command to clipboard 1 Right click over a command button E g Pwr On under label PDU1 CTCU1 Pwr Bus in display COL Activation Part 1 under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ACTIVATION ACT PT 1l uss 2 Sele
260. noptic Hierarchy Open Displays e Copy cut paste Work both on and between open displays e Rotate Elements can be rotated in steps of 90 degrees e Resize Resizing elements is done by dragging one of the selection rectangles or directly setting the width height x and y properties in the property editor 126 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 4 WORKING WITH ELEMENTS 4 4 5 Zooming In and Out The following zoom operations are available on the Windows Zoom menu e Zoom in zoom in with the Zoom step size that is set in the Zoom Properties by default 10 e Zoom out zoom out with the Zoom step size that is set in the Zoom Properties by default 10 e Last Zoom Toggle the zoom between the current and the last zoom value e 100 Zoom Reset zoom to 100 e Fit to window Fit the display area in the available space e View Zoom and Grid Properties Set the zoom properties for the current display Zoom properties for new displays are set in the User Preferences Edit Preferences 4 4 6 Aligning and Distributing Elements Elements can be aligned and distributed with the functions on the Element Align menu Using Element Align Vertically Distributed or Horizontally Distributed the selected elements are distributed so space between the elements or the overlap in case of too little space becomes the same 4 4 7 Using the Grid The grid on the display area is used to align and snap elements to the display during display devel opment Ele
261. nside the USS Executor e Target The navigation target to apply the above action i e open or close 139 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 7 Graphs Data sources can be added to graphs by dragging TM from the System Configuration Browser Line and Bar graph examples Previewed in Editor CTC2_Prim_Current_A_DMC IS A lt CTC2_Prim_Current_B_DMC A SOL_CPD_Device_Joint_X_Temp MA degc q Bm SOL CPD Device Joint Y Temp degC ineGra 4 P BarGraph 3 E Range Axis Range Axis 0 L K t i 1401 00 1401 05 1401 10 1401 15 14 0120 1401 2 Domain Axis Domain Axis 4 6 7 1 Line Graphs Line Graphs are configured in the Property Editor by clicking the button at the property Configure Graph The Line Graph Properties dialog below is opened Line Graph Range properties General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Data Set a User Defined Curve Style Curve Style Use Axis Range axis lt T S Axis Properties Axis Label Range Axis Mode Data Set M Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range r Axis Range Upper Lower OK Cancel Line Graph Range properties in Graph dialog Line Graph Range Tab properties Data set Click button to edit range data sources User Defined Curve Style If checked curve styles can be defined
262. ntents of the instance will be controlled by the symbol in the library and cannot be updated in the display If used by copy the instance is not connected to the symbol in the library but behaves as an ordinary group of elements Another aspect of a symbol is whether it is static or dynamic A static symbol contains one image or sub display whereas a dynamic can contain many images but not sub displays each identified with a State Name An instantiated dynamic symbol must be connected to a data source having the defined state names as output At run time the symbol will change between its states showing the associated images depending on data source output Libraries are created renamed and deleted by clicking the Edit button next to the library name and selecting the appropriate action from the context menu that appears Note that renaming and deleting libraries or symbols will lead to dangling references in displays that contain symbols from the renamed or deleted library Dangling references can be found by the Consistency Checker A symbol in a library is created by selecting elements on the display area and clicking the Edit button next to the library name and selecting Add Selected Elements as Symbol from the context menu that appears After specifying the symbol name and type image or sub display see above the new symbol will appear in the Symbol Library New symbols can be used by dragging them to the display as any other symbol ship
263. o L AAA 5 Air Cooling Diff Press 3 Analog Input Section Fail D Anomalby Flag Stat o c CPU 3 Command History Avail Stat 3 Command History T able D Command Rejection Stat o CF EEPROM e EI Fcc 3 Gen Com AFS RS485 Int Stat 3 Gen Com Int SM RS485 Main Stat 3 Gen Com Int SM RS485 Red Stat Y Gen Com Int VU RS485 Main Stat 3 Gen Com Int VU R 485 Red Stat 3 Gen Com LAN SMSC LTU Stat 3 Gen Com SMSC COL HRD Stat 4 gt x Search i Idisplay 2 amp x Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label Test Text Label EPM_Gen_Com_AFS_RS485_Int_Stat M EPM_Gen_Com_Int_SM_RS485_Main_Stat Md EPM Gen Com Int SM RS485 Red Stat MI BPM Gen Con In tB Rs48 5 Main Stat The end items are added as four label data field pairs 8 Select the four labels by hold keyboard key CTRL and left click with mouse on labels I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help sm 88 lt ES S Nad RD BO Suapan saim 100 O lel l lt ITlaalslalgi a a alala elvlala aa Bax 9 Property Editor J iff System Config a mx D Air Cooling Diff Press 3 Analog Input Section Fail
264. o 2 L Com 3 n peter fos nee ie om ww vers ama kaded TEM z rows rou T roni _ 4 39 VOC vere al s FR 1 rare Tim from vOPU H ilk neu d PA Gil Pwr B LLL fe Osem DL A Cuv E A ingut 1 temo SR rd Temo SR aag i 2 vec a vata SACE LUN ue Ld from ne Do entis E 7 11V Aux Cono E EN um j Serial Far Tie MUA Out pun s ZI ru A mmu Nom yom LAN Fuh Tin CLS li case TT Doentink Nam Ps i pear ye LU m r S Per Line Coe an Mis b nacen 4 a kata Resun Ready ye LIN Y q etn Pur Une Conna G HORM Heg Mane Nut piese w semant ee ODF Procedure and Onboard Displays The following figure shows the SATMON display as it will be used by ColCC SATMON Display The procedural display that will be created in this lesson will contain data fields and commands that correspond to the SATMON display but look like the ones in the onboard displays Step numbers and titles as well as procedure title and the note box at the beginning will also be present The procedural display will look as follows 107 3 20 1 HRM ACTIVATION EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 NOTE The redundant 28 V power supplies from POUL and PDUZ Outlet 40 on both PDU s for the HRM are shared with other equipment MMU CHU HSE HUB These outlets are switched ON at COL activation and remain permanently ON independent of the HRM s
265. o e He 9309 o xox y SESE o voy we d 137 4 7 Supported Data Source Types and Ranges per Property and Element 151 AO Wears 355 6 3 9 859 Be heh ees PH Ge eas ES P Ooms E dq med 152 49 Results of dragging TM TC from theSCB ooo oo e 160 5 Executor 5 1 Indication of Acquisition Status for Status of Data Sources o ooo ooo oo 170 5 2 Overall monitoring status for all open displays 171 OO Freeze mode Controls 2 486444 6458 deere re Ass 189 De Seu MG A IE E 199 7 Importing Foreign Display Formats 7 1 GWDU display object conversion to USS Object o o o o oo ooo oo 208 7 2 GWDU attributes conversion to USS properties ooo o 210 7 3 Satmon PageDef root element attributes o o 212 74 Satmon to USS element mapping ees 212 7 9 Salmon text styles for USS version 2 12 s cs axoco ow mode OY Be Eee Ee Oe eS 213 7 6 Satmon text styles added with USS version 2 15 ooo o 215 74 FiredAalpha abes ses s x ace coe SEs Bee R HO S qa e GED ORS BH ae pe 213 Fo CHIDBLATDBASUTIDUIBS 3 x X6 3 9 eoR Er RRR 90 DES PROS a ee 214 ME uu P Ae eee Ree Oe te A 217 740 PlotlineDer atributs 03 9 3 9 99 09 arakon a Ed Ee Rm Bes 218 7 Lean rocEntiy attus soso 34498 ee a 219 8 Localizing Displays For Different Languages Ou S pporledaAlibules 44 5 4 6 p ee 9 1 3a a a A oe 9 224 13 Abstrac
266. od Close All Displays 24544564564 suu 244554 9 2x nee Ee Sa IVA DIL Prerequisites 5 429 9 3 4 9 2o xS Eee AAA 177 5 9412 Close AIL Displays s uoce d Rear e 34 9 de HS 39 9 x 9 Doe SS s 177 S NECEM ee Dee ee oD SO SSS oes ee Ge ee 177 5 5 12 Closing Other Displays 6 64244 pem doe UR eR aS SDS RRO SOD 177 OZ EXPTE QUuISies cdm heute do etata Ge oe as 177 5 3 12 2 Closing Other Displays 0 000000 0 000048 178 5912 5 See A Se s dp ee aes oe ee e t ee oes 178 5 949 Togeline Tabbed Mode i siameses oe eR AA 178 5 3 13 1 Toggling Tabbed MOTE 2 645 406 64 mo ena bow ee R ens 178 5 544 Undockine WINdGWS urs savia EH ARE RE OSES EES OH ES 178 Dold Prerequisites s a gt pps x4 o9 ok ROS Gd CHS GHEE ORE Ee SS GH 178 5 3 14 2 Undocking Windows sasaaa ee 178 Salo MOGs WINdOWS Mam T 178 OOo N LE v se d aux oc rox a dra S8 Box de Nod Se oe GS Ae 178 5 3 15 2 Docking Windows lt p e d m aeui cq 69 ae hinge beeen tae oe ee RN 178 5 3 15 2 1 Docking a Single Window m eom sos 179 5 3 15 2 2 Docking All Windows ens 179 Display InterachHon ou 24 E 3 92 95 99 9 9 259999252 59534 m5 79225992553 179 5 4 1 Showing Tooltip for Element o e e 179 5 4 1 1 Showing Tooltip for Element o ooo 179 5 4 2 Showing Element Properties lt eee aceti o dobte ddia ideda aeaa 180 5 4 2 1 Show Element Properties 0000000000000 180 5 4 2 2 Showing Expression of Display
267. odel Task in iteration plan Expression An expression is part of a computation and defines the mathematical formula for evalua tion F FDB Flight Data Base FE Flight Equipment FEE Front End Equipment FEECP Front End Equipment Communication Protocol FMECA Failure Mode Effect and Criticality Analysis FRC Facility Responsible Centre FSC Facility Support Centre FTP File Transfer Protocol FWDU Flight Window Definition Utility See CGS G Graph Graphic image that shows the functional relationship of some quantities See IDAGS Graphic Symbol denote the function structure and operation of different systems and components Includes icons compounds symbols and primitives See IDAGS Graphics same as graphic symbol See IDAGS GSE Ground Support Equipment GSS Ground Segment Simulator GS SRD Ground Segment System Requirement Document GUI Graphical User Interface GWDU Ground Window Definition Utility See CGS H HCI Human Computer Interface Home Page provides a starting point and top level information to begin operations and provides access to other displays See IDAGS HSIA Hardware Software Interaction Analysis 259 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY I F Interface ICD Interface Control Document Icon A small graphic symbol that uses a simplified picture to denote a system component state or function Examples pumps filters and entire systems See IDAGS IDAGS International Space Station Display and Graphics Standa
268. of USS Editor started in default layout 95 3 18 CHECK CONSISTENCY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 2 Add a label menu Element Add Label Double click left mouse button to edit text in line and write text Label for check n a a gabel for check H n a a Label created and text changed 3 Add a Tank Meter menu Element Add TankMeter Tank Meter created 4 Open Property Editor Menu View Property Editor The properties for the advanced element Tank Meter is shown 5 Choose from menu Tools Check Consistency x Display not consistent 1 Problems A dialog opens stating display is inconsistent and there is one problem 6 Click button OK and the tool view Consistency Result opens f amp Consistency Results x Result Reference Descriptio Info 2006 07 10 20 39 38 Starting consistency Cher Info Detailed Version CCU 268436077 operational c Info SCOE files used file home uss Perforce uss mai Info OpNom Spell Check Performed OpNom incl ESA ERROR sTankM eter TankMeterl Invalid Opsname null Invalid SID null and inval Info Validation of 1 data sources FAILED with 1 errors Info 2006 07 10 20 39 38 FAILED Consistency che The consistency results shown the information processed by the consistency checker and the results One error is marked red stating that the Tank Meter has a invalid data source with invalid parameters OpsName SID and pathname 7
269. of displays See also Loading window layout Save Layout As Ctrl S Saves all open displays as a layout See also Saving window layout Create HTML Report Creates a HTML report of the current display which can be viewed in a browser Save Snapshot Ctrl Shift P Save a snapshot of the current display into the user s application directory See also Creating display snapshot Print Ctrl P Opens a print dialog to print the current display 225 9 1 MENU REFERENCES FOR THE EXECUTOR CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE See also Printing display e Print Preview Opens a dialog to setup the page then opens a print preview dialog See also Print preview e Properties Alt Enter Opens the properties dialog of the current display See also Showing display properties e 1 4 The most recently opened displays e Exit Alt X Exits the executor See also Exiting the executor 9 1 2 Navigate Menu The navigate menu groups actions for display navigation e Back Alt Left Navigates to the next display to the left if there is more than one display open e Forward Alt Right Navigate to the next open display to the right if there is more than one display open e Home F12 Opens the home display See also Navigating to home display e Find Text As You Type Ctrl F Searches for entered text in the current display If occurrences are found they are highlighted by a surrounding orange box See
270. of merging displays will be familiar In the USS Editor merging is done by selecting copying and pasting elements between the displays to be merged Copy pasting can be done as described in Basic Operations 4 3 2 Previewing Displays The Editor allows for previewing USS displays From the menu select Tools Preview If the display has been modified since it was last saved the Editor pops up a dialog requesting for the display to be saved The preview will show the synoptic display as it will look when executed see screen shot below The preview mode supports different ways of entering simulation data into the display as described in the following sections Automatically generated values used by the animator and slider are generated by a Sinus curve and also cycles through varying acquisition and monitoring states The automatically generated values generated by the animator and slider are generated by a sinus curve based on the range information in the configured SCOE file if no range data exist the sinus amplitude is 10 max 10 min 10 The automatically generated values are mapped appropiately to state codes or otherwise if data source type is not numeric 121 4 3 WORKING WITH DISPLAYS bh USS Editor Preview Plenum File Preview Water Flow Selection Valves WFSV ISPRO2 ISPRO1 ISPRA4 XXXX Open XXX X Closed Closed Closed Posn nd 6 10 Posn v v Vv AA RY AY E 7 ISPR d 1 Thermal Plates I E L ISPR
271. og Entry Select Change Entry z Title Title of selected display s i Symbol Library P 8x QU System Configuration Browser 6 8x ff Consistency Results 8x Editor after entering display title 3 Continue by adding the first and for the simple example only main step title as a label Right click on the background of the display then select Add Element Label from the menu that appears A new label is created and automatically selected If the Property Editor tab on the left of the window is not already selected select it Set the Label Text to 1 HRM ACTIVATION like you set the display title Then add a polyline and move it to fit below the main step title text but not the number Group the line and the text by selecting them both and menu selecting Element Grouping Group Then set the Font to Lucida Sans Typewriter Regular size 16 by clicking on the corresponding property and using the font picker dialog Finally move the label to the desired location Then save the display to a file of your convenience e g pd tutorial uss 109 3 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL IC USS Display Editor 2 8 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help en WP a sie M alm a L a LIA 9E x x Property Editor amp X f Synoptic Herarchy Pe displayw1 pd tutorial uss x pd_tutorial uss Bag App nce Background Color R 239 G 238 8 238 FEEEEEE nd Symbol Library Name Y
272. ol1 1 element Selected Elements Tooltip D 9 Misc Corner Fill Color MM Fo 6 0 B 0 000000 Corner Fill Style None Corners Enabled ls 9 Symbol Library Name Symbol Name Electrical E265 Fuse A v 11 In the property editor change the property Symbol Name to E30_Heater ling Property Editor x vox Symbol Symbol ABA Show Data Indicators Y 9 Dimensions Depth D Height 72 Width 155 X 140 Y 170 9 Information Comment Name symbol Selected Element 1 element Tooltip ad 9 Misc Corner Fill Color B F 0 G 0 6 0 000000 Corner Fill Style None Corners Enabled O 9 Symbol Library Name Electrical Symbol Name FAN Heater vir 12 Observe the the display symbol elements icon is changed to the heater icon 76 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 13 ADD SYMBOLS The symbol element is rotate counter clockwise left This feature is available not only for symbol elements Some complex elements cannot be rotated 14 In the property editor click to the property Auto Scale Image y Property Editor x Ve Symbol Symbol Be 9 Appearance a Auto Scale Image Keep Aspect Ratio L Reset Image Size Reset to 20x20 Rotation Degrees 270 shape Fill Color R 212 6 212 B 212 Shape Fill Style None Show Data Indicators 9 Dimensions Depth 0 Height 155 Width 72 X 271 Y 88 9 Information Comment Name Symbol Tooltip 15 Unch
273. olour Default display back ground colour when creating anew display 4 Click on the Consistency category D Project Consistency Display Used OpNom language UK English t D y Data Source Used OpNom check OpNom with ESA iv 3 Import Run OpNom check O isis Settings for Consistency Checker 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE The consistency category contains the following properties a Used OpNom language The language to use while spell checking in the consistency checker b Used OpNom check The OpNom standard to use while checking in the consistency checker c Run OpNom check Whether or not to run OpNom checking in the consistency checker 5 Click on the Data Source category 3 Display 3 Consistency Context list Opsname Y Data Source 3 Import y Database Context default Opsname E 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU Y MDB SCOE Settings for Default Data Source Type and Shown List of Data Source T The Data Source category contains the following properties 42 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 7 GUI ELEMENTS a Context List The list of contexts to be available in the Editor b Context default The default context to use from the context list 6 Click on the Import category 3 Project Import L Display Display import results O 3 Consistency 3 Data Source 5 Import 3 Database 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU 3 MDB SCOE
274. on This lesson will go through the a basic display in the USS Editor You shall work with the following subjects 1 Making of a display 2 Adding elements 29 3 5 MAKING A DISPLAY CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 Previewing a display 3 5 2 Making display The USS Editor can make display in the USS XML format via its GUI 3 5 2 1 Lesson in making a display 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Wi USS Display Editor 2 6 0 DIST File Edit View Tools Element Window Help B G aw Sie SISSIG CG e INES 010 Ey i n bii AIDIL IA 2 9 Property Editor 2 ES e umx display 1 e x T displays1 jiii HE Appearance Background Color RE238 G 238 E 238 Background Symbol Library Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button L 9 Context Help URL Opsname D 4 I gt Editor started with default empty display created three tool views open Synoptic Hierarchy Property Editor and Symbol Library This is an example of start up layout the editor saved basic layout and which tools are open from previous editor closing 2 Add a new display by selecting from menu File New A new display is opened 3 Add a label by choosing from menu Element Add Label Click on label and edit text of label and resize the label by pulling the corner of the label D B
275. on CommandButton _reference element CommandList CommandList _reference element Compound Compound _reference element Ellipse Ellipse _reference element EllipticTickMeter EllipticTickMeter _reference element Externallmage Externallmage _reference element Field Field reference L element FileChooser FileChooser _reference element InputField InputField _reference element Label Label reference element LineGraph LineGraph _reference element LinearTickMeter LinearTickMeter reference L element NavigationButton NavigationButton _reference element Pipe Pipe _reference element PlaceHolder PlaceHolder _reference element Polygon Polygon _reference element Polyline Polyline _reference element Rectangle Rectangle _reference element StripGraph StripGraph _reference element Symbol Symbol _reference element TankMeter TankMeter reference L element Thermometer Thermometer _reference element Valve Valve _reference _ElementOrRef acc ciounte Class 1 text l _ reference ARC BarGraph CAGShape CheckValve ComboBox CommandButton CommandList Compound Ellipse eE H E Externallmage Field FileChooser InputField Label 239 9 4 RGB COLORS LineGraph LinearTickMeter Navi dale O NENTE ON Pipe PlaceHolder Polygon Polyline
276. on Program Operations Nomenclature OpNomESA04 SSP 50254 Annex B1 Columbus ESA Specific Operations Nomenclature C 2 Other References JFormula JFormula home and specification http www japisoft com formula 265 Index A attributes Supported attributes 224 C Check Checking acquisition state 168 Close Closing all displays 177 Closing display 177 Closing other displays 177 Computation 149 Definition 258 Configure Configuring data quality indicators 193 Configuring location of SCOE files 5 Configuring status display 193 Configuring System Settings 4 Configuring user settings 165 Connect Connecting to system to be monitored and con trolled 166 Copy Copying command to clipboard 182 Copying parameter name to clipboard 182 Create Creating display snapshot 192 D Data Quality Indication 10 Disconnect Disconnecting system to be monitored and con trolled 167 Display Definition 258 Display Version 227 Dock Docking windows 178 DQI 10 E Expression 151 Definition 259 F Find Finding displays with parameter references 186 Finding text in display 187 G Get Getting the executor version information 190 GWDU GWDU to USS Conversion 208 Importing GWDU displays 207 I Install Installing the Product 3 Issue Issuing telecommand via command button 182 Issuing telecommand via command list 185 K Keys Format of Entry Keys 224 L Load Loading display fro
277. on about TM TC elements USS provides a detailed information window on selection of display elements The window shows the static and dynamic properties of the according parameters e g parameter name pathname opsname current parameter raw value current parameter calibrated value USS also provides a telemetry parameter query debug popup To show element properties 1 Right click on any element e g telemetry parameter f e CTCU1_CABIN_TEMP1_DMC in dis play COL Synoptics Home Page under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS_ ROOT COL HOME uss 2 Select Properties from element pop up context menu 3 A non modal dialog appears with detailed information about the element properties The dialog contents are updated as long as the dialog is open gt Parameter CTCU1_Cabin_Temp1_DMC cgsadmin mcs ws 1 nx update Data Source Type Telemetry Opsname CTCUI Cabin Templ DMC Pathname APMAFLTSYSAECLSSACT CUTACABIN TEMP 1 SID 274015849 Formatted Value Raw Value Engineering Value Engineering Unit degC Type Float Output Engineering value Processing Status UNKNOWN Acquisition Status UNKNOWN Monitoring Status UNKNOWN Delta Monitoring Status UNKNOWN Soft Limit dowen Soft Limit upper Hard Limit lower Hard Limit upper Soft Limit delta Hard Limit delta Expected Value Acquisition Time Time Since Acquisition APID TM Packet Calibration Rule Close 4 Click Close 5 4 2 2 Showing Expression of Di
278. on browser SCB shows a tree view of the SCOE file selected on the MDB SCOE page in Preferences The SCB is used to drag observable IM and activatable end items TC onto the display or elements thus creating adding or updating data sources as described in the table below Table 4 9 Results of dragging TM TC from the SCB TM to Display area Create Data Field TM Multiple TM can be dragged at once TC to Display area BAR Command Button TC Multiple TC can be dragged at TM to selected Data Field Update data source for the field TC to Command List Add TC to the list TM to graph Add IM as data source for the graph TM must be of type state code integer of float Dan data source for the meter TM must be of type integer of 160 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 10 WORKING WITH PROJECTS The current system configuration version CCU internal version is shown as a tooltip in System Configuration Browser by holding the mouse over title PATH OPS View The View Path or Ops and the Category onboard ground TM TC is switched with the combo box above tree see screen shot below ip System Configuration Browser x i F 0 zz display1 x OPS View Onboard Telemetry L 3 L BLB gt JATCS1 e cI ATCS2 Ground Commands 3 Analog Input Section Fail Ground Telemetry o cI BGB Onboard Telemetry e GJ CEN o c CPU System Configuration Browser toggling category Detailed information about an end item ca
279. on button 21 Click the greyed icon wait for the datasource dialog to open 22 Make new datasource and select computation and enter the expression if VIC2 Redun Temp VTC gt 10 then Display1 uss else Display2 uss Expression ifvVTC2 Redun Temp VTC 10 then Display1 uss else Display2 uss i Navigation Expression for the navigation button 23 Save the new display again 24 Preview the display and use slider at the bottom to change which display will be opened by navi gation button 3 13 Add Symbols The USS Editor can be used to create symbols that can be reused in the displays Symbols are contained in Symbol Libraries 3 13 1 Lesson in creating Symbols 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon close all tool views Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 72 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL ts Symbol Library x 3D1 Camera Control Mod 3D1 Camera Rotate re 3D11 Roll Left O 3D11 Roll Right Altern 3D10 Restore View 3D11 Roll Right 3D13 Step Size 69 3D15 Translation Forward 3D16 View Direction Fr e Q 3D15 View Direction To 3D17 Zoom 3D3 Default View 3D5 Earth Size Real Size 3D14 Target gt 3D4 Display Options 3D6 Motion Arrow ts Symbol Library x La H E10 Connector Permanen E115 Connector Dematab E115 Connector Dematab Lo H E135 Converter Static E125 Converter Current 1 E18 Current Relay
280. on directory to home user uss project e Click Convert The batch process starts e Click Close e After conversion Close and reopen synoptic hierarchy e Open a converted USS display in home lt user gt uss project mcs for example APPM COL CC MCS OPS CO 3 4 2 3 Checking GWDU display for consistency e Open APM COL CC MCS OPS CONFIG SYNOPTICS MCS DOWNLINK STAT uss e Choose Tools Consistency Check e In the Consistency checker report displayed at the bottom double click line with error item item gets selected in display 3 4 3 Executor Tutorial This section gives a short tutorial on how to use the executor It shows how to connect to and disconnect displays from MCS It explains direct commanding from a FWDU display as well as commanding via MCS Tools It explains how to show a GWDU display imported Satmon display and PCS display samples 26 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 4 QUICK TUTORIAL 3 4 3 1 Connecting and opening displays Choose Options gt MCS Connection to connect to MCS In the popup dialog enter the correct connection data for service e g CIS and host e g localhost and port e g 7060 Then click Connect Open Col Home display 3 4 3 2 Show direct commanding from FWDU display Open APM FLISYS OPS SYNOPTICS ECLSS CFA1 display Choose Options gt Preferences Enable direct commanding In the popup window select Commanding in the tree structure on the right side Chec
281. onitoringStatus states DISABLED IN_LIMITS NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION NOMINAL LOW LIMIT VIOLATION NOMINAL HIGH LIMIT VIOLATION DANGER LOW LIMIT VIOLATION DANGER HIGH LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED UNKNOWN gt lt DeltaMonitoringStatus states DISABLED IN_LIMITS DELTA NOMINAL LIMIT VIOLATION DELTA DANGER LIMIT VIOLATION UNDEFINED UNKNOWN gt f States in D Gia TA No MIN 15 7 pic RUNE ACQUIRED DATA INTERRUPTION monitoring IN LIMITS Style acquisition ACQUIRED DATA INTERRUPTION monitoring NOMINAL HIGH LIMIT VIOLA Style acquisition ACQUIRED DATA INTERRUPTION monitoring DANGER HIGH LIMIT VIOLATI Style acquisition ACQUIRED DATA INTERRUPTION monitoring NOMINAL LOW LIMIT _VIOLATI a acquisition ACQUIRED DATA_ INTERRUPTION monitoring e LOW LIMIT VIOLATIO Line 30 Col 0 INS NORM mcs dgistyle ml Changing the values here will change the states used in the Editor Consistency Checker for the MCS target system 3 8 2 Lesson in adding a DQI file The lesson will show how to install a copy of the MCS DQI as a new DOI definition 1 Opening terminal and enter the USS INSTALL etc directory Use command cd uss 2 6 0 etc Copy the MCS DQI definition to a new file Use command Pme a da eea ee Roos THI Check file is copied Use command ls Now open the file uss properties also located in the etc directory kate uss properties Make an en
282. orted to the MDB Instead use images Symbols from the Symbol Library 1 Ensure a user library exists and is open for editing as described in the section Symbol Library 2 On the Symbol Library click Edit and select Create New Symbol 3 In the dialog that appears click Add External Icon browse to and select the image file and click Choose Images 4 Select the image in the State Icon drop down list 148 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 7 DATA SOURCES 5 Enter the name of the image in the Symbol Name field 6 Click Ok 7 Drag the image from the Symbol Library to the Display Image properties 9 Appearance Auto Scale Image v Image Pathname Clp4_busch1666_rmelgaardiussi Keep Aspect Ratio L Reset Image Size Reset to 192x90 Rotation Degrees 0 Image Properties in Property Editor The Image element has several unique properties e Auto Scale Image If checked upon resizing the image is automatically scaled Image Pathname Location of image i e image source Keep Aspect Ratio If checked scaling keeps the original aspect of image i e ratio between width and height of original image Reset Image Size Click mini button with original size as label to resize the image to that size Rotation Degrees Rotation of image in degrees 360 degrees for a full circle direction clockwise 4 6 15 1 Symbol State Mapping Special Symbol State Mapping is possible between a Symbols attached data source and the Symbol states if th
283. ow for eign displays can be converted to USS displays so that they subsequently can be edited and executed with USS In many cases displays do not need to be converted in an extra step but can be imported on the fly in the editor and executor However for large sets of displays a batch import may be more convenient and efficient USS provides support for importing the following display formats e PCS PREP These are NASA displays in XML format designed for execution on the PCS laptop e PWS FWDU These are ESA Columbus displays in SAMMI format designed for execution on the PWS laptop e GWDU These are displays in Dataviews Gipsy format designed for execution on ground facili ties e Satmon These are displays in Satmon format used for example in the Columbus Control Center There are three different ways to use these foreign display formats in USS 1 Directly opening a single display with the File Open dialog in the editor see Section 4 3 or executor see Section 5 3 3 2 The display can be immediately used and optionally saved in USS format This is analogous to how you would open and work with a non Word document in Word 2 Batch conversion of a whole set of displays The batch conversion is run from within the editor see Section 3 4 2 2 The result is saved as a set of displays in USS format 3 Batch conversion of a whole set of displays The batch conversion is run as a console application without GUI The result is
284. p dialog Unified Synoptics System Copyright C1 2001 2005 EADS Space Transportation Version uss 2 6 0rc2pre build 20060725 1706 For more information see http www e columbus de projects uss This product includes software developed bythe Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Losas 190 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 7 Miscellaneous 5 7 1 Print Preview 5 7 1 1 Prerequisites e Display must be selected 5 7 1 2 Print Preview To preview print 1 Choose File gt Print Preview 2 In the popup dialog change any printer settings if necessary Page Setup Media Source Automatically Select M Orientation Margins A Portrait left mm right imm 3 Landscape 25 47 25 4 O Reverse Portrait top mm bottom mm 22 4 25 43 V Reverse Landscape 3 Click Ok 4 In the print preview popup select percentage to change the zoom Print Preview H i i S 5 31 c3 a El D B n fa S sr 5 7 MISCELLANEOUS 5 Click Print 6 Click Close Executor prints image of display 5 7 2 Printing Display 5 7 2 1 Prerequisites e Display must be selected 191 5 7 MISCELLANEOUS CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 7 2 2 Printing Display USS allows you to print displays To print display 1 Choose File gt Print 2 Select printer and optionally configure print setup x General
285. parameter output Includes label value unit quality indi cator See SRS PCE Proximity Communication Equipment PCS Portable Computer System NASA terminology PDR Preliminary Design Review Review of the system architecture and requirements freeze PDF Invented by Adobe Portable Document Format PDF is the published specification used around the world for more secure and reliable electronic document distribution and exchange www adobe com PFM Proto Flight Module Plot Graphical representation of Data usually with a curve connecting data points and axes defining domain and range of the data PMP Parts Materials and Processes PNG Portable Network Graphics PREP PCS Reconfiguration Evolution Project NASA terminology Primitive The simplest form of graphic available e g circles rectangles lines and pipes See IDAGS O QA Quality Assurance Quick Pick List A pull down menu used for sending commands that allows the user to select the de sired value from a predefined list instead of entering it manually See IDAGS 261 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY R RAM Reliability Availability Maintainability RB Requirements Baseline See User Requirements Document RDB Result Data Base archive of raw and processed data and the event log Release Plan Also called commitment schedule cycle plan Highsmith99 or backlog SCRUM De fines the overall development release milestones Assigned are the use cases which shall be de veloped
286. ped with the Editor By dragging a sub display to the display area a instance by reference is created To use the sub display by value right click the symbol and select Add Symbol Components to Display It is recommended to use the Symbol Library for images on the display instead of the image element as described in section Image 4 5 2 1 Advanced Editing of Symbols Specifying dynamic properties of a symbol is done in the dialog below Right click the symbol and select Edit Symbol in order to perform advanced editing The symbol on the display as opposed to the symbol in the library 129 4 5 USING THE SYMBOL LIBRARY CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Symbol Name Tank with label A tank meter with label below Symbol Comment Library My symbols Type Static v Default State Icon Selected State Name State Icon Tank with label usc v Add External Icon State Icon Preview w Tank with label usc o Cancel Help Dialog for definition of a symbol The Symbol Comment field is for notes about the symbol it will not be visible at run time To make a dynamic symbol from a static one 1 Switch the Type to Dynamic 2 For each state a Click Add and enter the state name b A new image for the state can be added directly by clicking Add External Icon Sub panels cannot be used as state icons c Select the icon i e symbol from the State Icon list 3 Select the default sta
287. plays that belong together to fulfill an operational goal is called a project in USS Every display is stored in a single file A project then is nothing more than a set of files on a com puter Authors are free to organize their displays in a hierarchy The hierarchy is a directory structure containing the displays This is very similar to a web site storing its documents in a hierarchy tree There is exactly one project active in the editor or executor at any time The project folder is defined the application preferences The default value is SHOME uss project Note that editor and executor can have different project folders but for most users it is recommended to use the same folder in both applications 2 3 SYMBOL LIBRARIES CHAPTER 2 CONCEPTS 2 2 1 MDB All USS data can be easily managed in the file system When working with the MDB things can get a bit more complicated Different MDB configurations can be used in parallel This is achieved by having an extra directory below the project folder that is named after the MDB configuration identifier CDU CCU internal version identifier In the editor this information is determined by the preference settings for the MDB In the executor this information is determined by the CIS after a successful connect 2 3 Symbol Libraries Symbols are two dimensional graphical elements showing images or icons Symbol libraries are groups of symbols organized by topic For example the symbol library
288. plays whose measurements are within limits again are still kept in the history Displays are kept in the history until display has been selected as explained above That means no display is automatically removed from the history The only way to remove a display from the history is through user interaction 5 3 Window Handling 5 3 1 Saving Window Layout 5 3 1 1 Prerequisites e At least one display must be open otherwise the menu item is disabled 5 3 1 2 Saving Window Layout You can save the layout of all displays including size and position so that the window layout can be restored later To save window layout 1 Choose File gt Save Layout As 2 In the File chooser dialog select the folder in which you want to save the layout e g folder layout 3 In the file name text area enter the name under which you want to save the layout gt Save Layout As SIII File Name default layout Files of Type USS Layout files layoub v Save Cancel 172 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING 4 Click Save 5 3 1 3 See also e Loading Window Layout 5 3 2 Loading Window Layout 5 3 2 1 Prerequisites e Window layout must exist 5 3 2 2 Loading Window Layout To load a previously saved window layout 1 Choose File gt Load Layout 2 If there are already any displays open you ll be asked if you wish to close all open displays before loading a new layout
289. ple plots is 180 pixels Size for leanproc displays is defined by its contents 7 4 1 2 Mapping of Satmon display Elements to USS elements The following table lists known Satmon XML elements and the corresponding USS element Table 7 4 Satmon to USS element mapping USS Element Display background color is black Display target is MCS PageDef Display defining a DOI style suitable for displays with black background Defines a static text Using FixedAlpha Label monospaced font Lucida Sans Typewriter 212 CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS Table 7 4 continued USS Element Defines a telemetry field OutputAlpha Field Using monospaced font Lucida Sans Typewriter PlotDef Defines a graph element LeanProcEntry Defines a procedure step 7 4 1 3 Alphanumeric Satmon Displays This section describes the interpretation of elements used in alphanumeric displays Satmon uses style ids in StyleID attributes of the text elements FixedAlpha and OutputAlpha defining the appearance of these text elements These styles are not distributed with display files but seem to be part of a Satmon executor installation The following table lists the ids found in the display set and there interpretation If an unknown style id is found then the color white is used Table 7 5 Satmon text styles for USS version 2 12 Satmon style Interpretation NormalFA Left aligned color yellow YellowFA
290. plied to current selected ele ments 119 4 3 WORKING WITH DISPLAYS CHAPTER 4 EDITOR e Depth Sub menu containing all depth arrangement operations that can applied to current se lected elements e Rotate Sub menu containing all rotation operations that can applied to current selected elements e Scaling Sub menu containing all scaling operations that can applied to current selected elements e Transform Performs a transform to current selected elements 4 2 2 5 Editor Window Menu Item The following operations are available from the Window menu some operations are inactive if they are not feasible e Zoom Sub menu containing all zooming operations that can applied to current selected display e Back Goes back to previously selected display e Forward Goes forward to previously selected display opposite direction of Back 4 2 2 6 Editor Help Menu Item The following operations are available from the Help menu some operations are inactive if they are not feasible e Help Contents Opens the Help contents in the web browser e Search Opens the a search dialog for searching the help contents e About Shows the product information for the USS Editor 4 3 Working with Displays The following operations are available from the File menu some operations are inactive if they are not feasible e New Create new empty USS display e Open Open existing USS FWDU GWDU or PREP display from the file system e Reload
291. properties next to the property value The top part of the dialog is a table of already defined data sources for the specific property of the specific element Selecting a line in the table the details of the selected data source are shown The Add 149 4 7 DATA SOURCES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR and Remove buttons are for adding and removing data sources The Add button will be disabled when the maximum number of data sources for the property has been reached this maximum is typically 1 graphs accept more When the data source s type has been set the lower part of the dialog will change to present the details of the selected type External data sources are most conveniently selected using the button that opens a System configuration browser This will automatically fill in the selected end item s name unit and type In Field1 Edit Data Source Name Unt DataType CFAT Fan Temp DMC degC Float Data Source Type External Data Source 2 Computation Details for External Data Source Opsname CFA1 Fan Temp DMC Value Output Engineering value Unit degC Type Float Data source dialog showing details for an external data source A computation is defined by an expression Expressions can also contain MDB end items and names of data sources defined in other expressions The name of a computation cannot contain spaces Details for Computation
292. r Integer Example Sure oec Uns cm ed M DS MSIDIIC MUG hess T ES cuo EDU E BufferGetUnsigned8 Returns the unsigned byte value from the byte buffer at the specified bit po sition as double value Definition bufferGetUnsigned8 parameter String bitPosition Integer Integer Example ISE ER cem Sg cedes US MEDM AUCT Eo FOCI E TAPAS HIE T a BufferIsBitSet Returns the boolean value for the bit in the byte buffer at the specified position Definition bufferlIsBitSet parameter String bitPosition Integer Integer Example burterisBLcSer YUSM DMC UCL Sloci FLAP Starc SWA 8 gt tu Checkmark Returns a checkmark character when the given input string is equal to the compare String argument Otherwise and empty String is returned Definition checkmark pue 5 TY RC ONDES co E AO Example Cmec winters UME JOHRI RUNE ON T e S ae MdbPath Computes the engineering value of a parameter specified by an MDB path as string constant NOTE This function is deprecated and provided only for compatibility with previous uss versions Use parameterEngineering Value path String instead Definition IST E E S As cacao y EN Olo a everc Example mdbPeth APM FOO lTEM gt 370 ParameterAcquisitionStatus Returns the acquisition status of a parameter specified by a string constant Definition param ete ras cuasi tons tabus parameren s dE Den S SE JC Example Paramore SEI tee OD qs cb Wis ae ARGIS a Ta
293. r Value Data Source BarGraph Da Any range Any InputField Any range en Ss Mw Ro Matching the symbol s Value Data Source Symbol conversion to string is 3 state names used INDETERMINATE Valve Value Data Source CheckValve CLOSED 4 7 3 Dynamic Properties A proper formatted color string Any the value after conversion to string 1s IN TRANSITION OPEN used Dynamic properties are properties whose value is controlled by a data source The dynamic properties are listed in the section Supported Data Source Types above The screen shot below shows the icon for dynamic properties If the property is bound to a data source the icon becomes bright whereas unbound properties have a grey icon Example If the Height property is bound to a data source that varies the element will change its height at run time Height 313 Width 24 x 239 230 Dynamic properties the height property is bound to a data source 4 7 4 Expressions Expressions in the USS Editor support JFormula expressions JFormula is a library for Co uE math ematical expressions Mathematical expressions accept the following set of operators where a stands for the modulo operator and for the power operator Parenthesis to any level is supported The expression may contain variables as well as functions 2 Examples red green f4a460 See other possible colors in section rgb colors 7 State names for pred
294. r installation the system settings should be configured to adjust USS to the target environment To configure the system settings follow these steps 1 Open the file Sbasedir uss x y z etc uss properties with a text editor 2 Read the comments in the configuration file and edit settings where necessary 3 Save the changed file The new settings will be used the next time one of the USS applications is started CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION AND GETTING STARTED 1 3 GETTING STARTED For settings in the uss properties file that can also be set via the user interface e g via prop erties dialog the following rules apply Settings made in the uss properties file only define initial defaults Once they are changed in the UI the UI settings have preference over the uss properties setting This means that later changes in the uss properties file may be ignored The following explains the precedence of uss config over uss properties by explaining the setting of uss cmd telecommanding and the various effects on the executor depending on where it is set Settings in uss config have precedence over uss properties For example the installa tion configuration is that the uss cmd telecommanding is set to false in uss config Changes to uss cmd telecommanding in the running executor are also saved to uss config Changes to that value in uss properties while the executor isn t running has no impact on the executor s prefer ences because of the already ment
295. r ss element TickMajorFrequency xsd integer element KETE 2 UM T T TET H element Eoi ECT SEE ELIE S Class 1 CEC l element BackgroundColor Color element SliderStyle TRIANGLE BAR heme min INeSeHe Co IE a co shoe element NeedleStyle LINE KITE BAR element Thickness xsd integer 237 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE by element ST E valle NO nash iol EAN DOP heh CO ESTIS O OM T aa Ai ie NAPS Lan SERES OR Shoe ARENA Eo aR Ser Vor BOLLO Semen shea obese ADT AB TEDSTER CENTER S A E Rene ru element apelli texts element LabelTextStyle TextStyle element IndicatorTextStyle TextStyle Meter ValidInputMap element ValidInputMap element entry 4 element string text element string text L x ValueAxisProperties element AxisMode VALUE BASED LINEAR VALUE BASED LOGARITHMIC lt ARABS HT AS RD A OOo A ete EAS ADA Ae MES VANE ey ES ASE DIAS M S SAMPLE_BASED_RELATIVE element AxisRange AxisRange element AutoRange xsd boolean element AutoMove xsd boolean element StickyZero xsd boolean element TickLabelsRotated xsd boolean AxisProperties Valve eemeta dude Ba element Modifier GENERIC AUTO MOTOR RELIEF MANUAL MOTOR lt MANUAL GENERIC element Rotation _RotationEnum element ThreeWayValve xsd boolean Element Shortcuts for frequent patterns EDBXMES Thi
296. r will then e Connect to MDB While the Editor is connecting to the MDB a Connecting to MDB dialog is visible this can take up to 10 minutes depending on the connection e Locate the display path in MDB e Add the display to the MDB e On success the Editor will display a confirmation on error an error message 4 8 4 Forced Open From MDB revert Forced Synchronization When undoing of an action is needed reverting to latest version of display in MDB forced synchronization is performed from the Editor Open the previously synchronized or lock for edit display located in the project folder When invoking File MDB Forced Open From MDB revert the Editor will overwrite the display with the MDB version and set display file to read only in the local file system NB The edited display file will be overwritten and cannot be recovered after this operation i e can be seen as a reopen of a changed display reverting changes 4 8 5 Delete in MDB Deletion of display When deletion of a display is needed removing of display from MDB delete in MDB is performed from the Editor Open the previously synchronized display located in the project folder When invoking File MDB Delete in MDB the Editor will delete the display in the MDB and delete the locally stored display file in the local file system NB The display file will be lost and cannot be recovered after this operation 4 9 System Configuration Browser The System configurati
297. ration like the following to use the USS Executor on MCS equipment 1 Choose Option gt Preferences gt Project and set the following Projects folder san1 mcs shared home cgsadmin uss project Home Display should be selected within the Project folder The Projects folder setting is needed first to set the home display 2 Choose Option gt MCS Connection and set the following Service CIS Host localhost or mcs ctm configuration dependent Port 7060 254 APPENDIX A EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION IN MCS ENVIRONMENT EXECUTOR PARAMETERS NOTE Within MCS the CIS connection parameter should not contradict the configuration settings for MCS tools 255 Appendix B Glossary ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ A Active Symbol Symbol changing state or color reacting on an external stimuli See DAGS AD Applicable Document ADP Acceptance Data Package AIR Accident Incident Report Animated Symbol symbol continuously dynamically changing its appearance without external stimuli See IDAGS AP Agile Programming AP Automated Procedure API Application Programming Interface APID Application Process Identifier APM Attached Pressurized Module AR Acceptance Review Formal acceptance of the whole system or parts of it ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange B BDUF Big Design Up Front C CC Control Center CDR Critical Design Review Design Freeze Not foreseen in AP CGS Columbus Ground Software COA Ce
298. rds IGS Interconnecting Ground System ISS International Space Station Iteration Plan Defines all engineering tasks for a specific iteration with their associated developer ini tial estimate in ideal and real hours real estimation to complete and priority within this iteration Java Programming language in the C C family K KIP Key Inspection Point L Layout Layout means everything that changes the appearance of the executor and its loaded displays Which are the window size window position open and loaded displays status of tabbed mode tab position show hierarchy etc M MCS Monitor and Control System sub system COL CC MDB Mission Data Base Menu a list of choices normally presented in a graphic form See IDAGS MIN Minutes MIP Mandatory Inspection Point MMI Man Machine Interface Mode Used to denote the current operational state of a system subsystem or device See IDAGS MRB Material Review Board MTL Master Time Line 260 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY N N A Not Applicable Navigation act of moving between displays See IDAGS Navigation Button control for navigating to another display NCR Non Conformance Report Nickname Opsname and nickname are used as synonym O ODB Onboard Data Base OPM Operations Manual Opsname Opsname and nickname are used as synonym P P L Payload PA Product Assurance PA S Product Assurance and Safety PAP Product Assurance Plan Parameter Text Box A Display element for
299. re if the nominal HRM core activation fails the redundant HRM core is automatically activated instead starts RT acquisition amp monitoring of HRM data enables the HRM MMU link Master MMU Fiber Optic Jumper installation must be conpleted before starting this step After HRM activation correct configuration of HCOR APS HRFM must be verified to support downlink of Ku band packets via the HRM Gi Symbol Library x B Consistency Results x The System Configuration Browser is shown Select that item and drag it onto the display area This will cause a label and a data filed to be 111 3 20 EXTENDED EXAMPLE CREATE A PROCEDURAL DISPLAY added to the display Change the text of the label to Verify PDU1 Subsys Pwr Bus5 ON and the font of the label as well as the data field to Lucida Sans Typewriter Sans Regular size 14 Then align label and data field to their horizontal center Repeat that process for EPDS PDU2 Subsys_Pwr_Bus5_On_Off_stat_DMC analogously Alternatively you can use copy and paste with manual updates to create the second verification instruction CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL USS Display Editor 2 8 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help B jn Wbis as a 01 I w Property Editor amp X t Synoptic Herarchy pd tutorial uss 04 5 eui 9 Appearance ckground Color R 238 G 238 B A 2 aula a RIE Nasau 6 8 w di episyWt pd tutorial uss 9 x
300. re available from the Edit menu some operations are inactive if they are not feasible e Undo Undoes the latest edit in current display e Redo Redoes the latest undo in current display e Copy Copies current element selection to clipboard e Cut Cuts current element selection to clipboard e Paste Pastes content of clipboard to current display e Duplicate Duplicates current element selection in current display e Set Element as Default Sets current selected element as default for new elements e Delete Delete current element selection e Button Edit Sub menu for button release press look editing 118 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 2 THE EDITOR WORKSPACE Select Invert Inverts the current element selection non selected becomes selected and vice a versa Select All Selects all elements in current display Select All of Same Type Selects all elements of same type in current display Select All of Same Depth Selects all elements of same depth depth property in current display Focus to Property Editor Opens focuses to the Property Editor showing properties for currently selected elements Preferences Open the preferences configuration dialog 4 2 2 2 Editor View Menu Item The following operations are available from the View menu by toggle a view is meant If view is open it is closed and vice a versa System Configuration Browser Toggles the System Configuration Browser tool view Synoptic Hierarchy Toggles the Synoptic Hi
301. re opened as frames inside the main editor application Small docking control icons allows you to 1 Undock Minimize Close when view is docked i e inside main window 8 x 2 Dock Close when view is undocked i e appears in a separate window x 3 Undock Minimize Maximize Close when views are collected in tabs multiple views in tabs PL Dx E 3 3 2 1 Lesson in docking mechanism of editor panels 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon 17 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI Wi USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help RIE EIC E e s m 3 o Jra a e o CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL f Synoptic Hierarchy x a ax diplayti x a 6 olo tal P i gt 9 7 Open Displays E No title assigned on display 1 9 5 home uss uss project c3 lib 9 Property Editor x Symbol Library J display 1 Be 9 Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 E 238 Background Symbol Library v Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname Editor started with default empty display created three tool views open Synoptic Hierarchy Property Editor and Symbol Library This is an example of start up layout the editor saved basic layout and which tools are open from previous editor closin
302. rect or remote commanding Direct commanding needs to be confirmed by the user whereas remote commands are send without confirmation to auto stack or manual stack The following activity diagram shows what happens when a user clicks a command button in a display 182 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION display without Execute button 1 step commanding This activity diagram shows what happens when a user clicks a command button ina User clicks M command button m display with Execute button 2 step commanding User clicks command commanding disabled button Inform user that Deselect all other commanding is command buttons disabled log panel amp and arm clicked response win dow button Enable execute button remote commanding autostack manualstack Let user confirm guarded command execution dialog display button is guarded user cancels commanding enabled remote commanding direct commgnding direct commanding User clicks in any s non command Let user confirm button element parameters dialog Has parameter input field Deselect command button disable i n confirm No parameter input field cance execute button connected to M CS no MCE connection E d User clicks execute PW needed button Password not needed hzcm d disabled Disable execute button Start processing armed command button and dese
303. reliability of the data values and their meaning in the operational context Most output elements in USS support so called Data Quality Indicators DOT according to the DGCS DGCS standard For example Figure 2 3 shows a data field with data quality indicators The cyan background color and the letter S at the end indicate that the parameter value has gone static At the same time the arrow before the S shows that the last value had an upper limit violation Figure 2 3 Data field with data quality indicators 50 1S Data quality is indicated by foreground and background color of a data field and by additional flags that are shown next to the parameter value Input for data quality are the acquisition status monitoring status and delta monitoring status of a parameter Data quality indicators can be configured for different environments by editing an XML configuration file Since the configuration can become quite complex due to the number of possible combinations the executor has a function to display all settings for a 10 CHAPTER 2 CONCEPTS 2 4 DATA QUALITY INDICATION selected display as a help page Figure 2 4 shows part of the online help generated for an MCS display by the menu command Help Data Quality Indicators for Display This is helpful in two scenarios e For administrators defining DQI configurations e For operators wanting to see the meaning of DOI output such as colors and flags in a running display F
304. reos 187 5492 Finding lextin Display e x uem oo bt reed 9 9 oed deg ee bao 187 5 4 10 Showing Parameter Values ina Quick Graph llle 188 SA10 PRET QUISITES e pea 4a de Sede sewn eee Be tebe REX St 188 5 4 10 2 Showing Parameter Values in a Quick Graph nasa 188 Freeze Mode PM tee hE ETS BROS SEEDS AAA oH eS 189 Dos TANOJ raro ranas ene Redeeee AG heeeeen ee eee eo a oe 189 5 5 2 The Freeze Mode Controls 2 oce omo ooo oom hom Swe DR 189 lali ross espais oe ar AAA 190 5 6 1 Showing Display Help aros esposo rare 190 EDU IMEPT QUISHES osare rra eee AAA A 190 5 6 1 2 Showing Display Help iuo 6484444 dra da AS 190 5 6 2 Getting Executor Version Information o 0 0 0 00000 190 DO Prerequisites 25 3 un ars pants AAA AAA 190 5 6 2 2 Getting Executor Version Information o o 190 lake M D ARAGUA RAR ARA 191 Su EAOLLISVIEW uox 3 eu ar Aa Se be e das 191 oVMMEbuLCO 1 P c oe oros 191 SAA a cas 466 9 9 9 09 3 3 3 9 3 Oe ee d ed ee ee oe 191 50 2 Its Display ss asa 544 4694 458484 WHA SHRED ASH RES EME DSO 191 DUASL PIET QUISIES 4 4444 2654 Ure ga Wee boa WR b 3 t 191 S722 Fine Display s r eee ne R4 REO RSSa y394 5 3 xd s 192 5 0 Creating Display snapshot e oo eee sino ekri ues wo des 192 DURO WICheGUisNes pet aves ce 9o op E A eee Se AAA 192 5 7 3 2 Creating Display Snapshot aooaa o 192 5 7 4 Saving a Copy of Current Display o o
305. result in a 1 GB large database 5 8 1 9 Quick Graph Preferences for quick graph includes defining method of expiration for data values samples Expiration of data values samples is controlled via time period and number of samples To specify no limit enter 0 Note All data values displayed in quick graph are stored in memory Setting one or both limits to 0 may cause the application to run out of memory This may happen if period is longer than 24 hours or if number of samples is higher than 10 000 or if too many displays are executing 198 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 8 CONFIGURING THE EXECUTOR Preferences rx 3 Project Quick Graph 3 Commanding Specify limits for expiration of Quick Graphs 3 Tab Appearance Time Based 600 seconds 3 Tooltips _ Value Based 600 samples 3 Snapshots D Reports NOTE The changes will be applied to all new quick graphs d Very large expiration values increases the risc of out of memory 3 Import situations 3 Freeze Mode For exceptional reasons you can enter 0 to specify no limit 5 Quick Graph OK Cancel Table 5 4 Setting limits Value Based Application will run out of memory Application will run out of memory if samples are very big Application will run out of memory if frequency of samples is too high Application will run out of memory when first limit is exceeded 5 8 1 9 1 Set time based limit e Clic
306. ributes o 74 SAamMmoONDISPIOyS sarao iaa AAA ds sv E 7 4 1 Sarmon display file format analysis 7 4 1 1 Satmon display XML structure o o e 7 4 1 2 Mapping of Satmon display Elements to USS elements 7 4 1 3 AlphanumericSatmon Displays o ooo ooo TALA O 053903 309 von RESP 6 8 R09 9 de modu Ae RR OR P e de SCR Alo Procedure Displays 3 9 939 99354999 EX s Rey a5 7 4 2 US5Satmon importer version 2 12 known issues 7 4 31 Alphanumeric Displays eee Nadia DIIS us 99 we 99 S339 9 v3 3 Uy S PE NOR Ee d e S v 3 9 7 4 2 3 Procedure Displays vase medo Ry SCR REDE e d 7 3 USS Satmon importer version 2 15 known issues 7 4 3 1 AlphanumericDisplays ooo o 95 LIS narrar AEREA REG S RESP RS 7433 Proced re Displays asoedes mh 9 Bas HA ROS eee oe s PX P aS 8 Localizing Displays For Different Languages Oc IBEOdUCUON 5 34 ierre eee tee eeseeaeeuee eee bet HERR ACRI baa ee 0 2 AfanslanOn WOMGCHIOW 4644064024855 ARANA 8 3 Generating skeletons with the Skeleton Generator lle 54 S pp rted attributes uu ses eodd Es Ae Oo Formal ol EU SO uu suc 99s mum eR eee eat Oa E Oe ee ea 9 Reference 9 1 Menu references Tor the executor s 64 46 de ose bow RE OK e pudeti wiena Oi TMCWMenU MP 2 12 Navigate MENU lt 645654934 uro oe ROS ERE OR SUR
307. rned Definition bufferGetBit parameter String bitPosition Integer Integer Example burrerGer bie YUSM DMC UCE Solor T FLAP Stat SWT e l BufferGetSigned32 Returns the Double value 1 if the bit in the byte buffer at the specified position is set Otherwise the Double value 0 will be returned Definition bufferGetSigned32 parameter String bitPosition Integer Integer Example SUtinenGeromenecds 2 TUS DMC PUC SLOIR TAPT BSEC a2 BufferGetTime Returns UTC time created from a 40 bit GPS time from the byte buffer at the spec ified bit position as formatted String ddMMMyy HH mm ss GPS time is extracted from the byte buffer as 40 bit struct coarse time bit 0 31 int seconds since 06 01 1980 fine time bit 32 40 ubyte 1 256 seconds Definition bufferGetTime parameter String bitPosition Integer Integer Example p fktercetiime USM DMC UCIL Sot EELA Stat SW 8 BufferGetUnsigned16 Returns the unsigned short value from the byte buffer at the specified bit position as double value Definition bufferGetUnsignedl6 parameter String bitPosition Integer Integer Example DUtnerGceUmomomeclo MS MEDICO MES o AA TAE MS as NO a 153 4 7 DATA SOURCES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR BufferGetUnsigned32 Returns the unsigned int value from the byte buffer at the specified bit posi tion as double value Definition bufferGetUnsigned32 parameter String bitPosition Intege
308. root folder the one which you have configured in Setting project root folder and MDB configuration Navigate to APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS Right click on TUTORIA L uss and select Open Display TUTORIAL opens in editor view Right click on display Select Lock for Edit on MDB Edit display Choose File gt Save display Right click on display Select Save in MDB 25 3 4 QUICK TUTORIAL CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 4 2 1 3 Editing displays e Creating Elements i e labels fields etc 1 Choose Elements gt Add 2 Select Label or Data Field e Changing properties of elements 1 Right click on newly created element label data field etc 2 From the popup dialog select action you would like to perform e g align move order rotate or scaling e Drag and drop an item from the system configuration browser onto the display e Drag and drop multiple items from the system configuration browser onto the display 3 4 2 1 4 Previewing a display e Save current display by choosing File Save e Choose Tools gt Preview Display e Watch display open in a previewer the slider in the bottom of window can be used to see any dynamic contents e Close previewer window 3 4 2 2 Converting GWDU ground displays as batch operation e Choose Tools Run Batch Operation e Click Browse and set source directory to lt USS base directory examples import gwdu e Click Browse and set destinati
309. rriprtraprrrprrsiprssa NDE NN R H N N LIVNFVELDVVVLVVLVLELDETEI prr I I I I I I Preview started 4 Sep 2006 at 13 38 23 Slider Index 0 13 Now you should use the slider at the bottom of the Previewer and see the Tank meter level move Previewer frame snap shoot Buttoni 14 Close the Previewer frame 15 Save display by selecting from menu File Save Save dialog is opened where you can enter dis play file name 33 3 6 IMPORT EXISTING DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Save display as ETSI tib File Name IMyDisplay uss Files of Type USS displays uss 16 Now try opening the display in the USS Executor select from menu Tools Executor Display is opened in the USS Executor which is the real execution application for the display H USS Display Executor uss amp uss2 File Navigate View Options Window Help o 6 e a 2 eleja 14 44 48 B HE P IP E 00 00 00 000 de 6 Untitled 6 Untitled 4 L PPP POPP PP LPP PI PPP LI PPP PIPL IS IPL PPL PPI PL PL PPT Pe OP PL PP PT OE PI TP PP PI PP IT I OOO FOO POP JOR PRI JO O O IO O O O O OOO O4Sep06 13 42 19 INFO Executor started O4Sep06 13 42 24 INFO Opening display home uss uss project MyDisplay uss This concludes the lesson in the USS Editors docking mechanism 3 6 Import existing displays The USS Editor can import displays from the following formats 1 FWDU displays 2 GWDU displays 3 NASA PCS displays 4 S
310. rtificate of Acceptance COC Certificate of Compliance 257 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY COL COLUMBUS Laboratory COL CC Columbus Control Centre Command An order to initiate a change via the transmission of data See IDAGS Command Button control initiating a TC command to be executed Command Button Displays consist of different items One item can be a command A command is displayed as a round button A guarded command as a round button marked with diagonal stripes A display with lots of commands for example is the COL Activation Part 1 display under examples uss fwdu APM FLTSYS OPS SYNOPTICS ACTIVATION ACT PT 1l uss Command List Displays consist of different items One item can be a command list A sample com mand list can be found in the home display COL Synoptics Home Page under APMNFLISYSNOPSNSYNOPTICS ROC by clicking on the Set Cabin Temp square button Compound Symbol Any collection of primitives which are used together to denote a component sys tem or function Compound symbols are a special subset of icons that can be edited See IDAGS Computation A computation is a data source for elements such as data fields in a display The value to be shown is determined by evaluating the computation s expression Control Display elements that are designed to cause a result when selected command buttons naviga tion buttons and input controls See DAGS CPL Common Procedure Language Electronic test procedures with manual and auto
311. s Reset to default size The current display is displayed in its default size which has been configured by the display author See also Resetting window to default size Tabbed Mode Toggles between displays being displayed in tabbed mode or not See also Toggling tabbed mode Undock Undocks the current display into a standalone application See also Undocking windows Dock All Docks all undocked displays back into the executor See also Docking all windows 9 1 6 Help Menu Everything that gives information about the use of USS is grouped into the help menu 9 2 Help Contents Opens the index of the user manual in HTML For Display name of display Shows the help for the current display See also Showing display help Search Opens a dialog to search the user manual for a given phrase Show All Hints Pops a dialog up which asks if all hints should be displayed again Data Quality Indicators for Display Displays the DOI Data Quality Indicators of the current display in an opened browser window About Opens a dialog displaying information about USS See also Getting the executor version information Display Versions and Compatibility USS displays are stored in XML format with the file extension uss see Section 9 3 for the XML schema The USS XML format is versioned independently of the USS software since the software is likely to change more frequently than the display format It is obvious that e
312. s e Mode Select mode of axis select between data set i e values from domain data source or Time Based Absolute for time values e Data set Click button to edit domain data source Mode set to Data set e Rotate Tick Label If checked Tick label is rotated e Auto Move If checked Graph will move automatically e Always show Zero If checked Graph will always show the zero on the axis e Automatic Range If checked Graph will change the range of the axis to keep values e Upper Range Upper limit of axis Automatic Range unchecked e Lower Range Lower limit of axis Automatic Range unchecked Line Graph Gridline properties General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Range Axis Vertical Gridline Style Dashed v Colour R 204 G 204 B 255 CCCCFF m Width 1 0 Horizontal Gridline Style Dashed Colour R 204 G 204 B 255 CCCCFF Width 1 0 OK Cancel Line Graph Gridline properties in Graph dialog 141 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES CHAPTER 4 EDITOR Line Graph Gridline Tab properties e Vertical Gridline Box Style solid dashed and dotted colour and line width can be defined for vertical gridlines e Horizontal Gridline Box Style solid dashed and dotted colour and line width can be defined for horizontal gridlines Line Graph Legend properties General Legend Gridline Domain Axis Rang
313. s batch import mechanism The USS Editor and Executor use the same import mechanism but batch operation are mainly awailable through the Editors batch tools 3 7 GUI Elements This lesson takes you through the major GUI elements of the USS Editor namely the View Settings and the Preferences 3 7 Lesson in using the GUI elements View Settings and Preferences 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Close all tool views and open the View Settings pa View Settings ES View Settings x e nx display 5 le 9 Grid Draw Color MIR 192 G 192 B 192 FCOCOCO Draw Style Dots Draw Thickness 1 Snap to Grid on Mowe During Snap to Grid on Resize During Spacing Horizontal 10 Spacing Vertical 10 9 Zoom Zoom Factor in Percent Zoom Step Size in Percent v 100 10 A Display is open with the View Settings showing The View Settings are not saved with the displays the properties are non persistent and only for viewing in the Editor They provide a help when editing 39 3 7 GUI ELEMENTS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 Change the grid colour to draw style to yellow and the draw style to Lines I USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help SEE B DBCIEISD DEE 5 un
314. s us Eemporary pattern accepting any XML Structure until a ye de Welk Ib Vole ds adie olay E S _anyElement element x fate ribetes text _anyElement _reference attribute reference text _AxesMap euere de te e a Clas So les das R element entry element DataSourcePair DataSourcePair reference element null empty element ValueAxisProperties ValueAxisProperties _CommandOrRef CloseDisplayCommand attribute class CloseDisplayCommand reference CloseDisplayCommand ExitCommand 238 CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA Ioco pabuttes class sciteCommandl t rererence scs Comma lc OpenDisplayCommand attribute class OpenDisplayCommand _reference OpenDisplayCommand StringTeleCommand attribute class StringTeleCommand _reference StringTeleCommand StructuredTeleCommand acctcribuce Class 1 SecruccurcecdTteleCommand Y t reference StructuredTeleCommand _DataSourceOrRef ExternalDataSource tacita tte class 1 PS recites ao ice h reference ExternalDactcasourcse ETH at Ton Macer DUETE class A Meompubst ont Lp o reterenees Computat dom _ElementChoice element ARS Are H Tee T element BarGraph BarGraph _reference element CAGShape CAGShape _reference element CheckValve t CheckValve _reference L element ComboBox ComboBox _reference element CommandButt
315. se with CCU d Cu issue The CU issue to use with CCU e Cu revision The CU revision to use with CCU 11 Click on the MDB SCOE category D Project MDB SCOE D Display SID 0 3 Consistency l File path home uss Perforce us Browse 3 Data Source 3 Import CU internal version 316989981 Database Default Settings for SCOE File 3 MDB General 3 MDB CDU 3 MDB CCU D The MDB SCOE category contains the following properties a SID The System Id SID of the SCOE to use b File path The File path to the SCOE file Shown in the category is also the SCOE internal CU version 12 Click on the browse button to change SCOE file Choose file Look In C scoe z E E eae EURECA Mission DUMMY MISSION 8 CCU Q TEST DISTR V4 0 0 16 D o CCU 268436077 operational configuration 0 consistency date 11255313 o CCU 278561597 consistency date 1134023659000 08 Dec 2005 06 34 1 ccu 278561660 operational configuration 0 consistency date 11546008 APM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS AIV V6 0 1 29 Sep 2005 08 32 57 APM Mission MASTER 12 CCU MCS AIV V7 1 0 14 Dec 2005 17 33 59 CGS Mission AEOLUS COMMON CCU EADS SI TEST V1 0 0 07 Jul 2 METOP Mission EM CCU LBU_FM1_OPS 2 0 1 15 Jul 2004 12 01 00 4 Il gt File Name Files of Type XMLSCOE Info C info xmb ly Choose file Cancel
316. show current selected item s properties and allow to edit them if they are editable 2 Consistency Checker show the results of latest consistency check for current display information warnings and errors are displayed 3 Synoptic Hierarchy show all open displays as well as the content of the USS project folder and can be used for easy navigation when multiple displays are open 4 Symbol Library show the currently open library and allows to change library and select symbols 5 System Configuration Browser show the content from the currently SCOE file and can be used for easily adding End items to displays 6 View Settings show display settings like grid configuration etc for the currently selected display view 3 3 3 1 Lesson in tool views 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon when open close all tool views and open Property Editor from menu Views Property Editor 19 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL Wi USS Display Editor 2 6 0 File Edit View Tools Element Window Help sa amp eum o GOGOE o Dlua e e le jajajajajaja y Property Editor amp x a ax diplaysi x display 1 AAE Appearance Background Color R 238 G 238 B 238 Background Symbol Library Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour Show Execute Button 9 Context Help URL Opsname Qurce Source M
317. sing All Displays e To close all displays but the currently selected display Closing other displays 5 3 11 Closing All Displays 5 3 11 1 Prerequisites e At least one display must be open 5 3 11 2 Closing All Displays Closes every open display To close all displays e Choose File gt Close all All displays are closed 5 3 11 3 See also e To close only one display which must be selected Closing Display e To close all but the currently selected display Closing Other Displays 5 3 12 Closing Other Displays 5 3 12 1 Prerequisites e At least one display must be open 177 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 3 12 2 Closing Other Displays Closes all open displays but the selected one So at the end there s only one display left the currently selected display It isn t possible to select more displays to be left open To close other displays e Do one of the following Choose File gt Close Other Right click on tab select Close Other All displays but the selected one are closed 5 3 12 3 See also e To close only one selected display Closing Displays e To close every open display Closing All Displays 5 3 13 Toggling Tabbed Mode 5 3 13 1 Toggling Tabbed Mode Displays can be shown either on a tabbed window one window at a time or as iconized internal win dows many in parallel To toggle tabbed mode e Choose Window gt Tabbed mode GUI shows displays according to new tabbed mo
318. splay You can view the expressions of a display Just right click on any dynamic element e g rectangle select Properties in the popup menu and in the popup window there ll be a table row called Expression in which the expression is listed To show expression of dynamic element 1 Right click on any dynamic element 2 In the popup dialog select Properties 3 The Parameter Information window will popup displaying the expression and other values 180 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR Element Properties VALUE FLUID 5 4 DISPLAY INTERACTION CheckValve2 Data Source Type Formatted Value Raw Value Engineering Value Engineering Unit Type Output Processing Status Acquisition Status Monitoring Status Delta Monitoring Status Soft Limit dowen Soft Limit upper Hard Limit dowen Hard Limit upper Soft Limit delta Hard Limit delta Expected Value Acquisition Time Time Since Acquisition APID TM Packet Calibration Rule Computation Any Engineering value UNKNOWN UNKNOWN UNKNOWN UNKNOWN 4 Click Close 5 4 3 Showing Display Properties 5 4 3 1 Prerequisites e Display must be open and selected 5 4 3 2 Show Display Properties USS provides several display properties including title author version and revison Display properties also include a display comment and change comments for each revision To get detailed information about a display 1 Select File gt Properties 2 A
319. stency ene eena checker bat checker sh uss e ditor ien uss editor sh uss executor uss executor uss fw du uss fw du uss qw du M a a X bat extract hat extract sh eue bat e Q amp OQ amp Q e uss qwdu uss localizer uss localizer uss mdb uss mdb uss report uss report sh postprocess generator generator sh display display bat sh bat exporter bat exporter sh e uss viewer uss Vviewer bat sh RII 23 Items 23 Files 35 7 KB Total O Directories Konquerer showing the contents of the uss bin folder 16 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI 10 Find the uss editor sh file in the bin folder Selected uss editor sh file 11 All shell scripts i e files ending with extension sh are launch files for the USS applications for UNIX Likewise all the batch scripts i e files ending bat are launch files for the USS applications for MS Windows Click the uss editor sh file and the USS Editor starts USS Starting Please wait Start splash picture of the USS Editor 3 3 Using the Editor GUI 3 3 1 Introduction This lesson will introduce the usage of the basic user interface of the USS Editor You shall work with the following subjects 1 Docking mechanism of editor panels 2 Tool views of the editor 3 Printing of displays 3 3 2 Docking mechanism of editor panels The USS Editor features a docking framework for tool and display views By default views a
320. style file pws_dgistyle xml S PCS pces_dqistyle xml MCS mcs_dqistyle xml The style files define foreground and background colours characters and tooltip to display on data fields for all combinations of acquisition and monitoring status The style files can be edited in any standard text editor Changes take effect when the Editor Execu tor is restarted 4 4 Working with Elements USS displays are built up by adding and arranging elements on the display area and linking these elements to MDB end items All elements provided with the USS Editor are IDAGS compatible and are Label Data field including LCD Navigation button Command button Command list combo box Graphs Line Strip and Bar graph Shapes Polyline Rectangle Ellipse Arc Polygon Symbol including Status light Image Meters Linear Elliptic Tank and Thermometer Pipe Valve and CheckValve Input field See the section Elements for information about specific properties and handling of the elements Symbols in the Symbol Library can either be pre defined as shipped with the USS Editor or user defined See Creating New Symbols to create new symbols in the library 4 4 4 Adding and Deleting Elements There are a number of ways to add elements to a display Use the toolbar buttons Add new label Add new rectangle etc Right click on the display area and use the context menu that appears Use the Element Add menu Use a keyboard shortcut
321. t xsd integer ea Command Pipe element Show3DEffect xsd boolean element PipeConnectors acctcriouctce Class ulace element PipeConnector PipeConnector reference x hn element Diameter xsd decimal eu Sene ue TE Element PipeConnector PipeSegments element Point Point PipeSegment element PipeSegment 1 elements Ounce _reference element Destination PipeConnector 235 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA PipeSegments element PipeSegments accriouctce Class M LIOUE ILS ST E A r PipeSegment element PipeSegment _reference x PlaceHolder Element Point element x xsd integer element y xsd integer Polygon element Points element Point Point log Shape Polyline element Points 4 element Point Point E element DrawStyle DrawStyle Semen A POWwoeol eb Sc OOo Kean element ArrowEnd xsd boolean Element Rectangle Shape Shape element FillStyle FillStyle element DrawStyle DrawStyle Element SimpleTeleCommandParameter TeleCommandParameter StringTeleCommand TeleCommand StripGraph element SubgraphMap diede a pude elas s c timide tier a element entry 1 element LineGraph LineGraph element int xsd positivelnteger L x Fa LineGraph StructuredTeleCommand element Parameters actccrciouce class ias des ene element SimpleTeleCommandParameter _reference CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE element
322. t This document is the user manual for the Unified Synoptic System USS USS is a visual front end for monitoring and control systems The USS software allows editing and execution of synoptic graphical displays within the Columbus program and CGS It also provides import capabilities for display formats used within FWDU GWDU and NASA PCS This manual includes installation and usage instructions for the USS software Note that this docu ment is also available in PDF format Chapter 1 Installation and Getting Started This chapter describes how to install USS and where to find more detailed information if any problems should occur during the installation Section 1 2 describes how to adjust USS to the target environment As an example the configuration of the home display is shown Section 1 3 shows how to do the first steps with the editor and executor applications 1 1 Installing the Product 1 1 1 Prerequisites To install the USS product in the target environment make sure that 1 The distribution archive is available For Linux systems the archive has the file name uss x y z linux i586 tar gz where x y z is the release version identifier e g 2 9 0 For Windows systems the archive has the file name uss x y z windows i586 zip 2 The target environment fulfills the system requirements as specified in the INSTALL file of the distribution archive 1 1 2 Installing the product on Linux and Solaris To install USS into the target
323. t Literals arctcciiouctce elass 1 text element string text DF element Name text i element Unit tco E element UsingRaw xsd boolean element element element element element DataSourcePair element DomainDataSource _DataSourceOrRef element RangeDataSource _DataSourceOrRef element DomainDataSource _DataSsSourceO0OrRef element RangeDataSource _DataSourceOrRef Display elemert tas best me WARS LES GS y Height xsd integer BEarKk rolando eh C ob ME BackgroundSymbolName text BackgroundsymbolLibraryName 1 Text l element ExecuteButton xsd boolean element TargetSystem text element DatabaseAlias text element HelpURL text element element Format Description AN J R eile by Siemens t element ChangeLog element ChangeLogEntries element ChangelogEntry 4 element Revision text 231 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE element eod ue xb of element Date xsd integer seconds since the epoch element Comment text L x Er element Source Semen OMe Grand Mee D element Properties element property attriolte name exe l attribute value text x js element Elements _KlementChoicex DrawStyle etement Ie S nN se VINO tee SOI DON AS iss 7 elemente Color 1 Color z element Width xsd float Element element X xsd integer element Y xsd inte
324. t New Change Entry Add New Log Entry Select Change Entry LO gt Selected Change Author uss Selected Change Comment Automatic import of PREP PCS display Selected Change Date 10 07 06 Selected Change Revision 1 0 The Property Editor shows the properties for the imported display 10 Now import a Satmon display with path USS INSTALL DIR examples import satmon 1092 xml oaks aaae 3 1131 xml 3 1093 xml 3 1094 xml 3 1095 xml 53 1113 xml 3 1120 xml 3 1121 xml 3 1130 xml 53 1140 xml 3 1221 xml 3 1222 xml 3 1223 xml 3 1224 xml 3 1225 xml 3 1226 xml 3 1227 xml 3 1228 xml 3 1229 xml 3 1230 xml 3 1301 xml 3 1302 xml 53 1303 xml 3 1325 xml 3 1326 xml 3 1327 xml 3 1351 xml 3 1352 xml 3 1353 xml 3 1371 xml 3 1372 xml 3 1373 xml U RS m a 0 0 05 0 05 1 5 5 M File Name 1092 xml Files of Type Satmon displays C xmbD M 37 3 6 IMPORT EXISTING DISPLAYS CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 11 Click open to open display W USS Display Editor 2 6 0 INES File Edit View Tools Element Window Help R Qiapa a R m El ed eg a a E E RR I 9 Property Editor x ax ro home uss fuss main examples import satmon 1092xml 2 x 16 85 1092 xml EN 9 Appearance Background Color EE F o G 0 B O 000000 Background Symbol Library v Background Symbol Name 9 Behaviour S
325. t violation Display Status indicator is red At least one data has a warning danger limit violation Display Status indicator is yellow o 5 2 5 2 Overall Monitoring Status Indicator The overall monitoring status indicator shows the monitoring status for all currently open displays 170 CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 5 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL CONFIGURATION 9 USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 IE File Navigate View Options Freeze Window Help oudaala aa S a o 19Jun07 09 09 49 da CMU 1 DMSS_CMUI_MCD 6 DMC Commands CMU 1 DMSS_CMU oe Nom Unit Avail Redun E System Bus Redun power PwrA On Current 3 00 Processor Nom Nom Board HK Data Command Input Out put Ready Stat Board Board Redun HK Data Commands 3 00 Nom A n ea dy i Sec Vokage Stat Sec Vokage Stat sbe A Internal Bus CMU Command and Measurement Unit CMU1 Commands Close Nom Pwr Line Monitoring status indicator for all open displays All monitored measurements have an unknown state All monitored measurements are within limits ne or more measurements are out of soft limit One or more measurements are out of hard limit SIM TM MCS s pr N Upd O Perf fs Connected The following table lists all four colors used to indicate the monitoring status and explains the corre sponding overall monitoring state Table 5 2 Overall monitoring st
326. tatus For activation deactivation two Pwr converters im the HRM are used to supply Pwr to nominal and redundant HRM cores which are cold redundant via the HRM internal common Pwr Bus This procedure uses the FLAP HRM Activation which Switches ON both HRM Pwr converters activates the nominal HRN core if the nominal HRM core activation fails the redundant HRM core is automatically activated instead Starts RT acquisition amp monitoring of HRM data enables the HRM MMU link Master NMU Fiber Optic Jumper installation must be completed before starting this step After HRM activation correct configuration of HCOR APS HRFM must be verified to support downlink of Ku band packets via the HRM 1 1 Verify PDU Power Outlets Verify PDUL Subsys Pwr Bus5 ON ES Verify PDU2 Subsys Pwr BusS ON pe 1 2 Activate HRN Verify HRM Pwr A OFF esi Verify HRM Pwr B OFF a and MEM Activation Execute After 1 min verify the following items Verify HRM Nom Unit AVAIL SS Verify HRM Pwr A ON ea Verify HRM Pwr B ON Ee Verify HRM Ready Stat Nom READY Verity HRM Core Stat Nom ON Verify HRM 28 VOC A Current lt 1 07 A Verify HRM 28 VOC B Current lt 1 07 A lg Verify HRM Core Module Nom Secondary Voltage Stat OK MB ODF Style Procedural Display 1 Creating a procedural display is very similar to creating other types of displays Start by opening the editor via installed icon
327. te icon 4 5 2 2 MDB Version Control of Symbol Libraries Like the USS displays the user libraries can be version controlled The MDB interface for symbol libraries in the USS Editor handles synchronization submitting locking deleting with configured MDB Create New Library Rename Library Delete Library Create New Symbol Open MDB Library Sync Dialog Save in MDB Location of MDB actions for user MDB symbol libraries The symbol library MDB actions are located in the symbol library view under the edit popup menu press button Edit MDB actions available on user MDB symbol libraries 1 Synchronization Browser Browser for viewing available symbol libraries in MDB 2 Save in MDB submit symbol library new or modified 3 Open from MDB synchronizing of symbol library 4 Forced Open from MDB revert synchronizing of symbol library overwriting existing local li brary 5 Lock for Edit on MDB Lock for Edit of symbol library lock library in MDB to enable editing 6 Delete in MDB Deletion of symbol library MDB Library Sync Dialog is a small tool that enables the synchronization of symbol library not present in the uss project folder The dialog opens a connection to the MDB and gives a tree view of the current MDB tree The MDB connection is configurable via the Preferences 130 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES LC APM GJ COMMON TEST SUPP Ed GR
328. tem presented by this OutputAlpha If this has no value no visual representation will be created See display 1005 xml If an iden tifier other Param String than op sname is used no out put will be dis played for this mea sure ment 214 CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS Table 7 8 continued OuiputAlpha attribute Not used see Table 7 5 USS fields use a DOI style definition For Satmon displays the MCS style is used The Satmon runtime color coding for ac quisition StyleID String and moni toring states is un known and will proba bly differ from the MCS defi nition The length of this Length Integer OutputAlpha in number of characters 215 7 4 SATMON DISPLAYS CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING FOREIGN DISPLAY FORMATS Table 7 8 continued OuiputAlpha attribute 216 The output conversion to perform A mapped to USS type String F mapped to USS type Float I mapped to USS type Integer USS will always present the engineering value even if these assumptions are wrong Number formatting will only be performed as defined in FormatStr if type Float has been detected for the item This type de tection is not reliable As a result field con tents might not be for matted cor rectly and draw outside of their bounds de fined by Length The type de tection could be im proved i
329. ting new ground ops Satmon like display 3 4 2 1 1 Setting project root folder and MDB configuration Close all open displays this is a requirement to change the project root folder Choose Edit gt Preferences In the popup dialog choose Project tab in the tree structure on the left Click Browse button to set the Root folder to home user uss project 3 4 2 1 2 Opening and saving displays from and to MDB Start my making a new display from menu choose File New Add a label by choosing from menu Element Add Label and add a text by editing label text in Property Editor open it if not open by choosing from menu Views Property Editor Save display by choosing from menu FilelSave In dialog save display to location and display name capitalize name of display USS Project folder CU DIRECTORY APM COMMON_TEST_SUPP G Press OK to save dialog and choose from menu File MDB Add to MDB Wait for operation to finish and press OK to confirmation dialog Displays are now saved in the MDB Close all displays by choosing from menu File Close all displays might need to be save or can celled Choose File gt MDB gt MDB Browser sync lock for edit Select APM COMMON_ TEST SUPP GRD_DATA USS EDITOR MANUAL_TESTS TUTORIAL in the browser Right click then select Sync from the Version Control popup menu and wait for synchronization to complete Click Apply In the synoptic hierarchy on the right side select
330. tion the following warning dialog will be displayed because now the oldest data might get lost The dialog gives 2 options 1 Continue Displays stays in freeze mode and the user accepts that the oldest data for the display might get lost 2 Exit Freeze Mode Displays returns to real time 5 5 2 The Freeze Mode Controls To use the freeze mode in the executor it has to be enabled first in the freeze mode preferences This will make the freeze mode available for all displays opened after change of the setting The following table lists the freeze mode control buttons and their effect on a display Table 5 3 Freeze mode controls Button Goto Beginning The display time is set to the point in time Performs a major step backwards in time The Fast Backward default duration for a major step is 60 seconds The value for major step duration can be changed in the freeze mode preferences Performs a step back in time to the previous change of single or multiple telemetry items on the display Note that this operation will skip periods of time for which no telemetry is available in a single step Stop Exit Freeze Mode Exits the freeze mode and restores the latest telemetry received for the frozen display Step Backward 189 5 6 HELP CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR Table 5 3 continued Suspends real time updates for a single display Pause Enter Freeze Mode or stops a freeze mode play operation No telemetry for a frozen disp
331. tor Parameters For using the USS Editor on MCS use a configuration like the one described below 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Project and set the following Root folder sanl mcs shared home cgsadmin uss project 2 Choose Database and set the following Database User ops cgsadmin Database sid oracle Database port 1521 Database password admin_1 Database hostname mcs dbs 3 Choose MDB General and set the following Use CDU preferred option is off if selected MDB CDU Preferences will be used else MDB CCU Preferences will be used System Tree version 12 System mission MASTER System element configuration APM 4 Choose MDB CDU and set the following CU version 1 CU test Version 13 CU revision 0 CU path APM COL_CC MCS_DEV COL_GND_SYNOPT CU issue 1 CU instance MCS_AIV1 CU domain CGS 253 A 2 EXECUTOR PARAMETARPENDIX A EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION IN MCS ENVIRONMENT NOTE MDB identification sequence is version issue revision 5 Choose MDB CCU and set the following CU version 7 CU revision 1 CU path APM CU name MCS_AIV CU issue 1 NOTE MDB identification sequence is version issue revision 6 Choose MDB SCOE and set the following SID 0 File path san1 mcs shared mcs_home uss share scoe 316989981_0_info xml CU internal version 316989981 NOTE CCU CDU preference setting should not be in conflict with SCOE file preference selection A 2 Executor Parameters Set configu
332. tring Create Command Cancel Create command button with selected command e Select Structured and with input fields e Press Create Command button A command button and if applicable a set of input fields are created in the display area Move button and fields where they shall be placed display t e x aax TM ID NODE ID 3 PATH ID RATE CHECKSUM INDIC ONBOARD NODE DMS TLM Start Cyclic Tn Packet Cnd SW y 4 I Command button with associated input fields e You may now edit the properties of the Command Button and of the input fields Start by selecting the Command Button e In the property editor press the mini button to open the command editor 136 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 6 ELEMENTS ADVANCED PROPERTIES li Edit Telecommand issue sw command Kind SWOP 9 GC SW CMD TM ID Name issue sw command 3 NODE ID EY PATH ID 3 RATE Y CHECKSUM INDIC C ONBOARD NODE Command Preview issue sw command SW CMD DMS TLM Start Cyclic Tlm Packet Cmd SW TM ID NODE ID PA TH ID null RATE null CHECKSUM INDIC null ONBOARD NODE Telecommand editor with command preview e Select one of the command parameters on the left side The input field properties are shown e Edit parameter properties li Edit Telecommand issue sw command Gj SW CMD
333. try for the new dqi style file by adding the following to lines in the DOI section of the properties file uss view dgistyle target5 TST USS sehen ddi eyle Files Sqi5esseeuL eme tst ecpbsies led Save the properties file now the USS application will on next invoking be aware of the new Display target and DOI style Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 46 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 9 CREATE ASCII DISPLAYS 8 In the empty new display created by the editor on default startup try selecting the new DOI Style i e display target in the proeprties of the display properties in property editor tool view Target System 9 Dimensions Height Width 9 Information Description Title Editor shows the new DOI Style available as a display target in the property editor This concludes the lesson in the USS DOI Style preferences Normally these settings are preset de livered from the system administrator 3 9 Create ASCII displays The USS Editor can be used to create pure ASCII displays in the USS display format ASCII display contains only character based elements 3 9 1 Lesson in creating ASCII displays 1 Start by opening the editor via installed icon Screenshot of USS Editor started in default layout 2 Add a label by selecting in the menu Element Add Label Babe 4728 B B D A text label is created in the new display 3 Make four more labels and sel
334. utor 5 1 Introduction USS provides a synoptic display execution environment for on board and ground application The ex ecutor can be run on ground based computers using LINUX SOLARIS and MS Windows The executor executes displays which have been authored with the editor This chapter explains how you can configure the executor as you wish e g by enabling tooltips and how you can exit the executor Starting the executor is explained in Getting Started 5 1 1 Configuring User Settings 5 1 1 1 Prerequisites e Executor must be ruming 5 1 1 2 Configuring User Settings This section gives a short general quick start on how to configure user settings All available preferences and their corresponding dialogs are explained in full detail in Configuring the Executor To view and change your personal executor application settings 1 Choose Options gt Preferences 2 In the popup window select what you want to configure E g select Tooltips in the tree struc ture on the left side Other choices would be Project Commanding Tab Appearance Snapshots Reports Import or Freeze mode Preferences nx 3 Project Tooltips 3 Commanding v Enable Tooltips 3 Tab Appearance D 3 Snapshots 3 Reports 3 Import 3 Freeze Made Cancel 3 Change the settings e g Check or uncheck the checkbox to enable disable tooltips 4 Click OK 165 5 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL CONFIGURA
335. via hierarchy panel 1 Choose View gt Show Hierarchy if hierarchy isn t already visible 2 The display hierarchy see red rectangle in next screenshot is shown as a tree panel on the left side of the workspace 3 Click into hierarchy panel Select Display The selected display opens If it was already open the selected display is focused otherwise the display is loaded and opened 175 5 3 WINDOW HANDLING CHAPTER 5 EXECUTOR 8 USS Display Executor cgsadmin mcs ws 1 File Navigate View Options Window Help z e dw e e Blan 00 00 00 000 6 COL Synoptics Home Page COL Home P S IE C home cgsadmin prj uss M amp COL Synoptics Home Page COL Home Page MCD Gq FLTSYS 7 Gq OPS gt L SYNOPTICS 7 CASYNOPTICS_RO COL HOME External Ej GO_HOME Payload gt 7 INT gt EJ PAYLOAD Upd Perf fs Not Connected e Navigating via buttons Navigate via buttons embedded in display by display author The navigation strategy is defined by the display author 5 3 8 Navigating to Home Display 5 3 8 1 Prerequisites e Home display must be configured via Options gt Preferences Select Project tab on left hand side Either click Use selected display to set current active display as home display or click Browse button in border area labeled Home Display 5 3 8 2 Navigating to Home Display USS provides the capability to navigate betwee
336. viewer context menu 4 3 2 3 Slider With Manual Specification Change Data Source Value Name VALUE Float Binding Type Opsname CTC2_Prim_Current_A_DMC Eng Value 2 3 Raw Value 1024 Acquisition Status Monitoring Status NOMINAL DISABLED Manual specification of data source values When a DataField or another element with a data source is right clicked in Slider mode the popup menu above appears Selecting Change data source the dialog above appears This dialog allows to directly enter the value of a data source Note that when the slider is moved the manually entered value is lost 122 CHAPTER 4 EDITOR 4 3 WORKING WITH DISPLAYS 4 3 2 4 Slider With Values From File When the slider is used the data source values can be loaded from and saved to file Save and load of data source values are available from the popup menu shown above The layout of the data source value files is illustrated in the figure below The files are comma separated and can be modified with a text editor Engineering Value Raw Value Acquisition Status Monitoring Status 8 66025403784439 8 66025403784439 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 7 965299180241967 7 965299180241967 NOMINAL DISABLED 7 144726796328037 7 144726726328037 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 6 211477802783113 6 211477802783113 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 5 180270093731311 5 180270093731311 NOMINAL IN LIMITS 4 0673 664307560095 4 0673664307550095
337. w Execute Button L 9 Context aux Help URL Opsname 4 4 Editor started with default empty display created 22 CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 3 USING THE EDITOR GUI 2 In the editor select from menu File Print Print j General Page Setup Appearance Print Service Name hp4730 Properties Status Accepting jobs Type Info _ Print To File Print Range Copies All Number of copies aH Collate O Pages The editors print dialog opens with default printer selected The General tab the following print properties can be selected a Name Selects Printer b Properties Properties for printer if available c Print To File Check if print should go to a post script file d Print Range Select the range of pages to print e Copies Number of copies and how to handle multiple copies 3 Click the tab Page Setup to show further properties Print General Page Setup Appearance Media Size A4 SO DIN amp JIS Source Automatically Select Orientation Margins A Portrait left mm right mm Landscape 25 4 25 4 O Reverse Portrait top mm bottom mm 25 4 25 4 V Reverse Landscape cancer The Print dialog shows the Page Setup properties for print
338. w RO RR Aum OH LE bed 72 Dole Create NEWS ONS epson AA Ae 78 3 14 1 Lesson 1n creating Symbols uus eoo e epe noB pce oU Y ROROR Aoc RR n 78 25 Useadvanced Clements o que dumme oy Coe mur bee EO b DEOR Pow x Roe CN Rx ox d 84 3 15 1 Lesson in creating advanced elements llle 84 3 15 2 Lesson in creating using fluid elements o 89 oo Change USS Properties File ociosos resi 91 3 16 1 Lesson in USS properties aoaaa 91 Bl DECO COB RIOS r aea aa opa AR 93 3 17 1 Lesson in changing the SCOE file o o e 93 Ole Check U ON ISENG rrr 95 3 18 1 Lesson in checking display consistency 2 2 ooo o 95 SAE MOD DIPA e e ca en reso Re E aaa 99 3 19 1 Lesson in using the editor MDB interfacing o o 99 3 19 2 Lesson in using the editor MDB interfacing for Symbol Libraries 105 3 20 Extended Example Create A Procedural Display o o 106 3 20 1 Lesson in creating procedural displays ooo 108 Editor 115 ZI Iiroduacuol ob eae aw Ses ee Ree KS EEO arado A 115 42 Ine Editor Workspace cose cen atGuee eee ee Bae GbE Ose patr enaga 115 42 1 Arranging Views and Tab Windows oo e 116 4 2 1 1 Docking mechanism of editor panels n 116 2212 Dale CODCODI Sou ie EA ASAS 117 4 2 1 3 Drag and Drop Windows eee 117 4 2 1 4 Minimize and Maximize 0 002 000004 118 215 TPL amp d 24
339. xtensions added to later versions may not be compatible with earlier versions In order to recognize possible conflicts every display contains a version identifier In the example below the format version of the display is 5 e silo UA lt USSObject gt lt CGenerator gt uss 2 9 AS CTI lt FormatVersion gt 5 lt FormatVersion gt Daie olle lt Width gt 880 lt Width gt KEEL Me 79190 lt eae are gt Bates bey USSObjece gt 224 9 3 XML DISPLAY FILE FORMAT SCHEMA CHAPTER 9 REFERENCE This version identifier is checked each time the display is opened by the USS software The general rules are e Backward compatibility USS software supporting display format N can also read all displays with versions less than N With other words displays will never become outdated or unusable e No forward compatibility USS software supporting display format N cannot read displays with versions higher than N since it does not and can not know about the new features in the higher versions In this case the software issues a warning message and refuses to load the display In consequence these rules mean you can update to newer USS software and can still open all your old displays but you can t build displays with newer USS software versions and expect them to run with old software versions The full list of display versions and compatibility with software versions is shown in Section 9 3 9 3 XML Display File Format S
340. y checker must be executed on a display before installing it onboard When being executed onboard the commands can be updated only via the input fields If a value is written into an input field the constraint mechanism automatically checks it e The execution of the USS consistency checker can be started in the USS editor for the actual edited display For a set of displays the consistency checker is started as command line call Uss Concio ten y e ker smile JOP TTON GS cce Dus qe ves eri ORI als play CI OPTION Specify h for getting a complete list of available options Default option setting is print report as plain text to standard output search for SCOE data in current directory and set test configuration to zero ccuVersion CCU internal version number of CCU against which the displays shall be checked display dir OS path where to find the display s to be checked 6 2 LAPAP MKII Columbus onboard commanding with USS integrated into LAPAP MKII is described in this section An overview of the commanding scenario is given in the following diagram Columbus Onboard Commanding Elements PREP Synoptic TC Response Ground TC PCS Predefined Command Instance I I Execute l Time FLAP ommand Buffer c i c mmand Columbus ommand Start i Arm amp Fires DMS VTC ACS VTC 1 2 i Two Stage Buffer VTC ACS l ommand Command Executor l I I I I I I I I I
341. y selecting from menu Element Add Strip Graph Change width to 500 pixels and height to 500 pixels by changing the properties in the property editor Find the specific strip graph properties in the property editor 9 General Configure Graph Click to edit Select Sub Graph LineGraph1 Sub Graph Weight 50 Specific strip graph properties Add a new sub graph line graph inside the stripgraph element by clicking the button plus in the property Select Sub Graph Click on button in property Configure Graph and set the title foreground and bacground colors to match picture below CHAPTER 3 TUTORIAL 3 10 MAKING A GRAPH DISPLAY General Legend Domain Axis Title Multiple Graph Title Style Style Example Background Color R 212 G 212 B 212 D4D4D4 Foreground Color SS R 160 G 32 B 240 4020F0 O Horizontal Orientation _ e Vertical Strip graph properties in graph configuration dialog 7 Click on domain tab General Legend Domain Axis Axis Label Domain Axis Colour SS R 160 G 32 B 240 A020F0 Mm Mode Time Based Absolute v Data Set Rotate Tick Label Auto Move Always Show Zero Automatic Range Axis Range Upper Lower The Graph Dialog shows the domain tab for the Strip Graph 8 Actualize the graph dialog changes by clicking OK button Multiple Graph m x x Q

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Philips CD1911B  Manuel d`utilisation  User Manual for Home-Use  TEFAL GV7096C0 Instruction Manual  K8055N_FR (rev.1).pub    Ver ficha tecnica - Almacenes Benamiel  Sanyo 26THW72R Split System Air Conditioner  JCCRM 912 - 一般社団法人 検査医学標準物質機構【ReCCS】  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file